NEC Manual

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 STOCK # 200705
Command Manual
JULY, 1998
NEC America, Inc.
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC America, Inc. NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Copyright 1998 NEC America, Inc. Printed in the U.S.A.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 i 4 3 2 1 ii 4 3 2 1 iii 4 3 2 1 iv 4 3 2 1 v 4 3 2 1 vi 4 3 2 1 vii 4 3 2 1 viii 4 3 2 1 ix 4 3 2 1 x 2 1 xi 2 1 xii 2 1 xiii 2 1 xiv 4 4 4 3 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 2 4 3 2 1 3 4 3 2 1 4 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 6 4 3 2 1 7 4 3 2 1 8 4 3 2 1 9 4 3 2 1 10 4 3 2 1 11 4 3 2 1 12 4 3 2 1 13 4 3 2 1 14 4 3 2 1 15 4 3 2 1 16 4 3 2 1 17 4 3 2 1 18 4 3 2 1 19 4 3 2 1 20 4 3 2 1 21 4 3 2 1 22 4 3 2 1 23 4 3 2 1 24 4 3 2 1 25 4 3 2 1 26 4 3 2 1 27 4 3 2 1 28 4 3 2 1 29 4 3 2 1 30 4 3 2 1 31 4 3 2 1 32 4 3 2 1 33 4 3 2 1 34 4 3 2 1 35 4 3 2 1 36 4 3 2 1 37 4 3 2 1 38 4 3 2 1 39 4 3 2 1 40 4 3 2 1 41 4 3 2 1 42
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No. ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE JANUARY, 1995 ISSUE 6 DATE DATE DATE ISSUE 3 JULY, 1995 ISSUE 7 DATE DATE ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998 ISSUE 8
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual
Revision Sheet Page 1/12
ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 43 4 3 2 1 44 4 3 2 1 45 4 3 2 1 46 4 3 2 1 47 4 3 2 1 48 4 3 2 1 49 4 3 2 1 50 4 3 2 1 51 4 3 2 1 52 4 3 2 1 53 4 3 2 1 54 4 3 2 1 55 4 3 2 1 56 4 3 2 1 57 4 3 2 1 58 4 3 2 1 59 4 3 2 1 60 4 3 2 1 61 4 3 2 1 62 4 3 2 1 63 4 3 2 1 64 4 3 2 1 65 4 3 2 1 66 4 3 2 1 67 4 3 2 1 68 4 3 2 1 69 4 3 2 1 70 4 3 2 1 71 4 3 2 1 72 4 3 2 1 73 4 3 2 1 74 4 3 2 1 75 4 3 2 1 76 4 3 2 1 77 4 3 2 1 78 4 3 2 1 79 4 3 2 1 80 4 3 2 1 81 4 3 2 1 82 4 3 2 1 83 4 3 2 1 84 4 3 2 1 85 4 3 2 1 86 4 3 2 1 87 4 3 2 1 88 4 3 2 1 89 4 3 2 1 90 4 3 2 1 91 4 3 2 1 92 4 3 2 1 93 4 3 2 1 94 4 3 2 1 95 4 3 2 1 96 4 3 2 1 97 4 3 2 1 98
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 4 3 2 1 491 4 3 2 1 492 4 3 2 1 493 4 3 2 1 494 4 3 2 1 495 4 3 2 1 496 4 3 2 1 497 4 3 2 1 498 4 3 2 1 499 4 3 2 1 500 4 3 2 1 501 4 3 2 1 502 4 3 2 1 503 4 3 2 1 504 4 3 2 1 505 4 3 2 1 506 4 3 2 1 507 4 3 2 1 508 4 3 2 1 509 4 3 2 1 510 4 3 2 1 511 4 3 2 1 512 4 3 2 1 513 4 3 2 1 514 4 3 2 1 515 4 3 2 1 516 4 3 2 1 517 4 3 2 1 518 4 3 2 1 519 4 3 2 1 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISSUE No. 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
DATE
MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5
DATE
ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 4 5 6 6 7
1. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2. DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Data Entry Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Assigning New Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Displaying or Changing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 Cautions Pertaining to Entry Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. COMMANDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AABD Assignment of ACC Restriction Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AADC Assignment of Additional Digit Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAED Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAKP Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAND Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AANI Assignment of ANI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AARP Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AARS Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AATC Assignment of Authorization Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AATM Assignment of ATM Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACBC Assignment of Call by Call Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACDD Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial in Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACDN Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACFO Assignment of Call Forwarding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACFR Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACFS Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACIC Assignment of CIC Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACID Assignment of Caller ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACMO Assignment of Clocked Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACND Assignment of Calling Number Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACNP Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACOC Assignment of Central Office Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E)
3. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 16 28 29 30 35 39 42 44 45 46 48 50 55 56 57 59 61 63 65 66 67 68 69
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Revision 4.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page ACPE Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ACPG Assignment of Call Pickup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 ACSA Assignment of Connection Service Index A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 ACSC Assignment of CSC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 ACSI Assignment of Connection Service Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 ADA1 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ADA2 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 ADIM Assignment of Dial Intercom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 ADPC Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 AEFR Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 AEKD Assignment of External Key Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 AEVT Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 AFCD Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 AFCP Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 AFRS Assignment of Flexible Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 AHLS Assignment of Hot Line Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 AHMS Assignment of Hold Music Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 AHMS2 Assignment of Hold Music Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 AICD Assignment of Intercom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 AIDD Assignment of User ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 AIOC Assignment of IOC Port Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 AISA Assignment of Individual Speed Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 AISD Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 AISP Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 AIZP Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 AKYD Assignment of Key Data for Dterm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ALDN Assignment of Listed Directory Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ALPE Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 AMAT Assignment of Master Attendant Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 AMDD Assignment of MODEM Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 AMND Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 ANCD Assignment of Night Connection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 ANDD Assignment of Name Display Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 ANND Assignment of Necessary Digits Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ANPD Assignment of Numbering Plan Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 AOFC Assignment of Office Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 AOPR Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 AOSP Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 APAD Assignment of PAD Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 APCR Assignment of Primary Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 APHN Assignment of Phantom Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ii Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E)

Page APSW ARAC ARDN ARNP ARPC ARRC ARSC ARTD ARTE ARTI ASAT ASCL ASDC ASDT ASFC ASGD ASHC ASHP ASHU ASID ASLU ASPA ASPD ASTD ASTN ASTP ASYD ATAS ATCC ATCP ATDP ATGL ATIM ATMD ATNR ATRF ATRK ATTD AUAD AUCD AUNE AUNT AUOG Assignment of Password Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Route Restriction Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Route Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Trunk Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Specific Attendant Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Hunting Group-UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Slumber Time Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Speed Calling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of State Translation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of TAS Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Toll Code Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Timing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Trunk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Trunk Test Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of UCD Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of UCD Overflow Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 177 179 180 181 182 183 185 187 204 214 221 222 224 226 229 233 234 237 242 247 250 252 261 262 265 266 268 269 270 271 273 276 277 279 282 283 285 290 292 294 295 296 298
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iii Revision 4.0

Page AVTC AVTL AVTM BAID BKUP BKUPI BOSD CARR CASD CATK CCSE CDSD CMOD CMWL CPRS CSCL CSTN CTDK DCON DDA1 DDA2 DFSN DFTD DHDF DISS DLEN DLSL DLSS DMBL DMBS DMBT DOSD DPKG DPSW DSTN DTF1 DTF2 DTF3 INST INSTI LPRO MBBS MBLE Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting of Virtual Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMGx, IMGxh, IMGdxh and UMGx] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Deletion of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change of System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlled Alternate PRSCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Change of Station Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Change of Station Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Test-Desk and LTST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display File Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of System Message With Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of File Information [for Engineering use only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of LENS Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Lock Out Station-LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Lock Out Station-Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Make Busy LENS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Make Busy Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Make Busy Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Setting on Port Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Package Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Traffic Data 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Install [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Install [for IMGx, IMGxh, IMGdxh, and UMGx] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor Occupancy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Processor Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 299 300 304 305 306 309 316 322 323 343 360 363 366 375 377 378 380 382 383 385 386 387 388 390 391 398 402 404 406 408 410 412 416 419 426 441 449 453 456 460 472 474 475
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iv Revision 4.0

Page MBPM MBRT MBSM MBST MBTC MBTK MMNF NDBU PMBU RALM RLST RVTL SINZ SPTS SRTS TDBU TSTL TTLC XATM XHFC XHFD CHAPTER 3 AACL AANP AASN AASP AAST ADLI ADNR ADSS AFXC AGCL AGNP AGSN AGSP AGST AHKP AHSU AHSY ASCR ASPF ASPS Make Busy of Port Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of System Message Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Trunk - Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Busy of Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Menu File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name Display Data Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Microprocessor Back Up [for Engineering use only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release of Station/Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Virtual Tie Line Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning of Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning of Route Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Data Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Station Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Trunk Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-ray HFC [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-RAY HD or FDD [for IMGx, IMGxh, and IMGdxh] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL SYSTEM ASSIGNMENT COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration Station Class Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration Station Number Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Administration Special Access Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Administration Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment DLINT Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Direct Station Select Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guest Station Class Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guest Station Number Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Guest Special Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Guest Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Suite Room Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Hotel System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 476 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 487 489 490 493 497 498 503 505 506 509 513 516 519 521 522 527 529 530 540 545 546 548 549 550 554 556 557 567 572 574 576 577 579 580
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page v Revision 4.0

Page ATCR HISS HMBU RAST RGST RHSU CHAPTER 4 LABD LAKP LAND LANI LARP LATC LCBC LCCD LCDN LCEG LCEL LCFC LCFS LCIC LCID LCMO LCND LCNP LCOC LCPG LCPL LCSA LCSC LDA1 LDA2 LDID LDIM LDNI LDPC LEFR LEKD LEVT LFCD LFCP LFRS Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Hotel Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotel Main Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Administration Station Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Guest Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Suite Room Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST UP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attendant Key Information Data List (for Business System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Number Identification Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANI Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area Code Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authorization Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call By Call Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Forwarding /Connection Service Index Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Forwarding Station Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CIC Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caller ID Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Manual Override Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling Number Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling Number Pattern Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central Office Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Pickup Group Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Pickup Group Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Service Index A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSC Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE Attribute Data 1 List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTE Attribute Data2 List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dial In Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dial Intercom Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Day/Night Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determinate Point Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPN Facility Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Key Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Forwarding by Calling Service List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Route Selection Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 592 594 595 597 602 606 609 614 614 614 614 614 614 615 615 615 615 615 616 616 616 616 617 617 617 617 617 617 617 618 618 618 619 619 619 619 619 620 620 620 620 621
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page vi Revision 4.0

Page LHLS Hot Line Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LHMS Hold Music Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LHMS2 Hold Music Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LICD Intercom Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIZP Internal Zone Paging Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LKYD Key Data for Dterm List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LLEN LENS Data List (for Business System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LLMG Alarm Grade Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LLPE Line Privacy Expansion Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMAT Master Attendant Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMDD MODEM Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNDD Name Display Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNND Necessary Digit Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNPD Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LNPT Numbering Data List for PTT Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOPR Outgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOSD List Up of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAE Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAT PAD Data /Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPCR Primary Call Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRAC Remote PBX Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRCF List Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRDN Remote Control Day/Night List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LREF Reference Number Information Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRNP Reverse Numbering Plan Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRPC Remote Point Code for Centralized Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRTC Route/Service Feature Class Data and Tenant Restriction Class/Tenant Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRTD Route Class Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRTE Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRTI Trunk Application Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSAT Specific Attendant Number Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSDA Speed Calling Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSDC Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSGD Special Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSHG Station Hunting/UCD Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSHL Station Hunting/UCD Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSID Special Incoming List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSLP Selection Translation Pattern Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSLU Slumber Time Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSMD Service Module Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSTN Station Data (Number Group) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSYD System/Unit/Status Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-45687 (E) 621 621 621 621 621 622 622 622 623 623 623 623 624 624 624 625 625 625 626 626 626 626 627 627 627 627 627 628 630 632 633 633 633 633 634 634 635 635 635 635 636 637
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page vii Revision 4.0

Page LTAS LTCP LTDP LTRK LUAD LUCD LUNE LVTC LVTL CHAPTER 5 LANP LASP LDNR LDSS LFXC LGNP LGSP LHEN LHKP LHST LHSU LHSY LSCR LSPF LSPS LTCR TAS Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time/Pattern Information Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Code Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCD Delayed Announcement Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCD Control Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Tie Line Call Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Tie Line Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOTEL SYSTEM LIST UP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration Special Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Station Select Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Up of Fixed Connection (Nail Down Connection Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guest Special Access Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LENS Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station Data (Numbering Group) List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suite Room Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotel System Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Access Code Floor Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Same Number Special Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 638 638 638 638 639 639 639 639 641 641 641 641 641 642 642 642 642 642 642 643 643 643 643 644 644
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page viii Revision 4.0
ND-45687 (E)
LIST OF FIGURES Figure Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Page Entry Procedure Example (ASPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Data Entry Example (ASDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Example of Entry Procedure (ASHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Dterm (8-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Dterm (16-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Dterm (24-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Line Test Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Functional Block Diagram of TSTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
ND-45687 (E)
LIST OF FIGURES Page ix Revision 4.0
This page is for your notes.
LIST OF FIGURES Page x Revision 4.0
ND-45687 (E)
LIST OF TABLES Table Table 2-1 Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Table 2-4 Table 2-5 Table 2-6 Table 2-7 Table 2-8 Table 2-9 Table 2-10 Table 2-11 Table 2-12 Table 2-13 Table 4-1 Page General Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 System Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Station/Trunk Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Restriction Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Administration, Measurement Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Hotel/Motel System Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 List for Assignment of ASTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Backed Up. . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Reference Table for Type of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Counteraction Table against Command Execution Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Type of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Kind of Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
ND-45687 (E)
LIST OF TABLES Page xi Revision 4.0
LIST OF TABLES Page xii Revision 4.0
ND-45687 (E)
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
This manual describes commands used with the NEAX2400 ICS systems. These commands are entered from the MAT (Maintenance Administration Terminal) to perform office and data control system operations. This manual is organized to present ICS/IMS commands in alphabetical order. Included with each command is an explanation of its function, applicable data entry procedures, and other related matters.
ND-45687 (E)
CHAPTER 1 Page 1 Revision 4.0
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
CHAPTER 2
1. GENERAL
COMMANDS
This chapter includes the following sections: Section 2. DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE This section explains the procedures for assigning, deleting, and displaying data through the use of the commands. Section 3. ERROR CODE LIST This section explains the error codes which are displayed when an erroneous operation has been performed or when data which does not conform to the predetermined format has been entered from the MAT. Section 4. COMMANDS This section explains NEAX2400 ICS commands. Commands are divided by system usage: ACD, CCIS and Business systems and Hotel system. Commands are in alphabetical order within each section. The following categories are included for each category: a. b. c. d. e. Floppy Disk Name: Indicates the name of the floppy disk on which the program for the particular command resides. Function: Outlines the function of the command. Precautions: Outlines precautions to be aware of when assigning data. Related Reference Command: Indicates other commands which are used to assign, delete, change and display the same data. Entry Procedure: Provides an explanation of the CRT display of the MAT and notes precautions concerning the data to be entered. For some commands, the procedures for deleting or adding data are also explained. The parameter values shown are examples only; they should not be used when entering data for your system.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
2. DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE

2.1 Outline
The parameters to be assigned for each of the commands are shown in Figure 2-1. For each command there is a specific entry procedure (Item 5), which explains how to enter, delete, and display data.
(5) Entry Procedure For Office Termination: For Announcement Service:
Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 CI: N SKIP: 0 WRT? ACC: 888 SRV: UNIF
Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 11 CI: N SRV: ANNC TYPE: 1 ATN: 2 EQP: 122 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI: N: H: SRV: UNIF: SKIP:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index Normal Hooking Kind of Service (Enter UNIF.) Office Termination Number of Digits to be skipped from the Access Code.
TN: ACC: CI: N: H: SRV: ANNC: TYPE: EQP:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index Normal Hooking Kind of Service (Enter ANNC.) Announcement Service Announcement Equipment Type Announcement-Equipment Number (2-15)
Figure 2-1 Note:
Entry Procedure Example (ASPA)
For the ASPA command, the parameters to be entered differ according to the data for parameter SRV. Therefore, separate screens display for different SRV parameters.
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS 2.2 Data Entry Example
The following is an example for the ASDT command. All data values shown are for this example only and should not be entered as data for your system.
(5) Entry Procedure
Assignment of Station Data TN:1 STN:3112

CRT Display of the MAT
LENS:000002 TEC:14 RSC:1 SFC:1
WRT?
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
RSC:
SFC:
Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Class (1-31) 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 12: Dterm 13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Data Terminal via Data Module 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15) RSCs are assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15) SFCs are assigned in the ASFC command.
Meanings and Values of Parameters
Figure 2-2
Data Entry Example (ASDT)
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS 2.2.1 Assigning New Data
Enter the data from the MAT and press ENTER. The cursor on the screen automatically moves to the next parameter. Repeat this operation for all parameters. After all necessary data has been entered, WRT? will display on the screen. To Write the data (i.e., to apply the data to the switch), press Y and ENTER. For example, for the ASDT command, enter the following data: TN: 1 + ENTER STN: 3112 + ENTER LENS: 000002 + ENTER TEC: 14 + ENTER RSC: 1 + ENTER SFC: 1 + ENTER After all the necessary data has been entered for Steps (1) through (6) above, WRT? displays on the screen. Confirm that the data is correct, then press Y. If an error in data entry has been found, press N and correct the data.
2.2.2 Displaying or Changing Data
To display the data, enter the same value as that of the data already assigned. If the values for certain parameters have been entered, the subsequent parameters are automatically displayed. When all the data has been displayed, DEL? appears on the screen. To delete the data, press Y and ENTER. To keep the data, press N and ENTER. For example, when the existing values for TN and STN for ASDT are entered, all subsequent parameters and their assigned values are automatically displayed. After the last parameter, DEL? is displayed. To delete the data, press Y and ENTER. To keep the data, press N and ENTER.
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS 2.2.3 Cautions Pertaining to Entry Procedure
The parameters to be displayed on the screen of the MAT are not always the same for any specific command. For some commands, parameters that have already been entered may be replaced with other parameters in the course of data entry operations. The parameters to be displayed may differ according to the data entered. (See the example in Figure 2-3.) The data values shown in (5) Entry Procedure are examples only; they should not be used when entering data for your system.
To assign a Station Hunting-Terminal Group with a Secretary Station but no Phantom Number: (a) Enter all STNs in the Hunting Group.
(b)
Assign Secretary Station.
Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot TN: 1 STN:3221 SECRETARY: 3200 SECRETARY STN:3111 WRT?
Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot TN:1 STN:3221 SECRETARY: 3200 CNT:2 2 STN:3222
SECRETARY STN: Station Number of the Secretary Station
TN: STN:
Tenant Number Station Number (The station number of the Pilot Station.) SECRETARY: Indication of Secretary Statio PHANTOM: Indication of Phantom Station (Enter 0.) 0: No Assignment CNT: Number of stations to be entered. (Recommend Max. 20 stations)
Figure 2-3
Example of Entry Procedure (ASHP)
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
3. ERROR CODE LIST

Table 2-1 General Errors ERROR No. MEANING
000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001B 001C 001D 001E 001F 0020 3XXX 4XXX 5XXX 6XXX
The communication line is bad. (Transfer Error) This command is aborted. (Return to Menu) The command is being used at another terminal, or you must re-enter a password. The data entered cannot be used in this system. The data entered has already been used. (Double Assignment) Data input/output format is incorrect. The data entered is not the data of the same group. The data entered is over the number that can be assigned. The data stored in the external memory cannot be read out. The data cannot be written into memory. The pattern data is all zeros. (ATCP command) Transfer (LP-PM) Error. MAT access denied for software protection. SP-SM, O&M BUS transfer error. One MPs DM is different from another. Bus transfer error. (Processor < --- > Processor) Cannot be used, because this command is not in this system. Data cannot write into DM Data cannot write into DM Data cannot write into DM Data cannot write into DM
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS Table 2-2 System Control Errors ERROR No. MEANING
0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107
Unit is not yet mounted. Group mounting error. (Unmounted or unmatched). Inserted package location is incorrect. DM segment is not set in system data. The unit cannot be deleted because data exists. The SM cannot be deleted because SMINT data exists. Designated Processor is not yet mounted.
Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors ERROR No. MEANING
0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219
Station/Trunk is not assigned yet. Station/Trunk is already assigned. LENS is not assigned yet. LENS is already assigned. Numbering Plan mismatch. Number Group mismatch. Station cannot be used as the opposite party of the hot line. Designated LENS is already assigned as SMINT. This data can not be assigned. STN must be assigned as a Dterm (TEC = 12). Pickup Group is already assigned. Hunting Group is already assigned. Pickup Group is not assigned yet. Hunting Group is not assigned yet. This station dies not belong to a UCD Group. Hunting Group assignment is not allowed. Overflow of UCD assignment number. (MAX. OF 7 UCD Groups) Secretary hunt station cannot be deleted. This station does not belong to the Pilot hunt group. This station does not belong to the Circular hunt group.
ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 9 Revision 4.0
COMMANDS Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors (Continued) ERROR No. MEANING
0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 0225 0226 0227 0228 0229 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 0240 0241 0242 0243 0245 0250 0251 0255 0260
The LEN assignment for the ATT-CON is not correct. The data cannot be assigned because the station is in the same UCD Group. The station is not the first in the UCD Group. Designated port is already assigned as a Hot Line. Designated port is already assigned as a Nailed Down Connection. Outside Trunk Class (ARTD) has not been assigned for this route. Assignment error of DTE attribute data-2. DTE Attribute data-2 not assignable for other then DM/DA (terminal equipment) The designated Station is not assigned to the same MG Number. Mismatch of designated Signaling Station of Intercom Station Group. Deletion is not allowed. (Busy) Station cannot be deleted because it is a secretary station. Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station. Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station. Signaling Station Data is not assigned yet. The My-Line has not yet been assigned. The Prime-Line has not yet been assigned. FKY 49 can only be assigned on keys 1-16. Mismatch of LP Number of My Line/Master station. Attribute data-1 not assigned yet. Station cannot be assigned. (Double assignment) LDN cannot be assigned. (Double assignment) Phantom station cannot be assigned. (Double assignment) Phantom station cannot be assigned. (Five phantom numbers have been assigned.) An Attendant console has not been assigned yet. Telephone class is not correct. Deletion is not allowed because UCD Announcement Data has been assigned. Speed calling service is not provided. The data entered is over the number of the group that can be assigned.
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors (Continued) ERROR No. MEANING
0261 0262 0263
Abbreviated digit code (ADC) is not assigned yet. Auto/Manual/Dial Intercom group not assigned yet. Dial Intercom group not assigned yet.
Table 2-4 Restriction Data Errors ERROR No. MEANING
0300 0301 0302 0303 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0410 0411 0412 0415 0416 0417 0418
There is NO SMDR service. SMDR data write error. SMDR data read error. SMDR sorting error. Digit Code request exists. Numbering Plan has been read out which cannot be processed. Mismatch of Digit Code Input Number of Digits. (Input No. of Digits Internally Developed) Enter Outside Route Number in Route Data. Enter 1 digit as the Digit Code. Enter 3 digits, 6 digits as the Digit Code. Restriction Data input error. Enter TDI = 3 only, because other data is not assigned yet. RRI/RES is not correct. Line Signal Processing Read error. Data is outside the processing range. Unit not mounted. The LSG in route class data corresponding to the LENS is inconsistent. The PC does not correspond to the LENS. Number of digit are shortage or over/input code is illegal.
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
Table 2-5 Administration, Measurement Errors ERROR No. MEANING
0501 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 0515 0516 0517 0518 0519 0520 0521 0522 0523 0524 0525 0526 0527 0528 0529 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 0535 0536
Timer value write error. ACT No. cannot be read out. CPU system change is not allowed. TDSW output system change is not allowed. TDSW CLOCK system change is not allowed. System change has failed. INT card is defective. DRAM copy is no good. CRAM copy is no good. CPU system change has failed. (1) CPU system change has failed. (2) CPU system change has failed. (3) Periodic Diagnosis Program is being called. TDSW OUTPUT ST-BY- ACT change has failed. TDSW OUTPUT ACT- ST-BY change has failed. TDSW0 CLOCK output is abnormal. TDSW1 CLOCK output is abnormal. TDSW0, 1 CLOCK output is abnormal. Another memory is being tested. MP has only a single system (Side-0 only). The CPU is performing another task. The circuit card or processor is not mounted or in MB. SP in ACT cannot be set MB. The issue data of main memory or port microprocessor cannot be read. Cannot be made idle because MB Switch was used to make busy. Standby LP access has been disabled. The PBUS is not mounted or is in MB state. All PBUS cannot be made busy.
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS Table 2-5 Administration, Measurement Errors (Continued) ERROR No. MEANING
0537 0539 0540 0541 0542 0543 0544 0545 0546 0547 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 0560 0600 0601 0602 0603 0610 0611 0615 0616 0617 0618 0619 0620 0700
Cannot be set to a MB state since another CSP is not available. Lamp control impossible. (Specified LENS is not assigned to the station.) CPU operation mode read failure. Operating mode change failure (Not allow hardware MB). CPU mode change memory write failure. The standby CPU PKG is not mounted. The standby CPU PKG is in a MB state. The standby COPY PKG is in a MB state. Standby COPY PKG SRQ key on. Act COPY PKG SRQ key on. Password service bit cannot be assigned because password code is not yet assigned. Entered password code is not assigned in Grade-2. Cannot be deleted because password is in service. This data is inhabited except in the APSW command. This data can only be assigned by using the AIOC command. Trunk Test Data not assigned yet. Designated SMPN is already assigned. Designated KOSM and NOSM are already assigned. The last MB order is being executed. Designated SM is not assigned yet. Service Module Memory Read Error. Service Module Memory Write Error. Tenant of ACD not assigned yet. Control agent position not assigned yet. Incoming destination split data not assigned yet. Split data not assigned yet. Cannot be deleted because ACD position data already assigned. The ACD System configuration data was not sent to MIS. Route class data cannot be deleted because trunk data assignment exists.
ND-45687 (E)
0701 0800 0801 0802 0803 0804 0805 0806 0807 0808 0809 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 0815 0816 0817 0818 0819 081A 081B 081C 081D 081E 081F 0820 0821
The designated data is not assigned. HFC/IOC Status is not read. HFC/IOC Faulty processing. Cannot be set MB status using HFC/IOC at HFC/IOC MB set. The designated HFC/IOC is not mounted. HFC/IOC Operation mode read failure. HFC/IOC mode change memory write failure. HFC/IOC mode change failure. HFC/IOC MB set/cancel memory write failure. HFC/IOC MB set/cancel failure. The designated HFC/IOC is not in an ACT state. Standby memory read failure. Standby memory reset failure. Standby memory write failure. Program load error. Cannot set HFC/IOC mode because CPU mode is COPY mode. Date format error of HFC. Request order error of HFC. HFC internal error (file). System management file does not exist on HFC. FD does not exist in the HFC. HFC select error. The selected HFC is busy. The selected HFC is not mounted or fault processing. Selected HFC data transfer error. Selected HFC response time out. Signaling cable error on HFC. HFC error (other). The Received data is abnormal.
ND-45687 (E)
A00F A10F A20F A30F
The communication line is bad (Disconnected error). The communication line is bad (Parity error). The communication line is bad (Sent error). The communication line is bad (Received error).
Table 2-6 Hotel/Motel System Errors ERROR No. MEANING
0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 0355 0356 0357 0358
System is not Hotel; cannot be used Cannot be used for Hotel System TEC and station not for Administration TEC and station not for Guest Room Restriction Data check failure No Floor Service Being used by Guest Service Telephone Being used by Suite Room Group Station cannot be used as the opposite party of the One touch.
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
4. COMMANDS The table below lists ICS commands, their associated floppy disk (FD), and the systems in which these commands can or cannot be used (CCIS, ACD, Business, Hotel/Motel). Hotel only commands are detailed in chapters 3 and 5 of this manual. For ACD specific commands, please refer to the ACD System Manual. See the Table of Contents for page numbers where these commands are described in the manual.
SYSTEM COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAME CCIS ACD BUS H/M
AABD AACL AADC AAED AAKP AAND AANI AANP AARP AARS AASN AASP AAST AATC AATM ACBC ACDD ACDN ACFO ACFR
Note:
Assignment of ACC Restriction Data Administration Station Class Change Assignment of Additional Digit Translation Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data Assignment of ANI Data Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data Administration Station Number Change Assignment of Administration Special Access Code Assignment of Administration Station Data Assignment of Authorization Code Data Assignment of ATM Module Data Assignment of Call by Call Service Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial In Service Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing Assignment of Call Forwarding Data Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM0-03 CM3-01 CM0-02 CM0-02, CM3-02 CM0-01 CM0-04 CM0-04 CM3-01 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM0-02 CM0-10 CM0-09 CM0-04 CM0-03 CM0-02 CM0-02
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
ACFS ACIC ACID ACMO ACND ACNP ACOC ACPE ACPG ACSA ACSC ACSI ADA1 ADA2 ADIM ADLI ADNR ADPC ADSS AEFR AEKD AEVT AFCD AFCP AFRS
Note:
Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data Assignment of CIC Code Data Assignment of Caller ID Data Assignment of Clocked Manual Override Assignment of Calling Number Data Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data Assignment of Central Office Code Assignment of Call Pickup expand Group Data Assignment of Call Pickup Group Assignment of Connection Service Index A Assignment of CSC Data Assignment of Connection Service Index Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2 Assignment of Dial Intercom Data Assignment DLINT Package Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data Assignment of Direct Station Select Data Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction Assignment of External Key Data Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed-Down Connection) Data Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number Assignment of Flexible Route Selection : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM0-04 CM0-08 CM0-10 CM0-02 CM0-09 CM0-09 CM0-01 CM0-11 CM0-01 CM0-02 CM0-08 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM3-02 CM3-02 CM0-08 CM3-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-11 CM0-03 CM0-09 CM0-02
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
AFXC AGCL AGNP AGSN AGSP AGST AHKP AHLS AHMS AHMS2 AHSU AHSY AICD AIDD AIOC AISA AISD AISP AIZP AKYD ALDN ALLC ALMG ALPE AMAT AMDD
Note:
Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System Guest Station Class Change Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data Guest Station Number Assignment of Guest Special Access Code Assignment of Guest Station Data Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Assignment of Hot Line Station Assignment of Hold Music Data Assignment of Hold Music Data Assignment of Suite Room Station Assignment of Hotel System Parameter Assignment of Intercom Data Assignment of User ID Data Assignment of IOC Port Data Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data Assignment of Key Data for Dterm Assignment of Listed Directory Number Assignment of Line Load Control Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion Assignment of Master Attendant Data Assignment of MODEM Data : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM3-02 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-02 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM0-04 CM3-02 CM3-01 CM0-03 CM0-13 CM0-03 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM0-02 CM0-11 CM0-01 CM0-01 SYS CM0-11 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-01
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
AMND ANCD ANDD ANND ANPD AOFC AOPR AOSP APAD APCR APHN APSW ARAC ARDN ARNP ARPC ARRC ARSC ARTD ARTE ARTI ASAT ASCL ASCR ASDC ASDT
Note:
Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits Assignment of Night Connection Data Assignment of Name Display Data Assignment of Necessary Digits Data Assignment of Numbering Plan Data Assignment of Office Name Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern Assignment of PAD Data Assignment of Primary Call Restriction Assignment of Phantom Station Number Assignment of Password Data Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code Assignment of Remote Control Day/Night Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data Assignment of Route Restriction Class Assignment of Route Class Data Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data Assignment of Trunk Application Data Assignment of Specific Attendant Number Assignment of Station Class Data Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction Assignment of Six Digits Least-Cost Routing Assignment of Station Data : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM0-01 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-01 CM0-11 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-08 CM0-01 CM0-08 CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-01 CM0-04 CM0-09 CM0-01 CM0-01 CM3-02 CM0-02 CM0-01
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
ASFC ASGD ASHC ASHP ASHU ASID ASLU ASPA ASPD ASPF ASPS ASTD ASTN ASTP ASYD ATAS ATCC ATCP ATCR ATDP ATGL ATIM ATMD ATNR ATRF ATRK ATTD
Note:
Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class Assignment of Special Group Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot Assignment of Station Hunting-UCD Assignment of Special Incoming Assignment of Slumber Time Data Assignment of Special Access Code Assignment of Speed Calling Code Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number Assignment of State Translation Data Assignment of Station Number Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern Assignment of System Data Assignment of TAS Service Data Assignment of Terminal Configuration Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Assignment of Toll Code Restriction Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp Assignment of Date and Time Assignment of Timing Data Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order Assignment of Trunk Data Assignment of Trunk Test Data : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM0-02 CM0-02 CM0-01 CM0-01 CM0-01 CM0-02 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-02 CM3-01 CM3-01 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-02 CM3-02 CM0-02 CM0-02 SYS CM0-11 CM0-02 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-03
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
AUAD AUCD AUNE AUNT AUOG AVTC AVTL AVTM BAID BKUP BKUPI BOSD CARR CASD CATK CCSE CDSD CMOD CMWL CPRS CSCL CSTN CTDK DCON DDA1 DDA2
Note:
Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data Assignment of UCD Control Data Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data Assignment of UCD Overflow Group Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only] Kinds of Memory Backup Kinds of Memory Backup Back Up of One-Touch Call Memory Data Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Continuous Assignment of Station Data Continuous Assignement of Trunk Data Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment Continuous Deletion of Station Data Change of System Mode Control Message Waiting Lamp Controlled Alternate PRSCs Continuous Change of Station Class Continuous Change of Station Number Connection of Test-Desk and LTST Display of Connection Status Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM0-03 CM0-04 CM0-01 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-09 CM0-09 CM0-09 SYS SYS CM0-10 CM0-04 CM0-04 CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-08 CM0-11 SYS CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-02
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
DFSN DFTD DHDF DISS DLEN DLSL DLSS DMBL DMBS DMBT DOSD DPKG DPSW DSTN DTF1 DTF2 DTF3 HISS HMBU INST INSTI LABD LAKP LAND LANI LANP LARP
Note:
Display File Serial Number Display of System Message with Details Display of File Information [for Engineering use only] Display of Program Issue Display of LENS Data Display of Lock Out Station-LENS Display of Lock Out Station-Number Display of Make Busy LENS Data Display of Make Busy Station Display of Make Busy Trunk Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Display Setting on Port Package Display Package Switch Display of Station Data Display of Traffic Data Display of Traffic Data Display of Traffic Data 3 Display of Hotel Program Issue Hotel System Main Memory Backup System Install System Install ACC Restriction Data List Attendant Key Information Data List Automatic Number Identification Data List ANI Data List Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List Area Code Restriction Data List : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM0-04 SYS CM0-10 CM0-03 CM0-01 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-04 CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-01 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM3-02 CM3-02 SYS CM0-10 CM0-06 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM3-03 CM0-06
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
LASP LATC LCBC LCCD LCDN LCEG LCEL LCFC LCFS LCIC LCID LCMO LCND LCNP LCOC LCPG LCPL LCSA LCSC LDA1 LDA2 LDID LDIM LDNI LDNR LDPC LDSS
Note:
Administration Special Access Code Data List Authorization Code Data List Call by Call Service Data List Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data Call Forwarding, Connection Service Index Data List Call Forwarding Station Data List CIC Data List Caller ID Data List Clock Manual Override Data List Calling Number Data List Calling Number Pattern Data List Central Office Code Data List Call Pickup Group Data List Call Pickup Group Data List Connection Service Index Data List CSC Data List DTE Attribute Data-1 List DTE Attribute Data-2 List Dial In Service Data List Dial Intercom Data List Day/Night Information List Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List Determinate Point Code Data List Direct Station Select Data List : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM3-03 CM0-05 CM0-09 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-05 CM0-04 CM0-08 CM0-08 CM0-06 CM0-09 CM0-09 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-08 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-04 CM3-03 CM0-08 CM3-03
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
LEFR LEKD LEVT LFCD LFCP LFRS LFXC LGNP LGSP LHEN LHKP LHLS LHMS LHMS2 LHST LHSU LHSY LICD LIZP LKYD LLEN LLMG LLPE LMAT LMDD LNDD LNND
Note:
EPN Facility Restriction Data List External Key Data List List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS Fixed Connection (Nail-Down Connection) Data List Call Forwarding by Calling Service List Flexible Route Selection Data List Fixed Connection (Nail-Down Connection) Data Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List Guest Special Access Code List LENS Data List Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List Hot line Data List Hold Music Data List Hold Music Data List Station Data (Numbering Group) List Suite Room Data List Hotel System Parameter List Intercom Data List List Up of Internal Zone Paging Data Key Data for Dterm List LENS Data List Alarm Grade Data List Line Privacy Expansion Data List Master Attendant Data List MODEM Data List Name Display Data List Necessary Digit Data List : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
LNPD LNPT LOPR LOSD LPAE LPAT LPCR LPRO LRAC LRCF LRDN LREF LRNP LRPC LRTC LRTD LRTE LRTI LSAT LSCR LSDA LSDC LSGD LSHG LSHL
Note:
Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List Numbering Data List for PTT Network Outgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List List Up of One Touch Speed Call Memory Data Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List PAD Data Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List Primary Call Restriction Data List Processor Occupancy List Remote PBX Access Code Data List List Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List Remote Control Day/Night List Reference Number Information Data List Reverse Numbering Plan Data List List Up of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service Route/Service Feature Class/Tenant Restriction Data List Route Class Data List Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data Trunk Application Data List Specific Attendant Number Data List Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List Speed Calling Data List Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List Special Group List Station Hunting UCD Data List Station Hunting UCD Data List : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-04 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-11 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-08 CM0-09 CM0-05 CM0-08 CM0-05 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-09 CM0-05 CM3-03 CM0-05 CM0-06 CM0-06 CM0-05 CM0-05
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
LSID LSLP LSLU LSMD LSPF LSPS LSTN LSYD LTAS LTCP LTCR LTDP LTRK LUAD LUCD LUNE LVTC LVTL MBBS MBLE MBPM MBRT MBSM MBST MBTC MBTK MMNF
Note:
Special Incoming List Selection Translation Pattern List Slumber Time Data List Service Module Data List Special Access Code Floor Data List Same Number Special Access Code Data List Station Data (Number Group) List System/Unit/Status Data List TAS Service Data List Time/Pattern Information Data List TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List Toll Code Restriction Data List Trunk Data List UCD Delayed Announcement Data List UCD Control Data List Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List Virtual Tie Line Call Data List Virtual Tie Line Data List Make Busy of Processor Bus Make Busy of LENS Make Busy of Port Microprocessor Make Busy of Route Make Busy of System Message Printout Make Busy of Station Make Busy of Trunk - Continuous Make Busy of Trunk Make Menu File : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
ND-45687 (E)
COMMANDS
NDBU PMBU RALM RAST RGST RHSU RLST RVTL SINZ SPTS SRTS TDBU TSTL TTLC XATM XHFC XHFD
Note:
Name Display Data Backup Port Microprocessor Memory Back Up [for Engineering use only] Release Alarm Remove Administration Station Data Remove Guest Station Data Remove Suite Room Station Release Station/Trunk Remove Virtual Tie Line Data System Initialize Scanning of Port Status Scanning of Route Status Traffic Data Back Up Test Station Line Test Trunk Line Connection X-ray ATM Module Diagnosis X-ray HFC X-ray HD or FDD : Command can be used : Command cannot be used
CM0-04 CM0-11 SYS CM3-01 CM3-01 CM3-02 CM0-03 CM0-09 SYS CM0-11 CM0-11 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-03 CM0-10 CM0-10 CM0-10
ND-45687 (E)
AABD CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AABD
Assignment of ACC Restriction Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign and display Speed Calling Restriction Data, which is added to the Service Feature Class of an individual station assigned for Speed Calling, in order to restrict it from originating calls. 3. Precautions This command assigns Speed Calling Restriction Data to each stations Service Feature Class (SFC). The Abbreviated Digit Codes (ADC) must already be assigned in the ASPD command. Speed Calling Override Service must be assigned (ASYD, SYS2, Index 1, b6=1).
Note:
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LABD
TN:1 SFC:X WRT?
ADC:123 RES:0
The SFC automatically displays.
TN: ADC: SFC: RES:
Tenant Number Speed Calling Code (Max. 4 digits) Note 1 Service Feature Class (0-15) Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed
Note 1: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of three (3) digits can
be assigned.
ND-45687 (E)
AADC CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AADC
Assignment of Additional Digit Translation
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display additional digit information pertaining to the Pattern Number Location designated in the AOPR command. 3. Precautions Before using this command, it must be confirmed that a Pattern Number Location (PNL) has been assigned in the AOPR (Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing) command. 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LOPR
Assignment of Additional Digit Translation PNL:1 DC:100
WRT?
PNL: DC:
Pattern Number Location (1-255) (Option 1-999) Additional Digit Information Max. 4 digits Note 1 (If PNL < 128) Max. 24 digits Note 2 (If PNL > 127) (Option Max. 24 Digits PNL: 1-999)
Note: Note:
If additional digits are required (1-4) data is assigned by software in PNL tables 1-127. If additional digits are required (1-24) data is assigned by software in PNL tables 128-255. Therefore when additional digits are required from 5-24, assign PNL 128-255.
ND-45687 (E)
AAED CM0-02/CM3-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AAED
Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02/CM3-02 CM0-02 (Business System) CM3-02 (Hotel System) 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display trunk information related to Announcement Equipment, on a tenant basis. For the Hotel system it is also possible to assign Language Class when Language Service is employed (Language Service is a function of the Property Management System (PMS)) 3. Precautions When the Announcement Equipment is to be used as a general announcement trunk, 0 must be assigned for parameters C, R, A, and M. This command is not necessary if the announcement device terminates at a station. Parameter LANG is displayed and data can be entered when ASYD SYSl, INDEX 161, b2 = 1 (Language Service is provided). When assigning the announcement equipment (EQP = 15) for Alert Service, enter 1 to parameter M. Enter the 0 to the Parameter LANG when the Language Service is Provided.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LPAE
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter TKAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For a single connection:

Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data TN:1 C:0 RT:1 WRT? EQP:0 R:0 A:0 LANG:0 M:0
TN: EQP:
Tenant Number Announcement Equipment Number 0: Dead Level Number 1: Unused Number (Not used in Hotel System) 2: Remote Access to PBX 3: May be used for other purposes 4: Outgoing Trunk Busy Announcement 5-6: May be used for other purposes 7: Route Restriction Announcement 8-14: May be used for other purposes 15: Alert Service (for Hotel system) 16: Timed Reminder Set Message (for Business system) Wake Up Call Set (for Hotel system) 17: Service Set-up Failure Message (for Hotel system) 18: Timed Reminder Service Cancel Message (for Business system) Wake Up Call Reset (for Hotel system) 19: Service Cancel Failure Message (for Hotel system) 20: Room Cut-Off Announcement (for Hotel system) 21: Do Not Disturb Announcement (for Hotel system) 22: Timed Reminder/Wake Up Call Message for Announcement Trunk 23-31: Group Announcement (for Hotel system) 32: Delay Announcement-Attendant 33: Not used 34: Automated Attendant (lst Announcement) 35: Automated Attendant (2nd Announcement) 36: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 1) 37: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 2) 38: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 3) 39: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 4) 40: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 5) 41: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 6) 42: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 7)
LANG:
C: R: A: M: RT:
43-48: Not used 49-53: Delay Announcement - Attendant (for the 1st announcement) 54-58: Delay Announcement - Attendant (for the 2nd announcement) 59-121: Not used 122-125: Multiple Announcement 126-127: Not used Language Class (for Hotel system) 0: Common (Language to be designated for each guest individually) 1: Japanese 2: English 3: German 4: French 5: Spanish 6: Chinese 7: Russian 8-15: Spare designations to be used for languages other than those listed above. Duration of Connection 0/1: Disconnect in 30 seconds./The connection is held until the station releases. Sending RBT (Ring Back Tone) 0/1: Send RBT/Do not send RBT Send Answer Signal 0/1: Do not send Answer Signal/Send Answer Signal Multiple Connection (Enter 0) 0: Single connection (TK is not needed for a single connection.) Route Number
ND-45687 (E)
For a multiple connection:
Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data TN:1 C:0 RT:1 EQP:0 R:0 TK:1 A:0 LANG:0 M:1
WRT?
TN: EQP:
Tenant Number Announcement Equipment Number: 0: Dead Level Number 1: Unused Number (Not used in Hotel System) 2: Remote Access to PBX 3: May be used for other purposes 4: Outgoing Trunk Busy-Announcement 5-6: May be used for other purposes 7: Route Restriction Announcement 8-14: May be used for other purposes 15: Alert Service (for Hotel system) 16: Timed Reminder Set Message (for Business system) Wake Up Call Set (for Hotel system) 17: Service Set-up Failure Message (for Hotel system) 18: Timed Reminder Service Cancel Message (for Business system) Wake Up Call Reset (for Hotel system) 19: Service Cancel Failure Message (for Hotel system) 20: Room Cut-Off Announcement (for Hotel system) 21: Do Not Disturb Announcement (for Hotel system) 22: Wake Up Call Message for Announcement Trunk (for Hotel system) 23-31: Group Announcement (for Hotel system) 32: Delay Announcement-Attendant 33: Not used 34: Automated Attendant (lst Announcement) 35: Automated Attendant (2nd Announcement) 36: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 1) 37: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 2) 38: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 3) 39: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 4) 40: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 5) 41: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 6)
LANG:
C: R: A: M: RT: TK:
42: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 7) 43-48: Not used 49-53: Delay Announcement - Attendant (for the 1st announcement) 54-58: Delay Announcement - Attendant (for the 2nd announcement) 59-121: Not used 122-125: Multiple Announcement 126-127: Not used Language Class (for Hotel system) 0: Common (Language to be designated for each guest individually) 1: Japanese 2: English 3: German 4: French 5: Spanish 6: Chinese 7: Russian 8-15: Spare designations to be used for languages other than those listed above. Duration of Connection 0/1: Disconnect in 30 seconds/The connection is held until the station releases. Sending RBT (Ring Back Tone) 0/1: Send RBT/Do not send RBT Send Answer Signal: 0/1: Do not send Answer Signal/Send Answer Signal Multiple Connection (Enter 1) 1: Multiple connection Route Number Number of the trunk connected to the Announcement Equipment.
ND-45687 (E)
AAKP CM0-01 Business

siness
AAKP
Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to set the functions of the top row of ICI (Incoming Call Identification) keys for answering incoming calls at the Attendant Console. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. This command can be executed under one of the following conditions. a. b. c. The ATI circuit card is not mounted. The ATT has been made busy by means of the MB switch on the ATI circuit card. The DAY/NIGHT key on the ATT is set to the NIGHT position.
When the location of keys has been changed, the number of waiting call display (ASYD, SYS2, Indexes 8 and 9) becomes invalid. The attendant console number (ATN) is the number assigned at TK parameter of the ATRK command. The maximum number of Attendant Consoles should be assigned by the ASYD command, SYS 1, INDEX 9.
ND-45687 (E)
The location of the keys can be set by this command is shown in below. Desk console
Alarm
Position Available
Position Busy
Night
Night
Position Busy L6 1 L5 2 3 Cancel Vol
In this illustration, the function indicated in each ( ) is the default function, which becomes valid if no other function has been set by this command, or if the function set has been deleted. Therefore when the default function indicated in ( ) is to be used, data entry is not necessary. 6 (TIE) 5 (Busy) 4 (NANS) 1 (TF)
2 (EMG/SCB)
3 (CAS/ICPT)
ATT Key Position (Desk Console - Business)
ND-45687 (E)
Attendant Console
AM PM
ADJUST H M
STATIONSTATUS
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
TIME STATION / TRUNK NUMBER
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
ANS RING BUSY ATND HOLD L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 1 KEY NUMBER 1 (TF) 2 3 4 5 6 (SCB) (ICPT) (NANS) (BUSY) (TIE) RCL ATND LDN GHI 4 PRS 7 ABC 2 JKL 5 TUV 8
PE 0
O R
MNALM
NIGHT
CW
SRC
MJALM
PB
DES
DEF 3 MNO 6 WXY 9
ATT Key Position (Attendant Console)
ND-45687 (E)
4. Related Reference Command List up: LAKP
-Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of ATT Key Position ATN:1 KYN:1 FUNC:1
WRT?
ATN: KYN: FUNC:
Attendant Number Key Number (1-6) FUNCTION CODE (1-16) 1: CAS Line 2: Off-Hook Alarm 3: Priority Call 1 4: Priority Call 2 5: Priority Call 3 6-16: Not used
ND-45687 (E)
AAND CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AAND
Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display ANI data for the number of digits of calling station number and the office code on each route basis for the Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Service. 3. Precautions The route number set in parameter RT should have been designated in ARTD, ANI (CDN19) = 1.
4. Related Reference Command List Up: LAND
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List Up: LRTD 5. Entry Procedure Assigning the ANI data sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attendant of the self office [the individual ATT Number is assigned]: a. When a uniformed number of digits is not used
Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data RT: 1 CC: 0 SKIP:3 DC: 123 WRT? AT: 0 KT: 0 ADD: 3
RT: AT: CC: KT: SKIP: ADD: DC:
Route Number STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 0) 0: STA Outgoing Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 0) 0: Main Central Expansion of STA Number Length (Enter 0) 0: OFF Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) Office Code to be Added (1-10) Office Code (Max. 10 digits)
b.
When a uniformed number of digits is used
Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data RT: 1 CC: 0 STNL:5 SKIP:3 DC: 123 WRT? AT: 0 KT: 1 ADD: 3
RT: AT: CC: KT: STNL: SKIP: ADD: DC:
Route Number STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 0) 0: STA Outgoing Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 0) 0: Main Central Expansion of STA Number Length (Enter 1) 1: ON STA Number Length (1-8) Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) Office Code to be Added (Max. 10 digits) Office Code (Max. 10 digits)
Assigning the ANI (data to be sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attendant of the self office [the individual ATT Number is not assigned]:
Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data RT: 1 AT: 1 DC: 123 WRT?
RT: AT: DC:
Route Number STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 1) 1: ATT Outgoing Office Code (Max. 10 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
Assigning the ANI data to be sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attendant of the satellite office:
Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data RT: 1 CC: 1 SKIP:3 DC: 123 WRT? AT: 0 COC: 80 ADD: 3
RT: AT: CC: COC: SKIP: ADD: DC:
Route Number STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 0) 0: STA Outgoing Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 1) 1: Satellite Central Central Office Code (Max. 5 digits) Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) Office Code to be Added (1-10) Office Code (for the number of digits assigned to parameter ADD, Max. 10 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
AANI CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AANI
Assignment of ANI Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display ANI (Automatic Number Identification) data sent per tenant by the request from opposite office. 3. Precautions Before using this command, ASYD SYS-1 INDEX 125 b4 - b7 (Type of MFC Signaling System) should be entered. When toll number is not added to ANI data, enter a blank in parameter TS (press SPACE key and RETURN key). When ASYD SYS-2 INDEX 15, b2 is 1, the following number is sent as ANI data. a. b. Calling party is a station: Calling partys station number is sent. Calling party is an Attendant or tandem connection: LDN assigned in this command is sent. If 0 assigned in b2, LDN assigned in this command is sent. 4. Related Reference Command List Up: LANI
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List Up: LRTD
ND-45687 (E)
AANI CM0-04 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure a. Enter the data for parameters TN through LDN.

Assignment of ANI Data TN: 1 TS: 0471 LS: 83 LDN: 0351
TN: TS: LS: LDN:
Tenant number Call number of toll (Max. 8 digits) Call number of local (Max. 8 digits) Listed directory number (Max. 8 digits)
b. The display changes as follows:
TN: 1 DC: 0471-83-0351 WRT?
LDN entered in step (a) LS entered in step (a) TS entered in step (a)
DC:
Digit Code
ND-45687 (E)
AARP CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AARP
Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display area/office code restriction data. 3. Precautions The Destination (Area/Office) Code (DC) does not include the access code or the digit 1, if 1 + dialing is required.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LARP
-Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data OGRT:12 RSC:1 DC:976 555 RES:0
WRT?
OGRT: RSC: DC: RES:
Outgoing Route Number Route Restriction Class (0-15) Destination (Area/Office) Code (3/6 digits) Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Area/Office code is Restricted 1: Area/Office code is Allowed
ND-45687 (E)
AARS CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AARS
Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function Various service connections between the outgoing route and the incoming route are to be restricted or the existing restrictions on such service connections are to be canceled. 3. Precautions If data is not set, connections are to be restricted.
4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure
ICRT: 1 RSV: 0 WRT?
OGRT: 2 CLS: 0
ICRT: OGRT: RSV:
CLS:
Incoming Route Number Outgoing Route Number Route Service 0: Not used 1: AMP Class Data When RSV = 1 0: Restriction 1: OGT 2: ICT
ND-45687 (E)
AATC CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote AATC
Assignment of Authorization Code Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the Authorization Code. 3. Precautions The Authorization Code is used in Remote Access to the PBX. When SYS-1 INDEX 19, bit 7 = 1 has been assigned by ASYD command (Using volume of Data Memory at the time of assigning Authorization Code is reduced), Authorization Codes must meet the following criteria: a. b. Authorization Codes must have 3 to 7 digits. Authorization Codes that contain 0 from the 3rd digit to the 7th digit cannot be assigned.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LATC
-Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC
ND-45687 (E)
AATC CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For changing restrictions set by the SFC and RSC:
Assignment of Authorization Code Data TN:1 DC:4444 ACR:1 RSC:0 SFC:0
WRT?
TN: DC: ACR: SFC: RSC:
Tenant Number Authorization Code (Max. 10 digits) Authorization Code Restriction (Enter 1.) 1: Restricted Service Feature Class (0-15) Route Restriction Class (0-15)
For canceling all restrictions set by the RSC:

Assignment of Authorization Code Data TN:1 ACR:2 DC:4444
WRT?
TN: DC: ACR:
Tenant Number Authorization Code (Max. 10 digits) Authorization Code Restriction (Enter 2.) 2: Allowed
ND-45687 (E)
AATM CM0-10 Business

ness
AATM
Assignment of ATM Module Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function This command allows assignment/change of ATM module data from the MAT of the PBX. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business system only. 6100-version software or later must be installed in the system. The ATM module must be connected with the PBX. Only the Act-side ATM module can be accessed by this command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure a. Designate ATM Module Number
Assignment of ATM Module Data Please choose the ATM module no. #1 #2 #3
AIOC
Select the ATM Module Number using the arrow key and press ENTER. b. Request the printout of send/received data.
Assignment of ATM Module Data ATM Module #X ACT : PORTX
Do you request to print out the send/receive data? Yes/No
Yes: No:
Print the send/received data list. View the send/received data list on the screen.
ND-45687 (E)
AATM CM0-10 Business
c. Data Assignment Example

Assignment of ATM Module Data ATM Module #X ACT : PORTX 0000000000 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 1111111111 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB 2222222222 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC 333333333333 33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333 3333333333 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDD 444444444444444444444444444444 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
Send Information Received Information
Enter the data and press ENTER. The data is sent to the ATM Module.
ND-45687 (E)
ACBC CM0-09 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACBC
Assignment of Call by Call Service
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display the Call by Call Information for an ISDN Network. 3. Precautions Before assigning data, assign the Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR), using the AOPR command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure For AT&T and Feature Access:
Assignment of Call by Call Service Data TDPTN:0 OPR:0 RA:0 MD:0 INT:0 NET:0 SERV:0 CODE:0 SCC:201 WRT?
LCBC
TDPTN: OPR: RA: MD: INT:
NET: SERV: CODE:
SCC:
Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National Call 1: International Call Kind of Network (0/1) 0: AT&T Feature/Service (0/1) 0: Feature Facility Coding Value 0: Transmit Network Selection 5: Operator 6: Pre-subscribed Transmit Network Operator SCC Distinguish number (Max. 3 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
For AT&T and Service Access (WATS BAND/SDN)
Assignment of Call by Call Service Data TDPTN:0 OPR:1 RA:0 MD:0 INT:0 NET:0
SERV:1 CODE:1 BAND:1 SCC:201 WRT?
NET: SERV: CODE: BAND: SCC:
Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National 1: International Kind of Network (0/1) 0: AT&T Feature/Service (0/1) 1: Service Facility Coding Value 1: WATS BAND/SDN WATS Band Number (0-9) SCC Distinguish Number (Max. 3 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
For AT&T and Service Access (MEGACOM, etc.)
SERV:1 CODE:1 BAND:1 SCC:201 WRT?
NET: SERV: CODE:
Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National 1: International Kind of Network (0/1) 0: AT&T Feature/Service (0/1) 1: Service Facility Coding Value 2: MEGACOM 800 3: MEGACOM 5: WATS maximal subscribed band 6: ACCUNET
ND-45687 (E)
For NT (Public, etc.)
SERV:0 CODE:0
WRT?
NET: SERV: CODE:
Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National 1: International Kind of Network (0/1) 1: NT Feature/Service (0/1) 0: Feature Facility Coding Value 0: Public 1: Private 2: INWATS 4: FX 5: Tie Trunk 8: TRD Call
ND-45687 (E)
For NT (OUTWATS)
SERV:0 CODE:3 BAND:0
WRT?
NET: SERV: CODE: BAND:
Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Service Mode 0: Call by Call Service National/International (0/1) 0: National 1: International Kind of Network (0/1) 1: NT Feature/Service (0/1) 0 : Feature Facility Coding Value 3: OUTWATS WATS Band Number (0-9) (Max. digits)
ND-45687 (E)
ACDD CM0-04 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACDD
Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial in Service
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the Change Digit Code for the ISDN line with DID Addressing. 3. Precautions This Command is used when DID Number Conversion is necessary. Enter the B-Channel Route Number in parameter RT.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LDID
DAY/NIGHT:D RT:10 DC:24 CDC:36 AD:0 XFR:0 WRT?
DAY/ NIGHT:
RT: DC: CDC: AD: XFR:
Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Route Number Digit Code (Max. 7 digits) Change Digit Code (Max. 24 digits) Additional Dialing (Enter 0.) Exchange Transfer (0/1) 0: Transfer is restricted 1: Transfer is allowed
ND-45687 (E)
ACDN CM0-03 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACDN
Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete or display the number of digits to be added to the access code of a distant office that has been assigned via the AMND command. 3. Precautions The ARTD command is to be used to assign data 1 to the parameter CD (CDN: 58) prior to the operation of this command. It is also necessary to assign the distant office code via AMND command beforehand. As far as tenants are concerned, the same conditions apply as the AMND command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LCDN
Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing TN: 1 DC: 23456 CDN: 7 WRT?
TN: DC: CDN:
Tenant Number Destination Code (Max. 10 digits) Number of Digits of Consecutive Dialing
ND-45687 (E)
ACFO CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACFO
Assignment of Call Forwarding Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display various call forwarding service data, on a tenant basis. Note that the destinations of forwarded calls can be the attendant console, a station, or an outside Night connection. 3. Precautions None 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure To designate a station as the Call Forwarding destination: LCFC
Assignment of Call Forwarding Data TN:1 CF:1 CFI:2 STN:3112
WRT?
TN: CF:
CFI: STN:
Note:
Tenant Number Call Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 1-3) 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer 3: Call Forwarding-Intercept Note Call Forwarding Destination (Enter 2.) 2: Station Station Number
Including when the connection between IC call from Tie Line and the station is restricted.
ND-45687 (E)
ACFO CM0-02 Business, Hotel
To designate an ATT as the Call Forwarding destination:
Assignment of Call Forwarding Data TN:1 CF:2 CFI:1
WRT?
TN: CF:
CFI:
Tenant Number Call Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 1-3.) 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer 3: Call Forwarding-Intercept 4: Night Connection Outside Call Forwarding Destination (1-2) (Enter 1.) 1: Attendant Console (ATT) 2: Station
For Night Connection Outside:
Assignment of Call Forwarding Data TN:1 CF:4 ADC:234
WRT?
TN: CF: ADC:
Tenant Number Call-Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 4.) 4: Night Connection Outside Abbreviated Digit Code (Max. 4 digits) Note 1
Note 1: When 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of 3 digits can be as-
signed.
ND-45687 (E)
ACFR CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACFR
Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign and display various kinds of trunk call forwarding restriction data on a tenant basis. 3. Precautions Data must be assigned to activate the feature.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LRCF
Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class TN:1 TSFI:1 CCI:0 RES:0
WRT?
TN: TSFI:
CCI:
Tenant Number Transfer Service Feature Index (1-15) 1: Call Forwarding (All Calls/-Dont Answer/-Busy Line/Unused Number/Dead Level) 2: Direct in Termination (Night only) 3: Direct in Termination (Day and Night) 4: Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 5: TAS 6: Night ATT 7: Remote Access to PBX 8-14: Not used 15: CAS Line Connection (Satellite) Call Category Index (0-15) 0: Attendant Call (Information Service Call) 1: LDN 2: FX
ACFR CM0-02 Business, Hotel
RES:
3: WATS 4: Tie Line 5: CCSA 6: Recall 7: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 8: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer 9: Not used 10: Special Common Battery 11: Inter-Position Transfer 12: Priority Call 13: Off Hook Alarm 14: CAS (Main) 15: Not used Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Transfer service is Restricted 1: Transfer service is Allowed
ND-45687 (E)
ACFS CM0-04 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACFS
Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign, display, and delete destinations for Call Forwarding-All Calls / Busy Line / Dont Answer on a per-station basis. 3. Precautions Parameters RCV, SRV, and CFD can be assigned when parameter FUNC = 1. Parameter RCV can be displayed and assigned when ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 79, b2 = 1 (Split Call Forwarding In Service).
4. Related Reference Command List Up: LCFS
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DSTN, DLEN List Up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
ACFS CM0-04 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure Assignment of Transfer Destination:

Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data TN: 1 STN:2000 FNC: 1 RCV: T SRV: A CFD: 2001 WRT?
RCV displays when Split Call Forwarding Service is performed.
TN: STN: FNC: RCV:
SRV:
CFD:
Tenant Number Station Number Function Number (Enter 1) 1: Assignment Receive Kind (T/S) T: C.O./Tie Line S: Station Call Forwarding Kind (A/B/D) A: C.F.-All Calls B: C.F.-Busy Line D: C.F.-Dont Answer Call Forwarding Destination No. (Max. 12 digits)
Display of Transfer Destination Data:

Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data TN: 1 STN:2000 FNC: 2 CF-AXXXXX CF-BXXXXX CF-DXXXXX
The transfer destination data displays here.
TN: STN: FNC:
Tenant Number Station Number Function Number (Enter 2) 2: Data Display
ND-45687 (E)
ACIC CM0-08 CCIS, Business, Hotel

, Business ACIC
Assignment of CIC Code Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. Function This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the LENS (Line Equipment Number) on the basis of each PC (Determinate Point Code) and CIC (Circuit Identification Code) of the CSCG (Common Channel Signaling Controller Group). 3. Precautions Before using this command, confirm that the following assignments have already been completed. a. b. c. LSG: 12 is assigned to the Route Class Data of the route to which the CIC concerned belongs. (By use of ARTD Command) The PC of the above-mentioned route is assigned. (By use of ADPC Command) The Trunk Data of the CIC concerned is assigned. (By use of ATRK Command)
Unless the Route Number identified from the LENS entered by this command and the Route Number identified from the PC coincide with each other, LENS cannot be assigned. When changing the CSCG, follow the procedure described below. a. b. c. Enter the PC. If the CSCG Number is already assigned, it is displayed and the cursor moves to the ClC parameter position, and entry is awaited. Then, make the following entry: SPACE + ENTER. (The cursor moves to the CSCG parameter position.) All Point codes in the network, with the exception of the point code of the system being programmed, must be assigned in the ACIC command.
The number of offices on a route from the originating office and the terminating office is a maximum of two.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LCIC
ND-45687 (E)
ACIC CM0-08 CCIS, Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of CIC Code Data PC:1 CSCG:130 CIC:1 LENS:000020
WRT?
PC: CSCG: CIC: LENS:
Determinate Point Code (1-16383) Common Channel Signalling Controller Group Number (130-255) Circuit Identification Code Number (1-255) Line Equipment Number (6 digits) XX X XX X
Level (0-7) Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31)
ND-45687 (E)
ACID CM0-10 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACID
Assignment of Caller ID Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display calling number data for the following services, which are available for I version Series 6200 software or higher: Call Block Distinctive Ringing - Caller ID
For detailed information on these services, see the System Data Design Manual. 3. Precautions This command is available for ISSUE 15 or higher MAT command program. A maximum of 12 calling numbers can be assigned to a single station.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LCID
Assignment of Caller ID Data TYPE: 1 TN: CID: SRV: WRT? STN:
TYPE: TN: STN: CID: SRV:
1 (Fixed) Tenant Number Station Number Calling ID Number (Max. 28 digits) Service Kind (5/6) 1-4: Not used 5: Call Block 6: Distinctive Ringing - Caller ID RGP: Ringer Pattern (0, 1, 5-7)
ND-45687 (E)
ACMO CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACMO
Assignment of Clocked Manual Override
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display Clocked Manual override data, which is used for changing routes during a specific time period, such as a holiday (Month/Day/Hour/Minute). 3. Precautions None 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LCMO
Assignment of Clocked Manual Override BLOCK:0 PTN:0
START:12/24 00-00 END :12/25 12-30
WRT?
BLOCK: PTN: START: END:
Block Number (0-7) Pattern Number (0-7) Start Time (MM/DD HH-MM) End Time (MM/DD HH-MM)
ND-45687 (E)
ACND CM0-09 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACND
Assignment of Calling Number Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display a Service Identification Number (SID) sent to the ISDN Network. 3. Precautions Before assigning data with this command, assign the Calling Number Pattern (CNP) using the ACNP command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: Entry Procedure

Assignment of Calling Number Data CNP:1 SKIP:0 ADD:7 DC:2014386 WRT?
LCND
CNP: SKIP: ADD: DC:
Calling Number Pattern (1-255) Skip Digit (Enter 0) Number of Digits of the Additional Number (0-24) Digit Code of the Additional Number (Max. 24 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
ACNP CM0-09 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACNP
Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the Calling Number Pattern (CNP) to the route which allows SID to Network-Present service. 3. Precautions Enter the B-Channel Route Number in parameter RT.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LCNP
Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data OG/IC:0 CNP:1 RT:10
OG/IC: RT: CNP:
Kind of Connection (Enter 0) Route Number Calling Number Pattern (1-255)
ND-45687 (E)
ACOC CM0-01 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACOC
Assignment of Central Office Code
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display a C.O. line code and tie line code corresponding to particular trunks. 3. Precautions The Central Office Code assigned by this command is displayed as a 4-digit number on the attendant console. This command operates in accordance with the ARTD command parameter R/L (CDN25).
4. Related Reference Command List up: LCOC
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter TKAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Central Office Code RT:1 TK:1
DC:9000
WRT?
RT: TK: DC:
Route Number Trunk Number Digit Code (4 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
ACPE CM0-11 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACPE
Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command is used to assign, change and delete Call Pickup Expand Group data. A maximum of 50 stations can be displayed at a time on the MAT screen. In addition, using special keys such as INS and DEL can facilitate data entry. 3. Precautions A maximum of 50 stations can be assigned in a Call Pickup Expand Group. The following special keys are available when ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode is selected.
KEY FUNCTION
ESC INS DEL
This key is used to skip Call Pickup Group station data entry before reaching the 50th station. WRT? appears on the screen when this key is pressed. This key is used to insert a station at the location where the cursor is positioned. The previous station is advanced by one when a new station is inserted. This key is used to delete a station at the location where the cursor is positioned.
Assign an access code for a Call Pickup Expand Group using the ASPA command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LCEG, LCEL
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Mode Selection Press the and keys to select your desired mode. Press the ENTER key.
Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group Operation Mode : Mode Selection : Cursor up Key Cursor down Key
ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE DELETION
Mode Activation : Return Key
ND-45687 (E)
Assignment/Change of Call Pickup Expand Group
Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group TN: STN: WRT? Note 1 Note 3 CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: 33: 34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50:
ASSIGNMENT Message Area Note 2
TN: STN: CNT STN:
Tenant Number Station Number Station numbers in a Call Pickup Expand Group
Note 1: WRT? appears when all station data has been assigned in a Call Pickup Expand Group or when the
ESC key is pressed.

Note 2: Meanings of each parameter are indicated in this area. Note 3: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective when entering CNT STN data.
ND-45687 (E)
Deletion of Call Pickup Expand Group
Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group TN: a STN: b WRT? Note CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN 2: xxxxx 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: xxxxx 11: xxxxx 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: xxxxx 21: xxxxx 22: 23: 24: 25: 26: 27: 28: 29: 30: xxxxx 31: xxxxx 32: 33: 34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: xxxxx 41:xxxxx 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50:xxxxx
DELETION Message Area
Note:
DEL? appears when all station data of a C.P.E.G. is displayed on the screen. If the designated station has not been assigned as a Call Pickup Group station, Not Assigned!! Assign? (Y/N) appears. When the Y key is pressed, the display is changed to ASSIGNMENT mode. By pressing N, the cursor returns to the station number entry.
ND-45687 (E)
ACPG CM0-01 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACPG
Assignment of Call Pickup Group
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, change, delete, and display call pickup group via the TN and STN 3. Precautions In the Assign mode, a maximum of 50 stations can be assigned to one group per system. For all other groups, a maximum of 20 stations can be assigned. In the Change Mode, use the DELETE key for deletion of a station in the Group. To insert a station in the Group, use the INSERT key. Exchanging can be accomplished by entering a new station Number over the existing station Number. In the Deletion Mode, if there are no data for the group, Not Assigned!! Assign? is displayed. If Y is entered, the mode changes to Assignment Mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to station number entry. Special Key Table These keys are effective in the operation mode Assignment and Change only.
KEY FUNCTION
ESC INSERT DELETE
This key is used when it is desired to skip entry operation at the time of Call Pickup Group station entry. If this key is pressed, the operation skips to WRT?. This key is used when it is desired to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. This key is used when it is desired to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Call Pickup Group station entry.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LCPG, LCPL
- Parameter STN Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Enter the kind of mode.
Note:
Select the desired mode by using the (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow); then press the ENTER key.
To assign a Call Pickup Group

Assignment of Call Pickup Group TN:1 STN:2400 WRT? Y CNT STN 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 CNT STN 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: CNT STN 16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the Call Pickup Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
Note: Note:
ESC, INSERT and DELETE Keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the WRT? prompt. When entering other parameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.
ND-45687 (E)
To change a Call Pickup Group

Assignment of Call Pickup Group TN:1 STN:2400 WRT? Y CNT STN 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 CNT STN 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10: 2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the Call Pickup Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
Note: Note:
ESC, INSERT and DELETE Keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the WRT? prompt. When entering other parameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.
To Delete a Call Pickup Group

Assignment of Call Pickup Group TN:1 STN:2400 DEL? Y CNT STN 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 CNT STN 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419
Station numbers of the stations belonging in the call pickup group are displayed automatically.
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station Included in the Call Pickup Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
ND-45687 (E)
ACSA CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACSA
Assignment of Connection Service Index A
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to route incoming calls from selected routes and trunks to a predetermined station. This is for a CAS Line and Direct in Termination (Day Only). This command is used with the ACSI command. 3. Precautions This data must be assigned in accordance with Connection Service Index A (CSIA) CAS data at the Satellite Station a. b. It is necessary to set the TEC (Telephone Class) of the CAS Line to 15 in the ASDT/AAST/AGST command. A ring-down incoming call from a C.O. line is terminated at the CAS Line.
When assigning CSIA as 3 using this command, the ADC must be set using the ASPD command
4. Related Reference Command List up: LCSA
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter TKAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RIGST Display: ASDT, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
ACSA CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For CAS line or DIT

Assignment of Connection Service Index RT:2 TK:1 CSIA:1 TN:1 STN: 3111
WRT?
RT: TK: CSIA:
STN: TN:
Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index A (Enter 1 or 2) 1: CAS line 2: Direct-In Termination (DAY Only) Station Number Tenant Number
For DIT-Outside
Assignment of Connection Service Index 2 RT:2 TK:1 CSIA:3 ADC:11
WRT?
RT: TK: CSIA: ADC:
Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index A (Enter 3.) 3: Direct-In Termination-Outside (DAY only) Speed Calling Abbreviated Digit Code (for CSIA3)
ND-45687 (E)
ACSC CM0-08 CCIS, Business, Hotel

, Business ACSC
Assignment of CSC Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. Function This command permits the registration, deletion and display of the CSC (Common Channel Signaling Controller) number corresponding to the CSCG (Common Channel Signaling Controller Group) number and accommodation location of the CCH (Common Channel Handler) for CCIS/DCH (D-Channel Handler) for ISDN. 3. Precautions The relationship between CIC (Circuit Identification Code) Group Numbers and CICS is shown below. CIC Group 0 CIC Group 1 CIC Group 2 CIC8, CIC16, .... CICl, CIC9, CIC17, .... CIC2, CIC10, CIC18, ....
CIC Group 7
CIC7, CIC15, CIC23
Even if the CIC has only 7 circuits, the CSC number of accommodation location of the CCH/DCH should be assigned to 8 CIC groups from 0 to 7. It is acceptable to use the CSC number or CCH/DCH accommodation location. For both the basic route and the alternative route totaled, a maximum of eight CSC/CCH/DCH Numbers can be assigned.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LCSC
ND-45687 (E)
ACSC CM0-08 CCIS, Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of CSC Data CSCG:130 CCH:00005 CIC GROUP X
X indicates a CIC group number. Every time the CCH/DCH accommodation location is input, it is incremented by 1 (0-7).
WRT?
CSCG: CCH:
CSC Group Number (2-255)

Note 1
Accommodation location of the Common Channel Handler Note 2 XX X XX
Line Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG 00-31 CSC CIC Group: Common Channel Signaling Controller Number CIC Group Number (display only)
Note 1: When the CSCG number is even, it indicates a basic route. When the CSCG number is odd, it indicates
an alternate route.
Note 2: For CCIS, assign the accommodation location of the CCT/CCH even in the case of CCT.
CCH is assigned. For ISDN, the following data should be assigned to the parameter CCH. B-Channel:Basic Accommodation Location D-Channel:Accommodation Location
ND-45687 (E)
ACSI CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ACSI
Assignment of Connection Service Index
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to route incoming calls from selected routes and trunks to a predetermined station. This is for Direct-In Termination (Day and Night), Night Connection and Remote Access to the System. 3. Precautions This data must be assigned in accordance with the Connection Service Index (CSI). This command must be used when assigning Night Connection Fixed, and Direct-In Termination. This command must be used for Remote Access from a Ring Down Trunk. When providing the Night Connection-Off Site Extension or Direct-In Termination-Off Site Extension (day, night/night) service, register a station number to which an incoming call is terminated using this command. When setting the CSI to 6 or 7 using this command, the ADC must be set by the ASPD.
4. Related Reference Command List up: -Parameter RTAssignment: Display: List up: -Parameter TKAssignment: Deletion: Display: List up: -Parameter STNAssignment: Deletion: Display: List up: LCFC
ARTD ARTD LRTD
ATRK ATRK ATRK, DLEN LTRK, LLEN, LHEN
ASDT, AAST, AGST ASDT, RAST, RGST ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For Remote Access to PBX:
Assignment of Connection Service Index RT:6 CSI:5 TK:1
WRT?
RT: TK: CSI:
Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index (Enter 5.) 5: Remote Access to PBX
For Direct-In Termination or Night Connection:

Assignment of Connection Service Index RT:2 CSI:4 TN:1 STN:3113 TK:1
WRT?
RT: TK: CSI:
TN: STN:
Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index (Enter 3 or 4.) 3: Direct-In Termination (Day and Night Mode) 4: Night Connection Tenant Number Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
For Direct-In Termination-Outside or Night Connection-Outside

Assignment of Connection Service Index 2 RT:2 CSI:7 ADC:11 TK:1
WRT?
RT: TK: CSI:
ADC:
Note:
Route Number Trunk Number Connection Service Index (Enter 7.) 6: Night Connection-Outside 7: Direct-In Termination-Outside (Day and Night Mode) Speed Calling Abbreviated Digit Code
When assigning Direct-In Termination-off Site Extension (CSI = 7), or Night Connection-off Site Extension (CSI = 6), the ADC must be entered.
ND-45687 (E)
ADA1 CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ADA1
Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign and delete Attribute Data 1 for each terminal (DTE). Attribute Data 1 is stored as the office data of the switching unit, and is rarely modified in normal operation. Attribute Data 2, on the other hand, is stored on the data terminal side and is modified in the course of operation. 3. Precautions This data can be set for the following TEC (Telephone Equipment Class): TEC = 13 (DTE via Dterm) Refer to command ASDT, AAST. Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). If ESC key is pressed at the time of attribute data entry, the operation skips to WRT?
4. Related Reference Command List up: Display: LDA1 DDA1
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST Deletion: ASDT, RAST Display: ASDT, RAST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Enter the kind of mode.
Note:
Select the desired mode by using the (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow) key; then press ENTER.
To assign, change, or delete DTE Attribute Data 1.

Assignment of DTE Attribute Data-l TN:1 STN:3555 CDN:8 Note 1 WRT? Y FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT MEDIA: CNTP: TCP : FCY : PRI : RST : SRP : CI : 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0
Note 2, 3
Note 1: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of Attribute Data parameter. Data entry starts from the Item
Number of the parameter designated here. Note, however, that at each data entry, the Item Number is incremented automatically.
Note 2: If, at the time of data entry, SPACE + ENTER key is entered, the cursor returns to parameter CDN, and
then operation can be started from Item Number.

Note 3: After the data of the last Item Number has been set or when ESC key is pressed at the time of data entry,
WRT? is displayed. TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number
Note 4
Note 4: After TN and STN have been entered, they will be displayed until the data for CDN = 7 is entered.
ND-45687 (E)
CDN: MEDIA (CDN = 1):
Counter Display Number Media (1-15) 1: Voice 2: Data 3: FAX 4: TELEX 5: TELETEX 6: Image 7-15: Not used Connection Protocol (0-15) 0: 2400 Protocol 1: X.20 2: X.21 3: V.24 200 Series 4: X.20 bis 5: X.21 bis 6-15: Not used Transmission Control Protocol (0-255) 0: Free Wheeling 1: Synchronous Non Protocol 2: X.25 3: X.75 4: IBM2780 5: IBM3740 6: IBM3770 7: IBM3780 8: IBM BSC Polled (3270 Terminal) 9: IBM BSC Polling (3270 HOST) 10: IBM SDLC Polled (3270 Terminal) 11: IBM SDLC Polling (3270 HOST) 12: TELETEX 13: TELEX 14: FAX GIII MH 15: FAX GIII MR 16: FAX GIV MH 17: FAX GIV MR 18-255: Not used Facility (0-3) 0: Bothway 1: Outgoing 2: Incoming 3: Not used
CNTP (CDN = 2):
TCP (CDN = 3):
FCY (CDN = 4):
ND-45687 (E)
PRI (CDN = 5):
Priority (0/1) 0: Outgoing 1: Incoming Restriction (0/1) 0: Connection is restricted 1: Connection is not restricted Send Receive Priority (0/1) 0: Data Receive Priority for Called Party 1: Data Send Priority for Called Party Calling Indicator (0/1) 0: CI signal Interval Control 1: CI signal Continuous Control
RST (CDN = 6):
SRP (CDN = 7):
CI (CDN = 8):
ND-45687 (E)

ness, Hote ADA2
Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign and delete Attribute Data 2 for each terminal (DTE). 3. Precautions When the designated station is not a DTE (DA/DM), the Attribute Data cannot be assigned and error code will result. Note 1 In the parameter MDM1 and MDM2, a zero value means that there is no MODEM. Attributes requiring a switch setting on the DM can be displayed but cannot be changed by this command and Error code will result if an attempt is made to change these attributes. Note 1
Note 1: When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explanation
on the screen. Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). If the ESC key is pressed while entering attributes, the operation skips to WRT?
4. Related Reference Command Display: DDA2 List up: LDA2 -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST Deletion: ASDT, RAST Display: ASDT, RAST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
To assign, change, or delete DTE Attribute Data 2.

Assignment of DTE Attribute Data-2 TN:1 STN:3555 CDN:14 Note 2 WRT? Y FUNC DTR : AUTO: MDM1: MDM2: SPD : PRTY: ASYC: HDX: STOP: CODE: PRFN: HL : HTL : RA : DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note 3, 4
Note 2: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of Attribute Data parameter. Data entry starts from the Item
Number of the parameter designated here. The Item Number is incremented automatically.
Note 3: If, at the time of data entry, SPACE + RETURN key is entered, the cursor returns to parameter CDN,
and operation can be started from Item Number.

Note 4: After the last Item Number has been set or when ESC key is pressed, WRT? is displayed.
TN: STN: CDN: FUNCTION:
Tenant Number Station Number Counter Display Number Function corresponding to the CDN is displayed.
The correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names) is shown below: CDN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FUNCTION DTR AUTO MDM1 MDM2 SPD PRTY ASYC HDX STOP CODE
11 12 13 14
PRNF HLT HL RA
The parameters of each function are as follows: DTR (CDN = 1): DTR (ER) Control 0: Check 1: No Check Auto Answer (0/1) 0: Manual Answer 1: Auto Answer Originating MODEM Number (0-8) 0: No MODEM 1-8: MODEM Number Incoming MODEM Number (0-8) 0: No MODEM 1-8: MODEM Number Bit Speed Rate (0-31) 0: 50 bps 1: 75 bps 2: 110 bps 3: 150 bps 4: 200 bps 5: 300 bps 6: 600 bps 7: 1200 bps 8: 2400 bps 9: 4800 bps 10: 9600 bps 11: 19.2 K bps 12: 48 K bps (SYNC) 13: 56 K bps (SYNC) 14: 64 K bps (SYNC) 15-31: Not used Parity Addition (0/1) 0: No Parity 1: Parity Asynchronous (0/1) 0: Asynchronous 1: Synchronous
ND-45687 (E)
AUTO (CDN = 2):
MDM1 (CDN = 3):
MDM2 (CDN = 4):
SPD (CDN = 5):
PRTY (CDN = 6):
ASYC (CDN = 7):
HDX (CDN = 8):
Half/Full Duplex (0/1) 0: Full Duplex 1: Half Duplex Stop Bit (0/1) 0: 1 Bit 1: 2 Bit Kind of Data (0-15) 0: No Character 1: ASCII (7-bit) Even Parity 2: ASCII (7-bit) Odd Parity 3: ASCII (7-bit) Parity is 0 4: ASCII (7-bit) Parity is 1 5: JIS (7-bit) Even Parity 6: JIS (7-bit) Odd Parity 7: JIS (8-bit) 8: EBCDIC (8-bit) 9: IA#5 (7-bit) 10: ITA#2(5-bit) 11: EBCD 12-15: Not used Profile Number (0-63) Hot Line Terminal (0/1) 0: No Hotline 1: Hotline Hot Line Origination (0/1) 0: DTR (ER) Signal On 1: Normal Origination Kind of RA (0-15) 0: PROTIMS 1: PROTlMS 2: DMI Mode 2 3: PROTIMS 4: V. 110 5: V. 120 6: X.30 7-15: Not used
STOP (CDN = 9):
CODE (CDN = 10):
PRFN (CDN = 11): HL (CDN = 12):
HTL (CDN = 13):
RA (CDN = 14):
Note:
In the case of PROTIMS, assign 0.
ND-45687 (E)
ADIM CM0-03 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote ADIM
Assignment of Dial Intercom Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display of Dial Intercom Group Number for Dial Intercom service and of the station Numbers of Dterm stations which constitute the Dial Intercom Group. 3. Precautions For providing Dial Intercom Service, it is necessary to assign the following in advance: ASYD command, SYS1, Index 59, b7 = 1. The number of Dterm stations that can be accommodated in a Dial Intercom Group and also the number of digits for Call Number (Dial Intercom STN) are determined by parameter N (Dial Intercom Digit Number). To parameter ICMSTN (Dial Intercom Station Number), enter My Line Station Number of Dterm station. Compose a Dial Intercom Group with Dterm stations of the same TN (Tenant Number) under the same MG (Module Group). From 1 to 50 Dial Intercom Groups can be composed on each MG (Module Group) basis.
4. Related Reference Command List Up: LDIM
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For one digit Dial Intercom STN
Assignment of Dial Intercom Data MG N0:1 G-ID:1 N:0 BCR:0 ICMCT:10 TN:1 Dial Intercom STN ICM STN Dial Intercom STN ICM STN 0 11000 1 11001 2 11002 3 11003 4 11004 5 11005 6 11006 7 11007 8 11008 9 11009 WRT?
MG NO: G-ID: N: BCR:
ICMCT: TN: ICM STN:
Module Group Number Group ID Number (1-50) Dial Intercom Digit Number (0/1) (Enter 0.) 0: one (1) digit (0-9) Dial Intercom STN Bridge Call Restriction (0/1) 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Number of Intercom STN (2-10) Tenant Number Intercom Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
For two digits Dial Intercom STN

Assignment of Dial Intercom Data MG N0:1 G-ID:1 N:1 BCR:O ICMCT:32 TN:1 Dial Intercom STN ICM STN Dial Intercom STN ICM STN 00 11000 16 11016 01 11001 17 11017 02 11002 18 11018 03 11003 19 11019 04 11004 20 11020 05 11005 21 11021 06 11006 22 11022 07 11007 23 11023 08 11008 24 11024 09 11009 25 11025 10 11010 26 11026 11 11011 27 11027 12 11012 28 11028 13 11013 29 11029 14 11014 30 11030 15 11015 31 11031 WRT?
MG NO: G-ID: N: BCR:
ICMCT: TN: ICM STN:
Module Group Number Group ID Number (1-50) Dial Intercom Digit Number (0/1) (Enter 1.) 1: two (2) digits (00-31) Dial Intercom STN Bridge Call Restriction (0/1) 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Number of Intercom STN (2-32) Tenant Number Intercom Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
ADPC CM0-08 CCIS, Business, Hotel

, Business ADPC
Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. Function This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the Determinate Point Code corresponding to the Route Number. 3. Precautions Assign 12 to LSG of the Route Class Data corresponding to the Route Number.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LDPC
Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data RT: 1 PC: 10
WRT?
RT: PC:
Route Number Determinate Point Code (1-16383)
ND-45687 (E)
AEFR CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote AEFR
Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign and display Facility Restriction Class (FRL) data. This restriction data is assigned between RSC1 (Calling Partys Restriction Class) and RSC2 (Called Partys Restriction Class). 3. Precautions This data has Tenant table development (ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 94, Bit 1, INDEX 59, bit 1).
4. Related Reference Command List up: LEFR
-Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC, AOPR List up: LRTC, LOPR
ND-45687 (E)
AEFR CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction DAY/NIGHT/URGENT:D TN:1 FRI:0 RSC1:0 RSC2:0 RES:0
WRT?
DAY/NIGHT/URGENT: Day/Night/Urgent Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode U: Urgent Mode TN: Tenant Number FRI: Facility Restriction Index (0-31) 0: STA to STA (Dial Access) 1: STA to STA (Via ATTCON) 2: STA to TRK (Dial Access) 3: STA to TRK (Via ATTCON) 4: TRK to STA (Dial Access) 5: TRK to STA (Via ATTCON) 6: TRK to TRK (Dial Access) 7: TRK to TRK (Via ATTCON) 8-31: Not used RSC1: Calling Restriction Class (0-15) RSC2: Called Restriction Class (0-15) RES: Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Restricted 1: Allowed
Note:
Parameters FRI, RSC1, RSC2, are automatically incremented.
ND-45687 (E)
AEKD CM0-02 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote AEKD
Assignment of External Key Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display data for Day/Night control via an external key of the PFT circuit card. 3. Precautions A maximum of eight (0-7) external keys can be assigned, corresponding to eight circuits of the PFT circuit card. The external key can control two PFT circuit cards per MG (16 circuits).
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LEKD
Assignment External Key Data MG:0 NCU PKG:0
CTN:0 CP:2 CNT:1 TN:1
WRT?
MG: NCU PKG: CTN: CP:
CNT: TN:
Module Group Number (00-31) PFT Circuit Card Number (0/1) External Key Number (0-7) Change Control Pattern (1-4) 1: Not used 2: Day/Night Change 3: Not used 4: Not used Number of Input Parameters (Enter the number of Tenants) (1-8) Tenant Number
ND-45687 (E)
AEVT CM0-11 Business, Hotel
AEVT
Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS. 3. Precautions This command is available for ISSUE 15 or higher MAT command program. When the parameter VRY (Verification of Connection) is assigned as 1, if the received number is not the same as the called number assigned in the parameter CALLED, connection is not established.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LEVT
Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS RT: TK: DESTINATION: CALLING: CALLED: C_RT: C_TK: VRY: WRT?
RT: Route Number TK: Trunk Number DESTINATION: Destination Number (Max. 6 digits) CALLING: Calling Number (Max. 24 digits) CALLED: Called Number (Max. 24 digits) C_RT: CCIS Signal Route Number C_TK: CCIS Signal Trunk Number VRY: Verification of Connection 0: Not required 1: Required OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number of CBC Service (0-4095) Note RA: Order of Route Advance of CBC Service (0-7) Note
Note:
This parameter appears when Route Number (RT) and Trunk Number (TK) is the same as CCIS Signal Route Number (C_RT) and CCIS Signal Trunk Number (C_TK), respectively.
ND-45687 (E)
AFCD CM0-03 Business, Hotel

ness, Hote AFCD
Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign (connect link), delete (release link), and display the data (linked LENS) pertaining to Fixed Connections (Nailed Down Connections). 3. Precautions The types of terminal equipment utilized for these connections are indicated below: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Ordinary Telephone Trunk Digital Signaling Trunk MODEM Trunk Conference Trunk Data Module Dterm [DATA] (Line circuit) (DTI, etc.) (DST) (MDMT) (CFT) (DM) (DLC)
If CONTROL MEMORY BUSY is displayed when assigning data via this command, it means that the last operation is still being executed. Therefore, additional data is to be assigned after pressing the ENTER key. The display EXECUTING means that the terminal equipment is being released or connected to a link. The next operation will wait until the current operation has been completed. This command requires confirmation of the designated terminal equipment. If the designated terminal equipment is in the busy state, the link will be released by this command. The status of the link is supervised periodically by the CPU. If the link is not in a Nailed Down Connection, the link will be forcibly released and reconnected.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LFCD
ND-45687 (E)
AFCD CM0-03 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data LENS-A:000001 EAD-A:00 LENS-B:000002 EAD-B:00
WRT?
LENS-A: EAD-A: LENS-B: EAD-B: [LENS]
Line Equipment Number (Side-A) Equipment Additional Data (00-1F; Hexadecimal) Line Equipment Number (Side-B) Equipment Additional Data (00-1F; Hexadecimal) XX X XX X
Level (0-7) Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31)
ND-45687 (E)
AFCP CM0-09 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AFCP
Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the Call Forwarding Destination for the Call Forwarding-Recognition Service of ISDN. 3. Precautions The Call Forwarding Destination can be assigned on the basis of the Calling Party Number or the Calling Party Attribute. When the Calling Forwarding Destination is a trunk line, assign the Abbreviated Digit Code for the trunk line using the ASPD command. The Calling Party may be treated as: a. b. c. All digits Some portions ignored; Example: ignore 003, where 003 is the access code. The entire number is ignored, reverting back to traditioned Call Forwarding services.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LFCP
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure When the Call Forwarding Destination is a station
Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0 CFD:0 STN:4000 WRT?
DAY/ NIGHT:
TN: CALLING PARTY: CFSI:
Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Tenant Number Called No. + Calling No. (Max. 32 digits) Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3) 0: Call Forwarding-All Calls 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer 3: Direct-In Termination Information Transfer Capability (0-3) 0: Speech 1: Unrestricted (Digital Data) 2: Audio (MODEM) 3: Not used Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 0 (Station)] Station Number of Call Forwarding Destination (Max. 5 digits)
ITC:
CFD: STN:
ND-45687 (E)
When the Call Forwarding Destination is an attendant console

Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0 CFD:1
DAY/ NIGHT:
Day/Night Mode (D/N) D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Tenant Number Called No. + Calling No. (Max. 32 digits) Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3) 0: Call Forwarding-All Calls 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer 3: Direct-In Termination Information Transfer Capability (0-3) 0: Speech 1: Unrestricted (Digital Data) 2: Audio (MODEM) 3: Not used Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 1 (ATT)]
ITC:
CFD:
ND-45687 (E)
When the Call Forwarding Destination is a trunk line

Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0 CFD:2 ADC: 100 WRT?
DAY/ NIGHT:
Day/Night Mode (D/N) D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Tenant Number Called No. + Calling No. (Max. 32 digits) Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3) 0: Call Forwarding-All Calls 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer 3: Direct-In Termination Information Transfer Capability (0-3) 0: Speech 1: Unrestricted (Digital Data) 2: Audio (MODEM) 3: Not used Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 2 (Outside)] Abbreviated Digit Code (Max. 4 digits) Note
ITC:
CFD: ADC:
Note:
When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of three (3) digits can be assigned.
ND-45687 (E)
AFRS CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AFRS
Assignment of Flexible Route Selection
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display area and/or office code data for the related OPR. 3. Precautions After an Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has been assigned in this command, it is necessary to assign alternate route information in the AOPR (Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing) command. It should be noted that the access code may or may not be included in the Number Pattern Code (NPC) depending upon the assignment of CDN 13 (AC) in the ARTD command. If zero (0) is assigned, the access code is not included. If one (1) is assigned, the access code must be included. Route Number (RT) is assigned to the Type of Service parameter (LCR or LCRS) in the ASPA (Assignment of Special Access Code) command. When data has been assigned in this command, Reverse Numbering Plan Data with respect to the Route Number must also be assigned in the ARNP (Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data) command. When assigning such a number as shown below to parameter NPC, always assign 1 to parameter FLG.
Example:
When assigning 90 and 900 to NPC: Number Input Number for NPC 90 90T 900 900
FLG 1 0
When an NPC is assigned for the first time, OTHER OPR is displayed. This parameter will assign to the same OPR all other numbers in the same sequence which differ only by the last digit. (For example, at the time of setting 91213, the OPR for 91210-2 and 91214-9 can be set by OTHER OPR.) If no assignment is to be made in OTHER OPR, press SPACE + ENTER. When deleting an NPC for which all other last digits are assigned to the same OPR, OTHER OPR is momentarily displayed and all assignments in this parameter are deleted. (For example, when deleting 91213 and the same OPR has been assigned for 91210-2, and 91214-9 in OTHER OPR, all assignments are deleted.)
ND-45687 (E)
AFRS CM0-02 Business, Hotel
4. Related Reference Command List up: LFRS
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter OPRAssignment: AOPR Deletion: AOPR Display: AOPR List up: LOPR 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Flexible Route Selection TN:1 RT:1 FLG = 0
NPC:91213 OPR:0
TN: RT: FLG: NPC:
OPR: OTHER OPR:
Tenant Number Route Number Number Pattern Code Flag (0/1) Number Pattern Code NPC is the Toll Distinctive Code (TDC), NPA, and or NXX. This data can be a maximum of twelve (12) digits. This data sometimes may need the assignment of the Trunk Route access code. Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255) Other Outgoing Route Selection Pattern (0-255) OTHER OPR is used when the Number Pattern Codes to be assigned to an OPR differ only by the last digit, and all numbers in the sequence (0-9) are to be assigned.
ND-45687 (E)
AHLS CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AHLS
Assignment of Hot Line Station
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the destination of a Hot Line station. 3. Precautions A hot line station is assigned by assigning the called partys data to the station to be employed. Prior to this assignment, the Hot Line station must be assigned a TEC of 13, 14 or 18 in the ASDT/AAST command. When deleting a Hot Line station, the called partys data is also deleted in this command. When changing the called partys hot line data, the current data must be deleted before the new data is assigned.
4. Related Reference Commands List up: LHLS
-Parameter STNAssignment: Deletion: Display: List up: ASDT, AAST ASDT, RAST ASDT, RAST, DLEN, DSTN LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For Station:

Assignment of Hot Line Station HOT TN:1 TYPE:1 CON TN:1 WRT? STN:3111 STN:3112
HOT TN: STN: TYPE: CON TN: STN: For ADC:
Hot Line Tenant Number Hot line Station Number Connection Type (Enter 1.) 1: STN Opposite Partys Tenant Number Opposite Partys Station Number
Assignment of Hot Line Station HOT TN:1 TYPE:2 CON TN:1 ADC:123 STN:3112
WRT?
HOT TN: STN: TYPE: CON TN: ADC:

Note:
Hot Line Tenant Number Hot Line Station Number Connection Type (Enter 2.) 2: ADC Opposite Padys Tenant Number Speed Calling Code (4 Digits) Use the Code assigned in command ASPD.
Note
When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of three (3) digits can be assigned.
ND-45687 (E)
For Trunk Line Appearance:

Assignment of Hot Line Station HOT TN:1 TYPE:3 CON RT:1 TK:1 STN:3112
HOT TN: STN: TYPE: CON RT: TK:
Hot Line Tenant Number Hot Line Station Number Connection Type (Enter 3.) 3: Trunk Line Opposite Partys Route Number Trunk Number
ND-45687 (E)
AHMS CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AHMS
Assignment of Hold Music Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign and delete the LENs of Music on Hold Equipment (DAT card) according to routes. 3. Precautions The relationship between parameter HMSC and LENs of Hold Music Equipment (DAT card) is as shown in the table below. When assigning this data, the DAT card must be mounted in the mounting slot specified.
HMSC LENS of DAT HMSC LENS of DAT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LHMS
000050 000070 000090 000110 000130 000150 000170 000190
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
001050 001070 001090 001110 001130 001150 001170 001190
Assignment of Hold Music Data RT:1 HMSC:7 WRT?
RT: HMSC:
Route Number Hold Music Data (0-15)
ND-45687 (E)
AHMS2 CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AHMS2 Assignment of Hold Music Data 1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign and delete the LENs of Music on Hold Equipment (DAT card) according to routes. 3. Precautions If a Route is assigned in Route Number of Held Trunk, it cannot also be assigned in Tenant Number of Held Station and Route Number of Held Trunk, and if a Route is programmed in Tenant Number of Held Station and Route Number of Held Trunk, it cannot be programmed in Route Number of Held Trunk. The 8TLTR card is the only circuit card that is supported for these multiple music inputs. The total number of music inputs using Expanded Music on Hold Service is sixteen (16). The 8TLTR card may be set for either 600 ohms impedance or 900 ohms impedance, therefore the music input to the 8TLTR card must match. 4. Related Reference Command List up: LHMS2
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Assignment Based on Tenant Number of Hold Station

Assignment of Hold Music Data TYPE: Extension Hold Music Data Kind ENTRY: Registration Kind UP/DOWN key: Select RETURN: Execute Tenant Number of HOLD Station Route Number of Held Trunk Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk TN: xx (Note 1) HMSC: 0 STA: 0 WRT?
TN: HMSC: STA:
Tenant Number (Note 1) Hold Music Data (0-15) Extension Hold Station Data 0: Out of Service 1: In Service
Note 1: IMG (ICS), IMGx = 1 ~ 15
IMGxh, IMGdxh, MMG/UMG (ICS) = 1 ~ 63 Assignment Based on Route Number of Held Trunk
Assignment of Hold Music Data TYPE: ENTRY: Extension Hold Music Data Kind Registration Kind UP/DOWN key: Select RETURN: Execute Tenant Number of HOLD Station Route Number of Held Trunk Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk RT: 1 - 255 (Note 2) HMSC: 0 WRT?
RT: HMSC:
Route Number (Note 2) Hold Music Data (0-15)
Note 2: IMG (ICS), IMGx = 1 ~ 31
IMGxh, IMGdxh, MMG/UMG (ICS) = 1 ~ 255
ND-45687 (E)
Assignment Based on Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk
Assignment of Hold Music Data TYPE: Extension Hold Music Data Kind ENTRY: Registration Kind UP/DOWN key: Select RETURN:Execute
Tenant Number of HOLD Station Route Number of Held Trunk Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk TN: xx RT: 1- 255 HMSC: 0 - 15 WRT?
TN: RT: HMSC:
Tenant Number Route Number Hold Music Data (0-15)
ND-45687 (E)
AICD CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AICD
Assignment of Intercom Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command assigns and deletes Intercom Station Numbers to Intercom Groups. 3. Precautions When assignment of a Signaling Station with no Intercom Station Number is attempted, an error code will result. Note When assignment of a Signaling Station with the same number as the Intercom Station is attempted, an error code will result. Note When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display more information.
Note:
4. Related Reference Command List up: LICD
ND-45687 (E)
AICD CM0-03 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Intercom Data MG: 0 G-ID:1 A/M:0 BCR:1 ICMCT:3 TN:1 NO. 1 2 3 ICM STN 3000 3001 3002 SIG STN 3001 3002 3003
Numbers entered in parameter ICMCT

WRT? Y
MG No.: G-ID: A/M:
BCR:
ICMCT: TN: ICM STN: SIG STN:

Note:
Module Group Number (00-31) Group ID Number (1-50) Automatic/Manual Intercom 0: Automatic 1: Manual Intercom Bridge Restriction 0: Restricted 1: Allowed Number of Intercom stations in the group (2-16) Tenant Number Intercom Station Number - Enter as many as designated in paramter ICMCT Signaling Station Number - Enter as many as designated in paramter ICMCT
The Signaling Station is the station at which the Intercom Station will ring down.
ND-45687 (E)
AIDD CM0-13 Business, Hotel
AIDD
Assignment of User ID Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-13 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display User ID data for the following services, which are available for the 6200-version software or higher: Audit Trail to Track the MAT usage Lock Out Maintenance Port
For detailed information on these services, see the System Data Design Manual. 3. Precautions This command is available for ISSUE 15 or higher MAT command program. Alphanumeric characters are used for the parameters USER NAME and ID CODE.
Assignment of User ID Data NO: USER NAME: ID CODE: RETYPE ID CODE: WRT?
NO: USER NAME: ID CODE: RETYPE ID CODE:
Assignment Number (1-15) User Name (Max. 16 digits) ID Code (Max. 8 digits) Enter the above ID code again.
ND-45687 (E)
AIOC CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AIOC
Assignment of IOC Port Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function By this command, attribute data of various terminals connected with the IOC can be assigned. Type of Terminal and Communication System data are to be assigned to IOC Ports 0-7. 3. Precautions Port numbers which can be entered are displayed under the Port Number. (Depending on the mounting status of the circuit cards, the port number may be displayed as [0123****] or [****4567], etc.) In case IOC-0,1 are not accommodated, activation of this command will result in an error message. Assigned ports are numbered. Unassigned ports are indicated by an asterisk (*).
Note:
After you press ENTER, only the data you selected will display. In case the terminal is MAT, select System Monitoring Function Is Provided/Not Provided. (FAULT MESSAGE) If any other item has been designated, no display will be made.
When the IOC attribute data is changed, the IOC card will be initialized, which will clear the port function memory.
4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure a. To select the type of terminal:
Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. (0-7) 0 TERMINAL PRINTER/MCI MAT CMAT SMDR ATM Module FAULT MESSAGE
___
IN
PORT NUMBER: I/O Port Number (0-7)

Note:
MAT is used in the U.S.A. CMAT is not used in the U.S.A.

ND-45687 (E)
b. When Printer/MCI has been designated as the type of terminal: The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.
Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. (0-7) 1 SPEED (bps) 4800 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 CHARACTER BIT 8 bit 7 bit TERMINAL PRINTER/MCI STOP BIT 2 bit 1 bit 1+1/2 bit 2 bit
PARITY BIT NON ODD EVEN NON
DATA CHANGE
Yes / No
c. When MAT has been designated as the type of terminal: The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.
Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. (0-7) 0 TERMINAL MAT FAULT MESSAGE
__
SPEED (bps) 4800 IN
DATA CHANGE
Yes / No
ND-45687 (E)
d. When the protocol has been designated as Non Protocol (Free Wheel) When SMDR (Non Protocol) has been designated as the type of terminal, the data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.
Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No. (0-7) 1 PROTOCOL Free-wheeling BSC (Polling) BSC (Contention) TERMINAL SPEED (bps) 4800 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 SMDR PARITY BIT NON ODD EVEN NON STOP BIT 2 bit 1 bit 1+1/2 bit 2 bit
CHARACTER BIT 8 bit 7 bit DATA CHANGE Yes / No
e. When SMDR (BSC) has been designated as the type of terminal. The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.
Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No.(0-7) 1 PROTOCL BSC Polling TERMINAL SPEED (bps) 4800 SMDR PARITY BIT NON STOP BIT 2 bit
SYNC SIGNAL ST1 ST2
CHARACTER BIT 8 bit 7 bit
SYNC CHARACTER Bi-sync Mono-sync
DATA CHANGE
Yes / No
ND-45687 (E)
f.
When ATM Module has been designated as the type of terminal ( Note 1): The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.
Assignment of IOC Port Data PORT No.(0-7) 2TERMINALATM Module SPEED (bps)PARITY bitSTOP bit 9 6 0 0N O N1 bit
CHARACTER bitATM Module No. 8 bit #1 #2 #3 DATA CHANGE Yes /No
Note 1: Available on 6200-version software and later.
ND-45687 (E)
AISA CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AISA
Assignment of Individual Speed Calling
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the number of speed calling codes assigned to each individual station. 3. Precautions MST (Master Station) A speed calling area is assigned to a specific station. The speed calling codes assigned to that specific station can be changed. SLV (Slave Station) The speed calling area assigned to the master station is shared by the slave stations; therefore, the speed calling codes assigned cannot be changed by a slave station. One block consists of 10 speed calling codes. There are 100 blocks per MG. When assigning the individual speed calling entry area of the Attendant Console, use the Specific Attendant Number previously assigned in the ASAT command. The master station and slave stations must be stored in the same MG.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSDA
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
AISA CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For Master Station:

Assignment of Individual Speed Calling TN:1 STN:3112 MST/ SLV:M BLOCK:1
TN: STN: MST/SLV: BLOCK:
Tenant Number Station Number Station type (Enter M.) M: Master Station Number of Blocks (1-10)
For Slave Station:

Assignment of Individual Speed Calling TN:1 STN:3111 MST/SLV:S STN:3112 BLOCK:1
TN: STN: MST/SLV: S: STN: BLOCK:
Tenant Number Station Number Station type (Enter S.) Slave Station Master Station Number Number of Blocks (1-10)
ND-45687 (E)
AISD CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AISD
Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display the destination number of Individual Speed Calling on each station basis. 3. Precautions None. 4. Related Reference Command -Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DSTN, DLEN List Up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data
Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data TN: 1 STN: 2000 FNC: 1 SPD: 00 TEL:
TN: STN: FNC: SPD: TEL:
Tenant Number Station Number Function (Enter 1) 1: Assignment Speed Calling Digit Code (2 digits) Telephone Number (Max. 24 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
AISD CM0-04 Business, Hotel
Display of Individual Speed Calling Data

Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data TN: 1 STN: 2000 FNC: 2 SPD: TEL 00 XXXXX 01 XXXXX 02 XXXXX 03 XXXXX 04 XXXXX SPD: TEL 05 XXXXX 06 XXXXX 07 XXXXX 08 XXXXX 09 XXXXX
The Speed Calling Digits code and the Telephone Number are displayed here.
TN: STN: FNC:
Tenant Number Station Number Function (Enter 2) 2: Display
ND-45687 (E)
AISP CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AISP
Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display additional digit information with respect to the Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number. 3. Precautions Before using this command, it must be confirmed that an Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNI) has been assigned in the ASTP (Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern) command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LSLP
Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern PNI:1 DC:44
WRT?
PNI: DC:
Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15) Additional Digit Information (Max. 4 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
AIZP CM0-11 Business

siness
AIZP
Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command is used to assign, change and delete Internal Zone Paging group data. If the designated group number has already been assigned, the current data is displayed. If new data is to be assigned, the old data must be deleted before entering new data. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business system only. 6100-version software or later must be installed in the system. Each Internal Zone Paging group must be composed of Dterm stations (TEC = 12). In the ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode, a maximum of 24 stations can be assigned to one Internal Zone Paging group. A maximum of 99 groups can be assigned to one tenant. One D term station can be assigned to multiple Internal Zone Paging groups. Irrespective of tenant data table development, any Dterm station in the system can be assigned to an Internal Zone Paging group. In the ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode, use the DELETE key for deletion of a station in the group. To insert a station in the group, use the INSERT key. In the DELETION mode, if there are no data for the group, Not Assigned!! Assign? is displayed. If Y is entered, the mode changes to ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to tenant number entry.
ND-45687 (E)
Special Key Table These keys are effective in ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode.

KEY FUNCTION
ESC INSERT DELETE
This key is used when it is desired to skip entry operation at the time of Internal Zone Paging Group station entry. If this key is pressed, the operation skips to WRT?. This key is used when it is desired to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of group station entry. This key is used when it is desired to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Internal Zone Paging Group station entry.
4. Related Reference Command List up : 5. Entry Procedure Enter the kind of mode.
Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data Operation Mode? ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE Mode Activation :Enter key. DELETION Mode Selection ASSIGNMENT :Cursor up key. :Cursor down key.
LIZP
Select the desired mode by using arrow key and press the ENTER key.
ND-45687 (E)
To assign an Internal Zone Paging group

Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data TN :1 IZPG :24 WRT? Y ASSIGNMENT
TN : Tenant Number IZPG : Internal Zone Paging Group (1-99) IZPTN : IZP Tenant Number IZPSTN :IZP Station
CNT --1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8:
IZPTN ----1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
IZPSTN -----1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007
CNT --9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16:
IZPTN ----98 98 98 98 98 98 98 98
IZPSTN -----2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007
CNT --17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24:
IZPTN ----123 123 123 123 123 123 123 123
IZPSTN -----3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007
TN : IZPG : IZPTN : IZPSTN :
Tenant number of calling station Internal Zone Paging group (01-99) Tenant number of IZPSTN Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group
(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.) When all the data is entered or ESC key is pressed, WRT? appears. If Y is entered, data assignment is complete. If N is entered, the operation returns to tenant number entry.
ND-45687 (E)
To delete an Internal Zone Paging group.

Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data TN :1 IZPG :24 DEL? Y DELETION
TN : Tenant Number IZPG : Internal Zone Paging Group (1-99) IZPTN : IZP Tenant Number IZPSTN :IZP Station
CNT --1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8:
IZPTN ----1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
IZPSTN -----1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007
CNT --9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16:
IZPTN ----2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
IZPSTN -----2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007
CNT --17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22: 23: 24:
IZPTN ----3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
IZPSTN -----3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007
TN : IZPG : IZPTN : IZPSTN :
Tenant number of calling station Internal Zone Paging group (01-99) Tenant number of IZPSTN Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group
(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.) After the assigned data is displayed, DEL? appears. If Y is entered, the display and the actual data are cleared, and the operation returns to tenant number entry. If N is entered, only the display is cleared and the operation returns to tenant number entry.
ND-45687 (E)
AKYD CM0-01 ACD, Business, Hotel

CD, siness, tel
AKYD
Assignment of Key Data for Dterm
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display the following key data corresponding to each line/feature buttons of Dterm: Line Key Data Function Key Data Intercom Key Data The Dterm (16-button type and 24-button) has the default key data (Refer to (3) Precautions). If the default data is to be used, assignment in AKYD is not necessary.
Note:
The table below shows the specification pertaining to data assignment for the D term series. Figure 2-4 through Figure 2-6 show the association between line/feature buttons and the button number (key number: KYN) of the Dterm series.
TYPE OF Dterm
LINE/FEATURE BUTTON NUMBER OF BUTTONS
8-button type 16-button type 24-button type
8 (KYN = 1-8) 16 (KYN = 1-6) 24 (KYN = 1-24)
ND-45687 (E)
01 05
02 06
03 07
04 08
Line/Feature Buttons
MICO 1 2 ABC 4 GHI 7 PQRS 5 JKL 3 DEF 6 MNO FNC RECALL
8 TUV 0 OPER
9 WXYD CNF
LINE /SPD
HOLD
TRF
ANS
SPKR
Figure 2-4
D term (8-Button Type)
ND-45687 (E)
01 05 09 013
02 06 010 014
03 07 011 015
04 08
Line/Feature
012 016
Buttons
MICO 1 2 ABC 3 DEF RECALL
4 GHI
5 JKL 8 TUV 0 OPER
6 MNO 9 WXYD CNF FNC
7 PQRS
LINE /SPD
HOLD
TRF
ANS
SPKR
Figure 2-5
Dterm (16-Button Type)
ND-45687 (E)
01 07 13 19
MICO
02 08 14 20
03 09 15 21
04 10 16 22
05 11 17 23
06 12 18 24
Line/Feature Buttons
2 ABC
3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYD # CNF 4 10 FNC 2 8

RECALL
4 GHI 7 PQRS
5 JKL 8 TUV 0 OPER
LINE /SPD
11
HOLD
TRF
ANS
SPKR
12
Figure 2-6
Dterm (24-Button Type)
3. Precautions Before assigning the key data for Dterm by this command, be sure to assign the station data (TN, STN, TEC = 12 (Dterm)) of the D term by ASDT/AAST command. The station number assigned by ASDT/AAST command is referred to as My Line. The My Line corresponds to the physical port associated with the LENS of a DLC/ELC card.
Note:
By assigning another station line to a function button via this command an incoming call terminated to a station line other than My Line can be answered or can be transferred to elsewhere as in the case of the My Line. A station line other than My Line is referred to as a Sub Line. A Sub Line can be assigned not only to a D term but to any conventional telephone. In addition, the station data for My Line and Sub Line must be assigned via the ASDT/AAST command before the key data is assigned. When the Sub Line and the My Line belong to different tenants, use the ATNR command and clear the Tenant to Tenant Restriction.
ND-45687 (E)
A Multi-Line key (the key for My Line and Sub Line) on the Dterm can be assigned as Prime Line. If the Prime Line is not assigned, the My Line serves as the Prime Line. When the user goes off-hook, the Prime Line is automatically selected on the D term. A virtual line can be assigned as a Sub Line of the Dterm. The virtual line can be used the same way as the My Line for outgoing calls and other service operations. Virtual Line-----A virtual LENS exists only in memory, but does not exist physically. Data can be assigned but no hardware is provided for it; ex. LENS = 000311. The virtual LENS is assigned by the ASDT/AAST command in the same way as for an ordinary line. (The telephone class is TEC = 18: Virtual Line)
Note:
The Dterm (16-button type) provides 16 line/feature buttons. The default data for each line/feature button is as follows:
1 Pickup 9 PRIME LINE
2 FWDBY 10
3 FWD-
4 OVERRIDE 12
5 VOICE
6 MSG
7 S&R
8 LAST#
11
13
14
15
16 SYSSPEED
KEYS 10 - 15 SPEED-CALL ONE TOUCH
If the default data is to be used, assignments using the AKYD command will not be necessary. Station data can be assigned using the ASDT/AAST command unless a key is changed, the default data is used or the Add-On Module is used. All buttons must be programmed if any of the default data is changed. The ability to assign line appearances across module groups is available when system one index 321 bit0 = 1. The way this functions is that stations within module group 0 can appear on stations within module group 1, stations within module group 2 can appear on stations in module group 3, stations within module group 4 can appear on stations in module group 5 and stations within module group 6 can appear on stations in module group 7. This feature is available for D term Series III instruments only.
ND-45687 (E)
When assigning the line/feature buttons as function keys, take the following precautions: a. b. c. My Line Key must be programmed. Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned as KYI = 0 (Not used) The following function keys are basically fixed. (Refer to Figure 2-4): FKY = 13: FKY = 18: FKY = 20: FKY = 28: FKY = 51: FKY = 52: FKY = 57: d. CONF (Three-Way Calling) TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls) HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold) ANSWER MIC SPEAKER RECALL
When DK Operation service (Incoming Line Preference, Idle Line Preference) is to be provided, assign 1 to parameter LN PRE. Also, assign ORG (Originate) button as a function button.
The default key data provided for Dterm (16-button type) is also provided for the Dterm (24-button type). When assigning the key data of the line/feature button, take the following precautions: a. My Line Key must be assigned in KYN = 1-24, and KYN = 25-40 should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used). My Line in KYN = 17-24 cannot be assigned without assigning any Line Key or any Function Key in KYN = 1-16. b. The following function keys are basically fixed: FKY = 13: FKY = 18: FKY = 20: FKY = 28: FKY = 51: FKY = 52: FKY = 57: c. CONF (Three-Way Calling) TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls) HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold) ANSWER MIC SPEAKER RECALL
Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used).
The FKY = 49: Speed Calling-One Touch cannot be assigned to a Key Number (KYN) larger than 16. (Numbers larger than 16 are for feature application). For Call Forwarding-Busy Line and Call Forwarding-Dont Answer, refer to ASYD SYS1 Index 5 (separate/common access for C.F.-Busy Line and C.F.-Dont Answer). If common access codes are assigned, only one key is required to activate the features. If separate access codes are assigned, separate function keys must be assigned. For Dterm (24-button type) the FKY = 55: One-Touch changeover (PAGE) should be assigned when registering destination numbers as one-touch speed calling code more than 12.
ND-45687 (E)
AKYD CM0-01 ACD, Business, Hotel Note:
Dterm (24-button type) is equipped with 12 one-touch buttons. Each of these buttons is assigned with 2-page memory (Page 0 and Page 1). One destination number can be assigned on a page basis (24 destination numbers in all). Therefore, when originating an outgoing call, the page of one-touch button can be designated by this function key.
There is no default key data provided for Dterm (8-button type). Thus, the key data for all the line/feature buttons must be programmed. When assigning the key data of the line/feature button, take the following precautions: a. b. My Line Key must be assigned in KYN = 1-8, and KYN = 9-16 should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used). The following function keys are basically fixed: FKY = 13: FKY = 18: FKY = 20: FKY = 28: FKY = 51: FKY = 52: FKY = 57: c. CONF (Three-Way Calling) TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls) HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold) ANSWER MIC SPEAKER RECALL
Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used).
In conjunction with intercom service, take the following precautions: a. b. Before assigning the Intercom Key Data by this command, assign the Intercom Group Data using the command AICD/ADIM. When providing the Intercom service, assign The response priority when the SPEAKER button is pressed or the station goes off-hook by parameter PRl. (Refer to Step (a) of (5) Entry Procedure). When not providing the Intercom service, assign PRI = 0.
When this command is used, the DLC/ELC card must be reinitialized (MB switch UP-DOWN).
ND-45687 (E)
4. Related Reference Commands List up: LKYD
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST Deletion: ASDT, RAST Display: ASDT, RAST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LLEN, LHST, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure It is recommended that the following procedure be read carefully before entering data in this command. Assign the data for the My Line before assigning the Prime Line data. For data assignment, see Step (a). The TN and STN of the My Line are also displayed in Steps (b), (c), (d) and (e) but do not need to be entered again. Assign the function button data. Each button can be used as a Function key, Sub Line key, and Intercom key. For data entry procedure of function keys, see Step (c). For data entry procedure of Sub Line keys, see Step (d). For data entry procedure of Intercom keys, see Step (e). The display changes at each of these steps. When all data corresponding to a specific KYN has been entered, the KYN increases by one (+ 1) and the MAT is then ready to accept the data for the next KYN. WRT? prompt is displayed after all function button data has been assigned or when ESC is pressed while MAT displays KYN information.
Note:
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
a. Enter the Station number of the Prime Line.
Assignment of Key Data for Dterm TN:1 STN:3000
TN: STN: TP:
Tenant Number (for My Line) Station Number (for My Line) Type of Dterm (0-3) 0: D term (8 or 16-button type) = Buttons 1 - 16 assignable Note 1 1: D term (8 or 16-button type) With Add on Module or Dterm (24-button type) = Buttons 1-40 assignable Note 2 2: D term (8 or 16-button type) = Buttons 1-16 and FLEX Keys assignable Note 3 3: D term (8 or 16-button type) With Add on Module or Dterm (24-button type) = 1-40 and FLEX Keys assignable Note 4
Note 1: When assigning Buttons up to 16. Note 2: When assigning Buttons more than 16. Note 3: When assigning Buttons up to 16 and FLEX keys. Note 4: When assigning Buttons more than 16 and FLEX keys.
RING:
PRI:
Note:
Ringing Information (0-3) 0: No Multi-lines ring. 1: All the Multi-lines ring. 2: Only the Prime Line rings. 3: Ringing Data is to be set for each individual Multi-line. Priority of Answering a Call (0-4)
To answer a call on a line having no priority, a button must be pressed.
ND-45687 (E)
AKYD CM0-01 ACD, Business, Hotel LINE PREFERENCE PRI 1 0 1 2 3 4 L D A M A 2 L L L M 3 L REMARKS
L: D: A: M:
As per the Preference pattern when the SPEAKER button is pressed. Dial Intercom Line (Ringing Station) Automatic Intercom Line (Ringing Station) Manual Intercom Line (Signaling Station)
ND-45687 (E)
b. Enter the Line Preference Data:

Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3000 TP:0 RING:3 SPK:0 ANS:0 PRI:0 LN PRE:1 ORG:0 MWD:0 S:0
PL TN:1 STN:3000
LN PRE:
SPK: ANS:
ORG:
MWD:
PL TN: STN: S:
Line Preference (0/1): 0: Prime Line Pickup 1: Key Line Select Line Preference for Speaker button (0 Only): 0: Prime Line Preference Line Preference for Answer button (0-2): 0: Prime Line Preference 1: Incoming Line Preference 2: Ringing Line Preference Line Preference for Originating button (0/1): 0: Prime Line Preference 1: Idle Line Preference Message Waiting Data Display Selection (0/1) 0: MW data display on the top line 1: MW data display on the bottom line Tenant Number of the Prime Line. Station Number of the Prime Line. OG from Prime Line (0/1) 0: Allowed 1: Inhibited
ND-45687 (E)
c. For using keys as Function Keys

Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3155 KYN:2 KYI:1 FKY:12
TN: STN: KYN:
KYl:
FKY:
Tenant Number (for My Line) Station Number (for My Line) Key Number KYN = 1-16 (TP = 0) KYN = 1-40 (TP = 1) Service Index 0: Not used 1: Function Key Function Key Number 1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (FWD-BY) 2: Call Forwarding-All Calls (FWD) 3: Executive Right of Way (OVERRIDE) 4: Call Waiting 5: Call Back (CALL BACK) 6: Message Reminder (MSG) 7: Save and Repeat (S&R) 8: Last Number Dialed (LAST #) 9: Boss-Secretary-Message Waiting Lamp Control; Set 10: Call Hold (CALL HOLD) 11: Boss-Secretary-Message Waiting Lamp Control; Cancel 12: Call Pickup-Group (PICK) 13: Three-Way Calling (CONF) 14: Voice Call (VOICE) 15: Speed Calling-System (SYS SPEED) 16: FNC 17: CAS SHF 18: Call Transfer-All Calls (TRANSFER) 19: UCD Busy Out 20: Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold (HOLD) 21: Flash Button (FLASH) 22: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (FWD-DA) 23-24: Not used 25: ISDN Malicious Call Trace 26: Speed Calling-Station (Group) (STA SPEED) 27: Originate (ORG) 28: Answer (ANS) 29: Data (DATA) 30: Display/Auto (DSPY/AUTO)
ND-45687 (E)
Note 2
31: 32: 34-47: 33: 34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53-54: 55: 56: 57: 58: 59: 60: 61: 62-82: 83: 84: 85 86
Data Transfer (DTX) Not used OAI/ACD (Note 1) Wake Up Set (WUS) Wake Up Reset (WUR) Do Not Disturb Set (DDS) Do Not Disturb Reset (DDR) Room Cut Off Set (RCS) Room Cut Off Reset (RCR) Message Waiting Set (MWS) Message Waiting Reset (MWR) Check In (C/I) Check Out (C/O) Status (STS) Audit (AUD) Enter (ENT) Clear Enter (E) UCD Call Waiting Lamp (In case Business System)/END (END)/ (In case H/M System) Privacy Set/Release Speed Calling-One Touch Do Not Disturb (DND) MIC Speaker Not used PAGE OFF/ON HOOK FOR HEADSET Recall Not used Release Key Manual Signaling Key DSS Not used Retain for Eight Conference Equipment Serial Call Internal Zone Paging Not used
Note 1: For systems with OAI/ACD, 34-47 OAI/ACD. Note 2: For H/M system. (System Series 6100 version software or earlier.)
ND-45687 (E)
Note
87: 88: 89: 90: 91: 92: 93: 94: 95: 96: 97: 98: 99: 100: 101: 102-112: 113: 114: 115: 116: 117: 118: 119-320:
Wake Up Set (WUS) Wake Up Reset (WUR) Do Not Disturb Set (DDS) Do Not Disturb Reset (DDR) Room Cut Off Set (RCS) Room Cut Off Reset (RCR) Message Waiting Set (MWS) Message Waiting Reset (MWR) Check In (C/I) Check Out (C/O) Status (STS) Audit (AUD) Enter (ENT) Clear Enter (E) END (END) Not used Calling Number/Calling Name Display Note Not used Call Pickup Expand Note Not used Ringer Mute Note Call Return Note Not used
Note:
For H/M System (System software: 6200 or later version)
ND-45687 (E)
d. For using the key as a Multi-Line key.

Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3155 KYN:2 KYI:2 KD:0 TN:1 STN:3111 RG:0
TN: STN: KYN: KYI: KD: TN: STN: RG:
Tenant Number (for My-Line) Station Number (for My-Line) Key Number (1-16) Service Index (Enter 2.) 2: Multi-line Kind of Line (Enter 0.) 0: Line Tenant Number (for Sub-Line) Station Number (for Sub-Line) Ringing Information for Each Line (0-7) Valid only if Ring = 3 in Item (a).
RINGING
RG(0-7) DAY NIGHT
DELAY TIME
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No Ringing Ringing No Ringing Not used Ringing Ringing Ringing Ringing
No Ringing No Ringing Ringing Not used Ringing Ringing Ringing Ringing 30 sec. 20 sec. 10 sec. 0 sec. 0 sec. 0 sec.
ND-45687 (E)
e. For using the key for an Intercom

Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3155 KYN:3 KYI:2 ICM:0 G-ID:1 KD:1
TN: STN: KYN: KYI: KD: ICM:
G-ID: f.
Tenant Number (for My-Line) Station Number (for My-Line) Key Number (1-16) Service Index (Enter 2.) 2: Multi-line Kind of Line (Enter 1.) 1: Intercom-Option Kind of Intercom 0: Automatic 1: Manual 2: Dial Group ID Number (1-50)
For using the key for a DSS key on DSS Console

Assignment of Key Data for D term TN:1 STN:3155 KYN:4 KYI:2 KD:2
TN:1 STN:3112
TN: STN: KYN: KYI: KD: TN: STN:
Tenant Number (for My-Line) Station Number (for My-Line) Key Number (1-40) Service Index (Enter 2.) 2: Multi-line Kind of Line (Enter 2.) 2: DSS Console Key Tenant Number (for DSS) Station Number (for DSS)
ND-45687 (E)
ALDN CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ALDN
Assignment of Listed Directory Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the Listed Directory Number (LDN) to an Attendant Console when DID service is in operation. 3. Precautions The number if digits in the LDN must be the same as the number of digits in a station number.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure When LDN Night Transfer service is not provided.
Assignment of Listed Directory Number TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): N WRT?
LSTN, LHST
TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): Enter N.
ND-45687 (E)
When LDN Night Transfer service is provided. a. Station
Assignment of Listed Directory Number TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):Y TYPE:1 STN:5100 WRT?
TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): Enter Y. TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 1.) 1: STN STN: Station Number b. Number of Outside Party
Assignment of Listed Directory Number TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):Y TYPE:2 OUTSIDE:8421567 WRT?
TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): Enter Y. TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 2.) 2: Outside OUTSIDE: Number of Outside Party
ND-45687 (E)
c.
Abbreviated Digit Code
Assignment of Listed Directory Number TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):Y TYPE:3 ADC:888
TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): Enter Y. TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 3.) 3: ADC ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code
ND-45687 (E)
ALLC SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ALLC
Assignment of Line Load Control
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is used to designate start and stop of line load control. 3. Precautions Starting of Line Load Control will result as follows: a. b. Only the stations specified by parameter SFI = 16 of the ASFC command can originate a call while line Load Control is in effect. All other stations will be restricted. Whether incoming calls will be restricted during Line Load Control is determined by System Data 1, INDEX 59. If incoming restriction is in effect, an incoming call from a C.O. line or tie line will not be terminated.
For ICS, control of all LPs (ALL LP ? Y) cannot be designated.
4. Related Reference Command None
ND-45687 (E)
ALLC SYS Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For a specific LP

Assignment of Line Load Control ALL LP? N LP:0
LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0 WRT?
Operation Mode Selection (Enter N.) N: Only One LP LP: Local Processor (or for IMGxh, Local Partition Number) LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0: Line Load Control Stop 1: Line Load Control Start 2: Automatic Line Load Control is in execution (display only) 3: Status of all LPs not coinciding (display only) ALL LP?:
Note:
Of the above parameters, only 0 and 1 can be designated.
For all LPs

Assignment of Line Load Control ALL LP? Y LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0 WRT?
Operation Mode Selection (Enter Y.) Y: ALL LPs LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0: Line Load Control Stop 1: Line Load Control Start 2: Automatic Line Load Control is in execution (display only) 3: Status of all LPs not coinciding (display only) ALL LP?:
Note:
Of the above parameters, only 0 and 1 can be designated.
ND-45687 (E)
ALMG CM0-11 Business, Hotel
ALMG
Assignment of Alarm Grade Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command is used to make a flexible change of system message output grades. The PBX user can give the proper alarm grade to each system message according to its requirements. When assigning no data, the default alarm grades are automatically adopted. 3. Precautions All of the system messages listed in the System Maintenance Manual are changeable except 6-A. 4. Related Reference Command Display: List Up: 5. Entry Procedure Initial Display DFTD LLMG
Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Grade 0 and higher are registered Note 1 SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <- -> 17 - Z WRT ? Y Note 2 LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3 <- - - - - -> Low High
Note 1: When this value is not changed, the display changes to the entry of a system message. In this instance,
WRT does not appear on the screen.

Note 2: When the N key is pressed, the cursor returns to the entry of grade.
ND-45687 (E)
Assignment (for changing default Alarm Grade Data)

Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Grade 0 and higher are registered. SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <- -> 17 - Z SYSTEM MESSAGE: 1 - U Note DLKC DATA TRANSFER FAILURE (PERMANENT) Assignment LMP: MJ MSG 1-A 1-B 1-C 1-D 1-E 1-F 1-G 1-H 1-I LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR: 0 GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 WRT ? Y MSG 1-J 1-K 1-L 1-M 1-N 1-O 1-P 1-Q 1-R LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 MSG 1-S 1-T 1-U 1-V 1-W 1-X 1-Y 1-Z LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3 <- - - - - -> Low High
Note:
A system message corresponding to the input data appears on the screen.
ND-45687 (E)
Change (for changing assigned Alarm Grade Data)

Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Grade 0 and higher are registered. SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <- -> 17 - Z SYSTEM MESSAGE: 1 - U Note DLKC DATA TRANSFER FAILURE (PERMANENT) Change / Deletion LMP:SUP MSG 1-A 1-B 1-C 1-D 1-E 1-F 1-G 1-H 1-I LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR: 0 GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 WRT ? Y MSG 1-J 1-K 1-L 1-M 1-N 1-O 1-P 1-Q 1-R LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 MSG 1-S 1-T 1-U 1-V 1-W 1-X 1-Y 1-Z LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3 <- - - - - -> Low High
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
Deletion (for deleting assigned Alarm Grade Data)
Assignment of Alarm Grade Data Grade 0 and higher are registered. SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <- -> 17 - Z SYSTEM MESSAGE: 1 - U Note DLKC DATA TRANSFER FAILURE (PERMANENT) Change / Deletion LMP: MN MSG 1-A 1-B 1-C 1-D 1-E 1-F 1-G 1-H 1-I LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR: 0 GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 WRT ? Y MSG 1-J 1-K 1-L 1-M 1-N 1-O 1-P 1-Q 1-R LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN SUP GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 1 MSG 1-S 1-T 1-U 1-V 1-W 1-X 1-Y 1-Z LMP MJ SUP MN NON SUP NON SUP MN GR 3 1 2 0 1 0 1 2 LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3 <- - - - - -> Low High
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
ALPE CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ALPE
Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the eight-party Conference Trunk (CFT card), which is seized in Line Privacy Expansion Service, on a per-tenant basis. 3. Precautions Assign 1 to parameter TN when 1 is assigned to parameter TNF. The Station Number assigned to parameter STN must correspond to the assignment of No. 0 circuit on the CFT card.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LLPE
Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion TNF:1 TN:1 STN:3112 WRT?
TNF:
TN: STN:
Tenant Flag 0: Separate 1: Common Tenant Number Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
AMAT CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AMAT
Assignment of Master Attendant Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function When more than one Attendant Console has been installed per tenant, this command assigns a Master Console for controlling the Day/Night function of all the Attendant Consoles on a tenant basis. 3. Precautions If this Master Console is placed in the Night mode, all incoming calls will be directed to TAS or a Night Connection Fixed station. Removing the handset and/or pressing the Night key on the ATTCON, will place the console in the Night mode.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LMAT
-Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Master ATT Data TN:1 ATN:1 MASTER ATT
TN: ATN: MASTER: NIGHT:

Note:
Tenant Number Attendant Number or Night Attendant Number Master Attendant Number Night Master Attendant Number
Parameters MASTER and NIGHT are displayed when a Master Attendant or Night Master Attendant has already been assigned.
ND-45687 (E)
AMDD CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AMDD
Assignment of MODEM Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display MODEM Trunk Data. 3. Precautions Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). If the ESC key is pressed at the time of MODEM data entry, the operation skips to WRT?.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LMDD
Assignment of MODEM Data MDM NO:1 CDN:9 Note1 FUNC DR : R : HDX: MD : 2W/4W: SPEED: ASYNC: FCY : RSGT:
ASSIGNMENT WRT? Y
DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note 2, 3
MDM No.: MODEM Number (1-16)

Note:
Once the MDM No. has been entered for CDN 1, it does not need to be entered again for each CDN assignment.
Note 1: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of MODEM Data parameter. Data entry starts from the Item
Number of the parameter designated here. Note, however, that at each data entry, the Item Number is incremented automatically.
Note 2: If, at the time of data entry, SPACE + ENTER key is entered, the cursor returns to parameter CDN,
and then operation can be started from Item Number.

Note 3: After the data has been set or when ESC is pressed at the time of data entry, WRT? displays.
ND-45687 (E)
CDN: DR (CDN = 1):
Counter Display Number (0-9) Data Ready On (0-3) 0: Check 1: No Check 2: Supervise 3: Not Supervise Modem Ringing (0/1) 0: No Ring at MODEM 1: Ring at MODEM Half/Full Duplex (0/1) 0: Full Duplex 1: Half Duplex MODEM/DST (0/1) 0: MODEM 1: DST 2W MODEM/4W MODEM (0/1) 0: 2W 1: 4W Bit Speed (0-31) 0: 50 bps 1: 75 bps 2: 110 bps 3: 150 bps 4: 200 bps 5: 300 bps 6: 600 bps 7: 1200 bps 8: 2400 bps 9: 4800 bps 10: 9600 bps 11: 19.2 Kbps 12: 48 Kbps 13: 56 Kbps 14: 64 Kbps 15-31: Not used Asynchronous (0/1) 0: Asynchronous 1: Synchronous
R (CDN = 2):
HDX (CDN = 3):
MD (CDN = 4):
2W/4W (CDN = 5):
SPEED (CDN = 6):
ASYNC (CDN = 7):
ND-45687 (E)
FCY (CDN = 8):
Facility (0-3) 0: Outgoing/Incoming 1: Outgoing only 2: Incoming only 3: Not used RS-CS Guard Time (0-15) 0-7: Not used 8: 0 ms 9: 30 ms 10: 60 ms 11: 120 ms 12: 240 ms 13: 360 ms 14: 720 ms 15: 1080 ms
RSGT (CDN = 9):
ND-45687 (E)
AMND CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AMND
Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the maximum necessary digits to be sent out on any trunk route. This data determines the register release timing. 3. Precautions Destination Code: Enter the minimum number of digits, including the access code, of the destination number required to determine the maximum digits to be dialed. Maximum Necessary Digits: Enter the maximum number of digits, including the access code, for which the register must wait when the Destination Code is dialed. When this command is used for Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes, the Tenant (T/N) parameter must be assigned as zero (0).
4. Related Reference Command List up: LNND
ND-45687 (E)
AMND CM0-01 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits TN:1 DC:999 MND:10 TOLL:1 AN:1 RATE:0 A/D:0 WRT?
TN: DC: MND: TOLL:
AN:
RATE: A/D:
Tenant Number Destination Code (Max. 10 digits) Maximum Necessary Digits (1-24) Toll Code Identification (0/1) 0: Local Code 1: Toll Code Account Number 0: Out of Service 1: Account Code Option Service Data Always assign 0 Analog/Digital Line Data 0: Analog 1: Digital
ND-45687 (E)
ANCD CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ANCD
Assignment of Night Connection Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is necessary to assign the correspondence between C.O. trunks and the 12NCU (Power Failure Transfer) circuit card when the PBX is in the Night Mode. 3. Precautions Before using this command, confirm that the 12NCU the (PFT) circuit card has been assigned in AUNT (Assignment of Unit Data) command. The correspondence between C.O. trunks and the stations in the Night Mode is assigned in the ACSI (Assignment of Connection Service Index) command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LCFC
- Parameter RT Assignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD - Parameter TK Assignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Night Connection Data MG:0 NCU PKG:0 PORT:0 RT:1 WRT? TK:1
MG: NCU PKG: PORT: RT: TK:
Module Group Number (00-31) PFT Card Number (0-3) Port Number of PFT Card (0-11) Route Number Trunk Number
ANDD CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ANDD
Assignment of Name Display Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign and delete the User Information (Name, etc.) corresponding to each Station Number in Name Display Service. 3. Precautions Station Numbers must be assigned. This command cannot be used when OAI Name Display Service is in use. The number of digits to be assigned to parameter NAME is determined by ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 241, bl. The following must be set: ASYD1, Index 31, b1, b2 =1.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LNDD
Assignment of Name Display Data TN:1 STN:3112 NAME:NEC TOKYO WRT?
TN: STN: NAME:
Tenant number Station Number Users Office Name (8 digits/16 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
ANND CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ANND
Assignment of Necessary Digits Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the necessary number of digits for a particular trunk route. 3. Precautions When entering the Incoming/Outgoing Call code, IC/OG can be entered as characters inputs or can be entered numerically as 0/1. Number of Necessary Digits: The Number of Necessary Digits (NND), including the access code, must be assigned. The number of digits for an Incoming Connection (IC) is not available. Therefore, data assignment is not required. This data must be assigned when SRV = OGC/OGCA is assigned via ASPA command. This data determines the number of necessary digits to be sent out to the distant office.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LNND
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Necessary Digits Data RT:1 IC/OG:OG NND:5 WRT?
RT: IC/OG: NND:
Route Number IC: Incoming Call OG: Outgoing Call (Enter OG.) Number of Necessary Digits (1-24)
ND-45687 (E)
ANPD CM0-01 Business

siness
ANPD
Assignment of Numbering Plan Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determine the service which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation). 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. If the numbering plan data is being used in common by all tenants accommodated in the system, data need only be assigned for TN = 1. This type of assignment will only function correctly if ASYD SYS-1, Index 92 is properly assigned. (0/ 1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for all Tenants)
Note:
When changing any of the numbering plan data, the old data must be deleted before new data is assigned. When the first digit of a particular numbering plan is to be deleted and the first DC (Digit Code) is already in use (i.e. Station Number) the Station Numbering data must first be deleted before the new numbering plan data can be assigned via this command. When entering the Connection Status Index (CI) information, Normal, Hooking, or Busy Service must be designated by entry of the character N, H, or B. Consideration should be given when the system has various digits stations (2 digit STN, 3 digit STN, ..., etc.) whose first digit is the same number. In this case, only a station whose NND (Number of Necessary Digits) values are the same in the ASPA. ANPD command can be displayed in the Busy Lamp Field on ATTs. The remaining stations which do not meet the above condition cannot be displayed.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LNPD
ND-45687 (E)
ANPD CM0-01 Business
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Numbering Plan Data TN:1 1STDC:5 CI:H NND:1 BLF:1 WRT?
TN: 1ST DC: CI:
NND: BLF:
Tenant Number 1st Digit Code (0-9, *, #) Connection Status Index N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Number of Necessary Digits (1-6) Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT 0: Out of Service 1: In service
ND-45687 (E)
AOFC CM0-11 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AOFC
Assignment of Office Name
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command provides users with a facility to assign their office name. The office name appears on the display and on printed out sheets. 3. Precautions Up to 20 characters can be assigned (inclusive of blanks and numbers). To delete the data, press the space key 20 times. Entry of / key cannot cease this command while you are entering data. To end this command, press ESC key, then Return to menu? (Y/N) is displayed on the screen.
4. Related Reference Command ASYD, SYS, INDEX96-115 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Office Name Office Name: NEC TOKYO WRT? Y Return to menu? (Y/N)
Assignment
OFFICE NAME: Office Name (Max. 20 characters) <RETURN>: Execute <ESC>: Menu
ND-45687 (E)
AOPR CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AOPR
Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display the routing pattern for each Outgoing Pattern Routing Number (OPR), and to assign, delete and display the SKIP information for skipping digits and the Pattern Number Location (PNL) for adding the digits designated in the AADC (Assignment of Additional Digit) command. 3. Precautions Before using this command, confirm that an Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has been assigned in the AFRS (Assignment of Flexible Route Selection) command. When a Pattern Number Location (PNL) is assigned or deleted in this command, it must also be assigned or deleted in the AADC command. However, this is not applicable when the PNL parameter is assigned as 0 (invalid). In the event that a Tie Line is busy and route advance is to a DDD Line, a value larger than 128 must be assigned to the PNL. A maximum of 256 OPRs (0-255) can be assigned, and a maximum of eight (8) routes can be assigned to each OPR.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LOPR
-Parameter TDPTNAssignment: ATCP Deletion: ATCP Display: ATCP List up: LTCP -Parameter PNLAssignment: AADC Deletion: AADC Display: AADC List up: LOPR
ND-45687 (E)
AOPR CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing TDPTN:0 OPR:0 RA:0 E:0 RT:1 SKIP:0 PNL:1 0VFT:0 PRSC:0
WRT?
TDPTN: OPR: RA: E: RT: SKIP: PNL: OVFT: PRSC:
Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255) Order of Route Advance (0-7) Route Advance End Indication (0/1: Ended/-) Outgoing Route Number Number of digits to be skipped (0-24) Pattern Number Location (0-255) (Option 0-999) Overflow Tone (0/1: -/Overflow Tone) Priority Restriction Class (0-15)
ND-45687 (E)
AOSP CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AOSP
Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display skip and additional digit information for each Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number. 3. Precautions Before using this command, confirm that an Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNO) has been assigned in the ASTP (Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern) command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LSLP
Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern PNO:1 ADD:2 WRT? SKIP:1 DC:12
PNO: SKIP: ADD: DC:
Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15) Number of digits to be skipped (0-24) Number of digits to be added (0-4) Additional Digit Information (Max. 4 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
APAD CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
APAD
Assignment of PAD Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display PAD control data for tandem connections, and trunk to station connections. 3. Precautions Details of PAD data are as follows: PAD Data 0: PAD Data 1: PAD Data 2: PAD Data 3: PAD Data 4: PAD Data 15:
Note:
Switch Setting of the Circuit Card Note 2 dB PAD ON Note 4 dB PAD ON Note 6 dB PAD ON Note 8 dB PAD ON Note PAD OFF
Switch setting depends on the Trunk Circuit Card.
When data is not assigned in this command, the PAD is set for PAD OFF. When assigning Station connection, IC PAD data is valid for outgoing call from the station/incoming call from the trunk.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LPAT
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD
ND-45687 (E)
APAD CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of PAD Data TDM/ST:T ICRT:1 OGRT:1 ICPAD:1 OGPAD:1 WRT?
TDM/ST:
Tandem Connection or Station Connection T: Tandem Connection S: Station ICRT: Incoming Route Number OGRT: Outgoing Route Number IC PAD: Incoming PAD Data (1-15) OG PAD: Outgoing PAD Data (1-15) IC/OG PAD Data is as follows: 0: No APAD Setting 1: 2 dB PAD On Note 2: 4 dB PAD On Note 3: 6 dB PAD On Note 4: 8 dB PAD On Note 5-14: Not used 15: PAD OFF Switch setting depends on the Trunk Circuit Card.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
APCR CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
APCR
Assignment of Primary Call Restriction
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display Primary Call Restriction data for specific digit codes. 3. Precautions Parameter PDC includes the Access Code.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LPCR
-Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Deletion: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Primary Call Restriction TN:1 BLOCK:0 PDC:67854 RSC:15 RES:0 WRT?
TN: BLOCK: PDC: RSC: RES:
Tenant Number Block Number (0-49) Primary Call Digit Code (Max. 24 digits) Route Restriction Class (0-15) Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed
ND-45687 (E)
APHN CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
APHN
Assignment of Phantom Station Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display a phantom number for a station. 3. Precautions Numbers that are being used as station or LDN numbers cannot be used as phantom numbers. One Phantom Number can be assigned to one Station Number. However, when an incoming call to a Phantom Number has terminated to the corresponding station, no station hunting is performed even if the called station is a member station of a hunt group. An assigned Phantom Number can be deleted by one of the following two methods: a. b. Designate the desired Phantom Number, then delete it. Enter a space for the desired Phantom Number and delete the Phantom Number by designating the corresponding Station Number.
A maximum of five phantom numbers can be assigned to a station. (Including individual phantom number and phantom number in a hunting group)
4. Related Reference Command List up: LPAE
ND-45687 (E)
APHN CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Phantom Station Number TN:1 PH:0 WRT? PHSTN:6666 STN:3113
TN: PHSTN: PH:
STN:
Tenant Number Phantom Number Hunting Condition of Phantom No. (0/1) 0: Individual Phantom No. 1: Phantom No. in a Hunting Group Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
APSW CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
APSW
Assignment of Password Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display Password Service data. Two grades of passwords are assigned in Data Type 1 of this command. A Grade 1 password allows unlimited access to the commands. A Grade 2 password allows access to a limited number of commands, which are designated in Data Type 2 of this command. 3. Precautions The Password code is a four (4) character alphanumeric code. A space cannot be used as a character in the password code. After the data is assigned by this command, Password service is available when data is assigned to each port in ASYD, SYS 1, Index 116-123. When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explanation on the screen. A Grade 2 password code cannot be assigned without assigning a Grade 1 password. A maximum of sixteen (16) different commands can be assigned to each Grade 2 password. When a command name consists of more than five (5) characters, enter the first four (4) characters.
ND-45687 (E)
APSW CM0-03 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure a. To enter Grade 1 and Grade 2 password codes

Assignment of Password Data TYPE.1 GRD-1: 8888 CNT: 2 2 GRD-2:2222
When the data has been entered, the next Grade-2 Password Code can be assigned. Priority of Grade-2 Password Codes is displayed. TYPE: GRD-1: CNT: GRD-2: Data Type (Enter 1.) 1: Password Code Data Grade-1 Password Code Number of GRD-2 Passwords to be assigned (1-16) Grade-2 Password Code (s)
b. To enter the commands to be accessed by each Grade 2 password code:

Assignment of Password Data TYPE: 2 GRD-2: 2222 CNT: 2 WRT? 2 CMMND:ATRK
Priority of Grade-2 Password Command Name is displayed. When the number of CMMNDs designated in CNT have been entered, WRT? displays. TYPE: GRD-2: CNT: CMMND: Data Type (Enter 2.) 2: Grade-2 Command Data Grade-2 Password Code Number of commands to be accessed (1-16) Command Names (4 Characters)
ND-45687 (E)
ARAC CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ARAC
Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign and delete the access code and its corresponding tenant number for Remote Access to System. 3. Precautions An access code designated in any other command cannot be assigned, changed or deleted in this command. The tenant number entered in this command is the one to be used for Remote Access to System. When Remote Access to System service is executed from a DID trunk, this command is used to assign the Access Code for it. The Access Code is an unused station number.
4. Related Reference Command List up: Display: 5. Entry Procedure LRAC DSTN
Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code ICTN:1 TN:1 WRT? ACC:999
ICTN: ACC: TN:
Tenant Number of IC Trunk Access Code (Max. 5 digits) Tenant Number for Authorization Code
ND-45687 (E)
ARDN CM0-08 CCIS, Business, Hotel

CIS, siness, tel
ARDN
Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. Function This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the PC (Point Code) of the Satellite PBX on the basis of the Point Code Index No. of the Main PBX. If the Day/Night mode of the Main PBX is changed by means of this command, the Day/Night mode of the satellite PBX is also changed. 3. Precautions When there are plural Satellite PBX Offices By grouping Tenant Numbers, mode can be changed on all the Satellite PBX offices or on each Tenant basis. This command is used only at the Main PBX.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LRDN
Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control INDEX:1 PC:10
WRT?
INDEX: PC:
Point Code Index for Remote Day/Night Change (0-15) Point Code (1-16383)
ND-45687 (E)
ARNP CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ARNP
Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display an access code for each individual route in accordance with the ARTD command. This data must be assigned when SMDR, LCR, and/or Universal Senders are applied. 3. Precautions This data must be assigned for billing management (When SMDR has been assigned in the ARTD command). This data becomes necessary when LCR or LCRS has been assigned in the ASPA command. In the case of the No.7 CCIS, LCR service must be used. In the case of the No.7 CCIS, the Office Code (Office ID Number) of the self office is to be assigned to RT = 0. The Office Code assigned is used in Centralized Billing-CCIS service and Calling/Called Number Display-CCIS service.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LRNP
Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data RT:1 ACC:11 WRT?
RT: ACC:
Route Number Access Code (Max. 3 digits) RT0: (Max. 4 digits) OTHER: (Max. 3 digits)
Note:
When RT = 0, ACC is a maximum of four (4) digits.
ND-45687 (E)
ARPC CM0-08 CCIS, Business, Hotel

CIS, siness, tel
ARPC
Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. Function This command is used to Centralized Service of Message Center within No.7 CCIS Network, to assign, delete and display the Remote Point Code under the centralized office. 3. Precautions This command is used by only No.7 CCIS Network Systems. 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LRPC
Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service CSN: 1 CNT:3 3 RPC: 3
Entry Number
WRT? Y
CSN:
Centralized Service Number (1-7) 1 2-7 Message Center Not used
CNT: RPC:
Remote Point Code Counter (1-32) Remote Point Code (1-16383)
ND-45687 (E)
ARRC CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ARRC
Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used for restriction of alternative routing of an Incoming Route (ICRT) to an Outgoing Route (OGRT). 3. Precautions Data must be assigned to activate the feature.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LRCF
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD 5. Entry Procedure For restriction via an Attendant Console:
Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data ICRT:1 OGRT:1 ARI:A RES:0 WRT?
ICRT: OGRT: ARI:
RES:
Incoming Route Number Outgoing Route Number Alternative Route Index (A/D) (Enter A.) A: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via the Attendant Console. Restriction Data In case of Attendant Console (ATT) 0: Alternate routing is restricted 1: Alternate routing is allowed
ND-45687 (E)
ARRC CM0-02 Business, Hotel
Via Direct Dial Access from a station:

Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data ICRT:1 OGRT:1 ARI:D WRT? RES:1
ICRT: OGRT: ARI:
RES:
Incoming Route Number Outgoing Route Number Alternative Route Index (A/D) (Enter D.) D: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via Direct Dial Access from a station. Restriction Data In case of Dial Access (DIAL) 0: Alternate routing is restricted 1: Alternate routing is allowed 2: Toll Restriction is required
ND-45687 (E)
ARSC CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ARSC
Assignment of Route Restriction Class
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign and display route restriction information according to the Route Restriction Class (RSC) of the station and the Route Number (RT). 3. Precautions Restriction data RES = 2 is valid only in the case of RRI = 3 when Toll Restriction is assigned. Data must be assigned to activate the feature. Data can be entered on a Day/Night basis, if specified in ASYD, SYS 1, Index 75, Bit 0. If SPACE and ENTER are pressed at the time of restriction data entry, the operation can be returned to RRI entry. If the ESC key is pressed at the time of restriction data entry, the operation can skip to WRT?. For Hotel/Motel System, System data (ASYD, INDEX 170, -b3) must be assigned in order to activate a new Restriction class (RSC) for stations is Room Cut Off or Do Not Disturb mode.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LRTC
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD
ND-45687 (E)
ARSC CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Note:
ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE Mode
TN:1 D/N:D RSC RRI 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 1 RT:1 1 1 1 1 1 RRI:1 2 0 0 0 1 RSC:1 WRT?Y 3 0 1 0 1 4 1 0 0 1 5 0 1 0 2 6 1 1 1 0 7 1 1 0 0 8 1 1 1 0 9 1 1 0 2 10 1 1 1 1 11 0 1 0 2 12 0 1 0 0 13 1 0 1 1 14 0 0 1 1 15 1 0 0 1
Select the desired mode by use of (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow); then press ENTER.
RES
DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode TN: Tenant Number RT: Route Number RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) RSC13: When setting Room Cut Off RSC14: When setting Do Not Disturb RSC15: When setting Room Cut Off and Do Not Disturb RRI: Route Restriction Index (0-3) 0: IC Restriction Via ATT 1: IC Restriction Directly 2: OG Restriction Via ATT 3: OG Restriction Directly RES: Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Connection is allowed 2: Toll Restriction is required
Note:
For Hotel/Motel System, with respect to Do Not Disturb, Room Cut Off service, when Route Restriction Class (RSC) is changed (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 170, b3 = 1), assign RSC13, 14 and 15.
ND-45687 (E)
ARTD CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ARTD
Assignment of Route Class Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function Route Class Data, which provides each individual trunk route with specific functions (i.e,.outgoing, incoming signaling, type of trunk, outgoing service, etc.), is to be assigned or deleted using this command. 3. Precautions Data entry can be initiated from any Counter Display Number (CDN). If the ESC key is pressed at the time of data entry, the operation can skip to WRT?.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure Enter the desired mode LRTD
Note:
Select the desired mode by use of (Down Arrow); then press ENTER.
(Up Arrow) or
ND-45687 (E)
Enter the Route Class Data
Assignment of Route Class Data RT:2 CDN: 6 CDN FUNC DT 9 TQ :0 CDN FUNC DT
Enter the Route Number. Type the CDN number. When you press ENTER, the cursor jumps to the corresponding function.
CDN FUNC DT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OSGS ONSG ISGS INSG TF TCL L/T RLP :2 :3 :1 :0 :3 :8 :1 :2
Enter the data, using the choices displayed on the right side of the screen. WRT? displays after the last CDN in the sequence or when ESC is pressed.
Note:
CDN is the Item Number of Route Class Data parameter. The Item Number is incremented automatically. If SPACE and ENTER are pressed at the same time, the cursor returns to the parameter CDN. If the ESC key is pressed, the operation can skip to WRT? even if route class data entry is in progress (Refer to (3) Precautions). Route Number Counter Display Number (1-69) A function corresponding to CDN, such as OSGS, is displayed.
Note: Note:
RT: CDN: FUNC:
ND-45687 (E)
Shown below is the correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names):
CDN FUNCTION CDN FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
OSGS ONSG ISGS INSG TF TCL L/T RLP TQ SMDR TD DR AC TNT LSG SMDR2 H/M MC ANI D MSB MSW TR OC R/L RVSD TL ANS TELP PAD OGRL ICRL HD GUARD
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
WINK VAD CLD FA BC TCM TDMQ TRSC BT PRV A/D CW TPQ BL TRKS DPLY not used 2W/4W FAAT GW TCMA SMDR3 HDT CD CCH TC/EC IRE SCR LYER1 NET INT DC HKS SCF SMDR4
ND-45687 (E)
Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination. OSGS: (CDN = 1) Signal Interface for Outgoing(0-15) 0: No.7 CCIS 1: Ring Down 2: Second Dial Tone 3: Not used 4: Sender (Immediate Start) 5: Not used 6: Sender (Delay Dial Start) 7: Sender (Wink start) 8-15: Not used Signal Selection for Outgoing (0-15) 0: Not used 1: DP, 10 pps, 33% Make 2: PB, 60 msec. Interruption or No.7 CCIS 3: DP/PB 4: MF 5: DP, 20 pps, 33% Make 6: Not used 7: DP, 20 pps, 50% Make 8: PB, 120 msec. Interruption 9: DP, 10 pps, 40% Make 10: MFC 11-15: Not used Signal Interface for Incoming (0-15) 0: No.7 CCIS 1: Ring Down 2: Second Dial Tone 3: Not used 4: Sender (Immediate Start) 5: Not used 6: Sender (Delay Dial Start) 7: Sender (Wink Start) 8-15: Not used
ONSG: (CDN = 2)
ISGS: (CDN = 3)
ND-45687 (E)
INSG: (CDN = 4)
Signal Selection for Incoming (0-15) 0: Not used 1: DP, 10 pps, 33% Make 2: PB, 60 msec. Interruption or No.7 CCIS 3: DP/PB 4: MF 5: DP, 20 pps, 33% Make 6: Not used 7: DP, 20 pps, 50% Make 8: PB, 120 msec. Interruption 9: DP, 10 pps, 40% Make 10: MFC 11-15: Not used Type of Trunk Function (0-3) 0: Not used 1: Outgoing Trunk (OGT) 2: Incoming Trunk (ICT) 3: Bothway Trunk (BWT) Trunk Class (1-31) This data is assigned in order to terminate Incoming Calls at their designated keys (TRK ICI Key Lamps) on the Attendant Console. 1: DDD Line 2: FX Line 3: WATS Line 4: Tie Line/Announcement Trunk 5: CCSA Line 6: Toll Terminal 7: CAS Line 8: Paging 9: Code Call Trunk 10: Dictation Trunk 11: General Paging Trunk 12: Radio Paging Trunk 13-31: Not used Line/Trunk Identification This data should always be assigned as 1 0: Not used (Line) 1: Trunk Trunk Release Pattern (0-3) 0: Calling Party Release (Outgoing only) 1: Not used 2: First Party Release (either station or trunk side) 3: Not used
TF: (CDN = 5)
TCL: (CDN = 6)
L/T: (CDN = 7)
RLP: (CDN = 8)
TQ: (CDN = 9)
Outgoing Trunk Queuing (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Detailed Billing Information (0/1) 0: SMDR Out of Service (ORT not required) 1: SMDR In Service (ORT required for receiving dialed digits) Toll Denial-Battery Reversal Always assigned as zero (0)
SMDR: (CDN = 10)
TD: (CDN = 11) DR: (CDN = 12)
Distinctive Ringing Pattern (0/1) This parameter designates whether distinctive ringing will be provided for an incoming call. 0: Distinctive Ringing is not required (ASYD, SYS 3, Index 3, Bit 0 = 0) 1: Distinctive Ringing is required (ASYD, SYS 3, Index 3, Bit 0 = 1) Flexible Routing Pattern Designation (0/1) When outgoing route selection pattern number is to be determined by the AFRS command, 1 is to be assigned if the Access Code is included in the Number Pattern Code (NPC). 0: When flexible routing is executed, numbers are translated excluding the Access Code. 1: When flexible routing is executed, numbers are translated including the Access Code. Tenant Number Check This data should always be assigned as zero (0). 0: Tenant number check is not required in trunk selection. Line Signal (0-15) 0: Loop 1: Ground Start C.O.Line 2: CDH 3: Caller ID (Loop) 4: Loop 5: E&M Tie Line 6: DX 7: 24V4 8: Loop DID 9-11: Not used 12: Speech Line (for No.7 CCIS or Bch of ISDN) 13: Signal Line (for No.7 CCIS or Dch of ISDN) 14: Not used 15: Not used Detailed Billing Information (0-15)
AC: (CDN = 13)
TNT: (CDN = 14)
LSG: (CDN = 15)
SMDR2: (CDN = 16)

ND-45687 (E)
b3
b2
b1
b0 0/1: -/Incoming Call (SMDR is required)
0/1: SMDR is required for toll and local outgoing calls/SMDR is required only for toll outgoing calls.
0: 1: 2: 3:
Example:
Metering pulses are necessary. Hexadecimal assignment is 01.
b3 0 8
b2 0 4
b1 0 2
b0 1 1 b0 = bit 0 b1 = bit 1. . .
The following explains what hexadecimal data 1 means for SMDR2: For incoming calls SMDR is required because Bit 0 is assigned as one (1). SMDR is required for toll and local outgoing calls because Bit 1 is assigned as zero (0). Metering pulses are detected by the system; therefore Bit 2 is zero (0) and Bit 3 is zero (0).
ND-45687 (E)
ARTD CM0-01 Business, Hotel CONTENTS / INPUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
b0
0-Detailed billing is not required for incoming calls. 1- Detailed billing is required for incoming calls. 0- Detailed billing is required for toll and local outgoing calls. 1- Detailed billing is required only for toll local outgoing calls. 0-
b1
1-Metering pulses are used. b2, 3 23-
H/M: (CDN = 17)
Hotel service in CCIS No. 7. 0: Out of Service 1: In Service When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
MC: (CDN = 18) ANI: (CDN = 19) D: (CDN = 20) MSB: (CDN = 21) MSW: (CDNI = 22) TR: (CDN = 23) OC: (CDN = 24)
911-ANI Service 0: Out of Service
1: In Service
When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
ND-45687 (E)
R/L: (CDN = 25)
Attendant-Identification of Incoming Trunk Display 0: TN, RT, TK display 1: C.O. Line Number display Trunk Reversal Identification This data is necessary when a specific Trunk route provides battery reversal for answer supervision. 0: Battery Reversal System 1: Third Wire System Tone Level When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. Answer signal from Trunk side. 0: No answer signal is given. 1: Answer signal is given. Time Elapse Indication Service (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service
RVSD: (CDN = 26)
TL: (CDN = 27) ANS: (CDN = 28)
TELP: (CDN = 29)
Note:
TELP (Time Elapse Indication) is a warning tone sent to the caller after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (usually 3 minutes). This data determines Pad control on the ODT/DTI circuit card Note ODT DTI 0: No Pad 0: 8 db Pad 1: 2 dB Pad 1: 2 dB Pad 2: 4 dB Pad 2: 4 dB Pad 3: 12 dB Pad 3: 6 dB Pad 4: 16 dB Pad 4: 8 dB Pad 5: Not used 5: Not used 6: Not used 6: Not used 7: Pad Off
PAD: (CDN = 30)
Note:
CDN30=0: PAD value can also be set by switch setting on the ODT /DTI circuit card. CDN30= 1 ~ 6: Actual PAD value depends on PAD ROM on the trunk circuit card. (See the Circuit Card Manual.
ND-45687 (E)
OGRL: (CDN = 31)
Release timing for outgoing trunk connection. (Normally assigned as 0.) 0: 608 msec. 1: 224 msec. 2: 288 msec. 3: 352 msec. 4: 416 msec. 5: 480 msec. 6: 544 msec. 7: 608 msec. 8: 672 msec. 9: 736 msec. 10: 800 msec. 11: 864 msec. 12: 928 msec. 13: 992 msec. 14: 1056 msec. 15: 1120 msec. Release timing for incoming trunk connections. (Normally assigned as 0.) 0: 288 msec. Note 1: 224 msec. 2: 288 msec. 3: 352 msec. 4: 416 msec. 5: 480 msec. 6: 544 msec. 7: 608 msec. 8: 672 msec. 9: 736 msec. 10: 800 msec. 11: 864 msec. 12: 928 msec. 13: 992 msec. 14: 1056 msec. 15: 1120 msec.
ICRL: (CDN = 32)
Note:
160 msec. in case of Loop Dialing Trunk
ND-45687 (E)
HD: (CDN = 33)
Trunk Hold Timing. (Normally assigned as 0.) 0: 10 sec. 1: 2 sec. 2: 4 sec. 3: 6 sec. 4: 8 sec. 5: 10 sec. 6: 12 sec. 7: 14 sec. 8: 16 sec. 9: 18 sec. 10: 20 sec. 11: 22 sec. 12: 24 sec. 13: 26 sec. 14: 28 sec. 15: 30 sec. Outgoing inhibit timing after trunk release. (Normally assigned as 0.) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 3072 msec. 512 msec. 1024 msec. 1536 msec. 2048 msec. 2560 msec. 3072 msec. 3584 msec. 4096 msec. 4608 msec. 5120 msec. 5632 msec. 6144 msec. 6656 msec. 7168 msec. 7680 msec.
GUARD: (CDN = 34)
ND-45687 (E)
WINK: (CDN = 35)
Width of a Wink Signal. (Normally assigned as 0.) 0: 160 msec. 1: 64 msec. 2: 96 msec. 3: 128 msec. 4: 160 msec. 5: 192 msec. 6: 224 msec. 7: 265 msec. 8: 288 msec. 9: 320 msec. 10: 352 msec. 11: 384 msec. 12: 416 msec. 13: 448 msec. 14: 480 msec. 15: 512 msec. When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
VAD: (CDN = 36) CLD: (CDN = 37) FA: (CDN = 38)
Forced Account/Forced Authorization Code 0: Check is not required 1: Check is required (For Remote Access to System) C.O. Line Idle Balance Condition (0/1) Note 0: Not balanced 1: Balanced
BC: (CDN = 39)
Note:
When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. Terminal Class Mark (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Tandem Off Hook OG Queuing (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Trunk Restriction class (0-15) 0: Out of Service 1-15: In Service For any condition other than CCIS, assign data 0. For CCIS voice route and/or to send ANI across CCIS signaling route, assign data 1.
TCM: (CDN = 40)
TDMQ: (CDN = 41)
TRSC: (CDN = 42)
BT: (CDN = 43)
ND-45687 (E)
PRV: (CDN = 44)
Line Trunk Privacy (0/1): 0: Privacy Out of Service 1: Privacy In Service For Busy Verification, Call Waiting, Executive Right of Way, Paging, Dictation, Data Communication, etc.). Analog/Digital Line Data (0/1): 0: Analog 1: Digital Assign data 1 only for digital T1 routes or Bch of ISDN routes Call Waiting Service (0/1): 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Priority OG Queuing (0/1): 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Detection of Blocking Signal: 0: Not detected 1: Detected Trunk Selection Sequence: Note 0: Select from the trunk which becomes idle first. 1: Select from the trunk which becomes idle last.
A/D: (CDN = 45)
CW: (CDN = 46)
TPQ: (CDN = 47)
BL: (CDN = 48)
TRKS: (CDN = 49)
Note:
Assign this data reversing to the mate office data (for No. 7 CCIS). Number Display of Dterm between offices: 0: Not Provided 1: Provided Not Used 2 Wires/4 Wires 0: 2 Wires 1: 4 Wires Authorization Code for ATT: 0: Depends on RSC of ATT 1: Authorization Code always required. Gateway Option: 0: Out of Service 1: Data Signaling Trunk 2-15: Not used
DPLY: (CDN = 50)
(CDN = 51) 2W/4W: (CDN = 52)
FAAT: (CDN = 53)
GW: (CDN = 54)
ND-45687 (E)
TCMA: (CDN = 55) SMDR3: (CDN = 56)
Detailed billing for outgoing in tandem connection: 0: Required 1: Not required Heterogeneous Data Trunk: 0: Not Heterogeneous Data Trunk 1: Heterogeneous Data Trunk Consecutive Dialing: 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Common Channel Handler: 0: CCH is not mounted (normal setting) 1: CCH is mounted (ISDN or CCIS line) When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
HDT: (CDN = 57)
CD: (CDN = 58)
CCH: (CDN = 59)
TC/EC: (CDN = 60) IRE: (CDN = 61)
Inter-reringing signal (0/1) 1: Supervisory When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. Step Call Restriction for Tie Line Call (0/1): 0: Step Call is restricted 1: Step Call is not restricted Layer 1 (For ISDN): 0: 23B + D 1: 30B + D User/Net Identification (For ISDN): 0: User Side (normal setting) 1: Network side Interface Specification (For ISDN): 0: No.7 1: N-ISDN 2 2: Not used 3: INS 1500 4: Not used 5: AT & T (#4/#5 ESS) 6: Not used 7: NT DMS100/DMS250
ND-45687 (E)
SCR: (CDN = 62)
LYERl: (CDN = 63)
NET: (CDN = 64)
INT: (CDN = 65)
DC: (CDN = 66)
Dialed Number Confirmation (For ISDN): 0: Sub Address 1-2: Number of Main Address Digits to be translated. Hooking Service 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Split Call Forwarding Note 0: Transfer to a station for incoming C.O./Tie Line call. 1: Transfer to a station for incoming station call.
HKS: (CDN = 67)
SCF: (CDN = 68)
Note:
This data is valid when ASYD, SYS, INDEX 79, b2 = 1. Detailed billing for incoming in tandem connection: 0: Required 1: Not required
SMDR4: (CDN = 69)
ND-45687 (E)
The Table below shows examples of standard route class settings.

KIND OF TRUNK ROUTE PARAMETER CICT CDN FUNCTION COGT CBWT TIE LINE DID LINE CCIS LINE VOICE DATA ISDN LINE (PRI) B-CH D-CH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
OSGS ONSG ISGS INSG TF TCL L/T RLP TQ SMDR TD DR AC TNT LSG SMDR2 H/M MC ANI D MSB MSW TR OC R/L RVSD TL ANS TELP PAD OGRL ICRL HD GUARD
0 0 1 3 2 1 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 3 0 0 1 1 1 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 3 1 3 3 1 1 2 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 3 2 3 3 4 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 7 3 2 5 1 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 2 0 2 3 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 0
0 2 0 2 0 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0
0 2 0 2 3 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 4 1 1 0 1
0 2 0 2 0 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 7 0 0 0 0
ND-45687 (E)
ARTD CM0-01 Business, Hotel KIND OF TRUNK ROUTE PARAMETER CICT CDN FUNCTION COGT CBWT TIE LINE DID LINE CCIS LINE VOICE DATA ISDN LINE (PRI) B-CH D-CH
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
WINK VAD CLD FA BC TCM TDMQ TRSC BT PRV A/D CW TPQ BL TRKS DPLY not used 2W/4W FAAT GW TCMA SMDR3 HDT CD CCH TC/EC IRE SCR LYER1 NET INT DC HKS SCF SMDR4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0
ND-45687 (E)
ARTE CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ARTE
Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign and display Expansion Route Class Data for Route Numbers. Initially, all zeroes display under DT (Expansion Route Class Data) on the screen. When a Route Number is specified and the route has been programmed, the corresponding Expansion Route Class Data is displayed. The data can be changed when necessary. Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). 3. Precautions Data of CDN1-8 (TCMN-MT) are effective only for the trunk routes for which 4 (MF) is assigned in ARTD CDN = 2 (ONSG) or 4 (INSG). For all other trunk routes, assign 0 to all of these data.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LRTE
Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data RT:2 CDN: 5 CDN FUNC DT 9 TQ 0 CDN FUNC DT
CDN FUNC DT 1 OSGS 2 ONSG 3 ISGS 4 INSG 5 TF 6 TCL 7 L/T 8 RLP :2 :3 :1 :0 :3 :8 :1 :2
Enter the data, using the choices displayed on the right side of the screen. WRT? displays after the last CDN in the sequence or when ESC is pressed. Route Number Counter Display Number A function corresponding to CDN, such as TCMN, is displayed. Data entered for Expansion Route Class
RT: CDN: FUNC: DT:
ND-45687 (E)
The table below shows the correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names):
CDN
FUNCTION
CDN
FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
TCMN TCMC MFSP KPST KPPT STC MC MT TONE PPTM MPTM LPTM RSAX CST CSEG CSEU CSEL CMP TALK FOT RST TOCI TOCD ODGD RLS GWD
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53
H1 DT CI OID TKS PAD2 TRM TRPX LDR TSC SATS RVPX DQ SLOV SDTO ADVPRA IND UUI DCH CMRT PREF DFS BOB HO1CH IFR CONV CNI
ND-45687 (E)
Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination: TCMN: (CDN = 1) Number of digits of TCM (S Code) (0-3) 0: No digit 1: 1 digit 2: 2 digits 3: Not used TCM and KP Sending Sequence (0-3) 0: KP-ST 1: KP TCM-ST 2: TCM KP-ST 3: KP (TCM) -ST Sending Speed (0-15) Tone ON Tone OFF 0: 68 msec. 1: 56 msec. 2: 68 msec. 3: 68 msec. 4: 48 msec. 5: 52 msec. 6-15: Not used
TCMC: (CDN = 2)
MFSP: (CDN =3)
68 msec. 56 msec. 32 msec. 36 msec. 48 msec. 52 msec.
Digit/sec. 7.5 (CCITT No.5) 10 10 10 10
(In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: KPST: (CDN = 4)
24.0 sec. 5.5 sec. 7.0 sec 8.5 sec. 10.0 sec. 11.5 sec. 13.0 sec. 14.5 sec.
8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
16.0 sec. 17.5 sec. 20.0 sec. 22.0 sec. 24.0 sec. 26.0 sec. 28.0 sec. 30.0 sec.
Duration of KP sending (0-15) Note 0: 48 msec. 8: 112 msec. 1: 56 msec. 9: 120 msec. 2: 64 msec. 10: 128 msec. 3: 72 msec. 11: 136 msec. 4: 80 msec. 12: 144 msec. 5: 88 msec. 13: 152 msec. 6: 96 msec. 14: 160 msec. 7: 104 msec. 15: 168 msec.
ND-45687 (E)
(In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7:

Note:
8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
When the monitor signal is Reverse and the data is set to0, KP sending is stopped by reserve signal monitor at the related distant office. Pause after KP sending (0-15) 0: 48 msec. 8: 112 msec. 1: 56 msec. 12: 144 msec. 5: 88 msec. 13: 152 msec. 6: 96 msec. 14: 160 msec. 7: 104 msec. 15: 168 msec.
KPPT: (CDN = 5)
(In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: STC: (CDN = 6)
8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
Stop Code (0-15) 0-11: Not used 12: MF 13: Not used 14: DTMF 15: MF (for MF signaling) MP Start Cause (0/1) This data must always be set to 0. 0: As per ST 1: Not used MF Frequency (0/1) 0: DTMF (44) 1: MF (2 out of 6)
MC: (CDN = 7)
MT: (CDN=8)
ND-45687 (E)
TONE: (CDN = 9)
TONE Designation for TRK Call Termination (0-15) Note 0: DT 1-15: Not used
Note:
This data is effective when 2 (Second Dial Tone) is set in ARTD, CDN = 3 (ISGS). Sender Prepause (0-15) 0: Standard Note 1: 600 msec. 2: 800 msec. 3: 1000 msec. 4: 1200 msec. 5: 1400 msec. 6: 1600 msec. 7: 1800 msec.
PPTM: (CDN = 10)
8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
2000 msec. 2200 msec. 2400 msec. 2600 msec. 2800 msec. 3000 msec. 3200 msec. 3400 msec.
Note:
Depends on the data in SYS1, Index 131 of ASYD.
(In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: MPTM: (CDN = 11)
8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
Sender Minimum Pause Note 0: 10 PPS/600 msec., 20 PPS/450 msec. 1: 600 msec. 9: 2200 msec. 2: 800 msec. 10: 2400 msec. 3: 1000 msec. 11: 2600 msec. 4: 1200 msec. 12: 2800 msec. 5: 1400 msec. 13: 3000 msec. 6: 1600 msec. 14: 3200 msec. 7: 1800 msec. 15: 3400 msec. 8: 2000 msec.
Note:
Possible to use when adjusting the inter-digit timer in DP line.
ND-45687 (E)
(In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: LPTM: (CDN = 12)
8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
Sender Inter-Digit Pause Index (0-15) Note 0: DP/1 sec., PB/0.5 sec. 1: 600 msec. 9: 2200 msec. 2: 800 msec. 10: 2400 msec. 3: 1000 msec. 11: 2600 msec. 4: 1200msec. 12: 2800 msec. 5: 1400 msec. 13: 3000 msec. 6: 1600 msec. 14: 3200 msec. 7: 1800 msec. 15: 3400 msec. 8: 2000 msec.
Note:
Possible to use when adjusting the duration of Pause in the case of Speed Calling - System or Adding digits.
(In case of MFC) 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: RSAX: (CDN = 13) CST: (CDN = 14) CSEG: (CDN = 15) CSEU: (CDN = 16)
8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15:
ND-45687 (E)
CSEL: (CDN = 17) CMP: (CDN = 18) TALK: (CDN = 19) FOT: (CDN = 20) RST: (CDN = 21) TOCI: (CDN = 22)
Trunk Override Calling (0/1) 0: Override inhibited (Calling side) 1: Tie Line Override Service is provided (Calling side) Trunk Override Called (0/1) 0: Override inhibited (Called side) 1: Tie Line Override Service is provided (Called side). When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
TOCD: (CDN = 23)
ODGD: (CDN = 24) RLS: (CDN = 25) GWD: (CDN = 26)
Gate Way Data Service (0-15) 0: Out of service 1: Gate way system 2-15: Not used When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
Hl: (CDN = 27) DT: (CDN = 28) CI: (CDN = 29)
ISDN transmitting information (0 - 15) Note 0: Out of service 1: 16-Digit Caller Number Service, Attribute Information Notification Service, and Calling Sub-Address Transfer Service 2-15: Not used
Note:
Information transfer from ISDN line to CCIS line function.
ND-45687 (E)
OlD: (CDN = 30) TKS: (CDN = 31) PAD2: (CDN = 32)

DATA
Pad Control Data 2 (0-7)
SEND
RECEIVE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Note:
No Pad 2 dB 3 dB 12 dB 16 dB 6 dB 2 dB 3 dB 11 dB 11 dB 6 dB Not used 0 dB 0 dB
PAD value can also be set by switch setting on the 8TLT card. When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
TRM: (CDN = 33) TRPX: (CDN = 34) LDR: (CDN = 35) TSC: (CDN = 36) SATS: (CDN = 37) RVPX: (CDN = 38) DQ: (CDN = 39)
ND-45687 (E)
SLOV: (CDN = 40)
Slumber Time Override Service (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service System message automatic output when Connection Acknowledge signal has not been received (0/1). 0: Out of Service 1: In Service ISDN PRI Failure Routing Service (0/l) Note 0: Out of Service 1: In Service
SDTO: (CDN = 41)
ADVPRA: (CDN = 42)
Note:
This data is valid for dummy routes. Inter-office Name Display 0: Out of Service 1: In Service When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
IND: (CDN = 43)
UUI: (CDN = 44) DCH: (CDN = 45) CMRT: (CDN = 46)
Common use of Route Numbers of ISDN trunks (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
PREF: (CDN = 47) DFS: (CDN = 48) BOB: (CDN = 49)
Broad Band (0/1) 0: 64K 1: Nx 64K When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.
HOlCH: (CDN = 50) IFR: (CDN = 51)
Indonesia Compulsion Cut Service (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service
ND-45687 (E)
CONV: (CDN = 52)
SMDR Called Number Conversion (0/1) 0: Conversion Number 1: Dialed Number CNI Calling Number Identification format (0-3) 0: No ANI 1: Feature Group D Format 2: Not used 3: Not used
CNI: (CDN=53)
ND-45687 (E)
ARTI CM0-09 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ARTI
Assignment of Trunk Application Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used to assign and display Trunk Application Data for Route Numbers. Initially, all zeroes display under DT (Expansion Route Class Data) on the screen. When a Route Number is specified and the route has been programmed, the corresponding Trunk Application Data is displayed. The data can be changed when necessary. Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN). 3. Precautions None 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LRTEI
Assignment of Trunk Application Data RT:2 CDN: 5 CDN FUNC DT 16 MTC 0
CDN FUNC DT 1 RST 2 HMT 3 TRCRST 4 TRSRST 5 T309LNK 6 T309CON 7 L;CRST 8 VCM
Enter the data, using the choices displayed on the right side of the screen. WRT? displays after the last CDN in the sequence or when ESC is pressed. Route Number Counter Display Number A function corresponding to CDN, such as RST, is displayed. Data entered for Expansion Route Class
RT: CDN: FUNC: DT:
ND-45687 (E)
The table below shows the relationship between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names):
CDN
FUNCTION
CDN
FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
RETMSG RST HMT TRCRST TRSRST T309LNK T309CON LLCRST VCM OVRT POOL DTRT TMPRT CODEC PASS IRL MTC TC TS
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 40
CDCSPD DVRST RSCT ROCG RICG STSENQ ANI SRV TON NPI SPMET ECCIS ECCISTM ECCISOB ECCISIB L/T ECCISTD OPCC MFCG2 CLBK
ND-45687 (E)
Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination: RETMSG (CDN1) 0= 1= RST (CDN2) 0= 1= 2= 3= HMT (CDN3) TRCRST (CDN4) 0= 1= 2= 3-15 = TRSRST (CDN5) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4-15 = T309LNK (CDN6) 0= 1= 2= 3= T309CON (CDN7) 0= 1= 2= 3= LLCRST (CDN8) 0= 1-31 =
Note:
Return Message for Connect ISDN LINE with Analog Trunk CALL PROC. + ALERT CALL PROC. + ALERT or CALL PROC. + PROGRESS Assignment of Restart Restart Send per Individual Channel Restart Not Send Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element No restriction Data call restriction (Unrestricted digital, Restricted digital and Vido data calls are restricted.) Speech call restriction (Speech, 3.1 kHz audio and 7 kHz audio calls are restricted.) Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element No restriction 384 Kbps (H0) call is restricted 1536 Kbps (H11)/1920 Kbps (H12) call is restricted 384 Kbps and 1536 (H11)/1920 (H12) Kbps calls are restricted Assignment of Timer T309 for Data Link Failure Layer 2 Alarm with T309 is Disabled Layer 2 Alarm [Temporary] with T309 is Enabled Layer 2 Alarm [Permanent] with T309 is Enabled Assignment of Timer T309 for Layer 1 Failure Layer 1 Alarm with T309 is Disabled Layer 1 Alarm [Temporary] with T309 is Enabled Layer 1 Alarm [Permanent] with T309 is Enabled Call restriction by user rate in Low Layer Capability Information Element No restriction Call which includes this user rate value is restricted Note
User rate value is based on ITU-T Q-931.
ND-45687 (E)
VCM (CDN9) OVRT (CDN10) POOL (CDN11) DTRT (CDN12) 0= 1= TMPRT (CDN13) 0= 1=
Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal (DTI Layer 1 alarm) Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal as a Layer 1 alarm Temporary Route Information over CCIS In CCIS, the route information can be transferred by the call control messages. Also, the call restriction can be checked referring to this route information. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Clear call when DTI alarm is detected
Note
CODEC (CDN14) PASS (CDN15) IRL (CDN16)

Note:
This data should be set when there is no Dch in the physical DTI. Assignment of Timer T309 Value. Restoration timer (TCxMTC) sec. 0-15 = TC (CDN 18) x MTC (Restart timer value) Timer T309 Counter Value 0= 4 = 30 sec. 1 = 64 msec. 5 = 5 min. 2= 6 = 1 sec. 3 = 2 sec. 7= Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data. Call restriction while Tie Line is backed up on ISDN. No Restriction Speech call restriction (Speech. 3.1 kHz audio, 7 kHz audio calls are restricted.) Data call restriction (Unrestricted digital, restricted digital and Video data are restricted.) Both Speech and Data calls are restricted. Call restriction by Temporary Route Information Note No Restriction Restriction
MTC (CDN17)
TC (CDN 18)
TS (CDN19) CDCSPD (CDN20) DVRST (CDN21) 0= 1= 2= 3= RSCT (CDN22) 0= 1=

Note:
This data is effective when TMPRT = 1.

ROCG (CDN23) 0= 1=
Note:
Outgoing Call Account by Temporary Route Information Effective
Note
This data is effective when TMPRT = 1. Incoming Call Account by Temporary Route Information Effective
Note
RICG (CDN24) 0= 1=
Note:
This data is effective when TMPRT = 1. Status Inquiry Message Send Out of Service In Service
Note
STSENQ (CDN25) 0= 1=
Note:
This data is not effective in Australia. Timing to demand ANI Information There is no ANI demand at Incoming Call After receiving 1st digit After receiving 2nd digit After receiving 3rd digit After receiving 4th digit After receiving 5th digit After receiving 6th digit After receiving 7th digit
ANI (CDN26) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= SRV (CDN27)
Additional Service Selection Note Advice of Charge (AOC) 0 = Valid 1 = Invalid Bit 1: Malicious Call Trace (MCT)/Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 0 = Valid 1 = Invalid Bit 2-Bit 6: Bit 7: For TON (CDN28) and/or NPI (CDN29) 0 = Invalid 1 = Valid Bit 0:
Note:
Enter this data by a decimal.
ND-45687 (E)
TON (CDN28) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7=
Note:
Type of Number Note Unknown International Number National Number Network Special Number Subscriber Number Abbreviated Number Reserved for Extension
This data is effective when ARTD CDN65 (INT) = 4 and SRV (CDN27) bit7 = 1. Numbering Plan Identification Note Unknown ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan Data Numbering Plan Telex Numbering Plan National Standard Numbering Plan Private Numbering Plan Reserved for Extension
NPI (CDN29) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5-7 = 8= 9= 10-14 = 15 = Others =

Note:
This data is effective when ARTD CDN65 (INT) = 4 and ARTI SRV (CDN27) bit7 = 1. Meter Pulse Observation Control Low to High Transition High to Low Transition Low to High & High to Low Transition Event Based CCIS (E-CCIS) Out of Service In Service
SPMET (CDN30) 0= 1= 2= 3= ECCIS (CDN31) 0= 1=
ND-45687 (E)
ECCISTM (CDN32) 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= 10-13 = 14 = 15 = ECCISOB (CDN33) 0= 1= ECCISIB (CDN34) 0= 1= L/T (CDN35) 0= 1=

Note:
Release timer for E-CCIS Line 3 minutes (Default setting) 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour Not used Immediately after call completion Not released OG Billing for E-CCIS Line Out of Service In Service IC Billing for E-CCIS Line Out of Service In Service Local/Toll Local Toll
Note
Only for Russia Addressing Information used in E-CCIS Called DID Number Called Sub Address Optimal Call Control In Service Out of Service Calling Party Category Subscriber with Priority Subscriber without Priority Kind of Collect Call Blocking Signal GB-7 GB-3
ECCISTD (CDN36) 0= 1= OPCC (CDN37) 0= 1= MFCG2 (CDN38) 0= 1= CLBK (CDN40) 0= 1=
ND-45687 (E)
ASAT CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASAT
Assignment of Specific Attendant Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display a specific attendant number to an attendant console. When the specific attendant number is dialed, that particular attendant console will receive the call. 3. Precautions The specific attendant number cannot be a station number or LDN already being utilized.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSAT
-Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN, DSTN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Specific ATT Number TN:1 ACC: 6001 ATN:1 WRT?
TN: ACC: ATN:
Tenant Number Access Code (The number of digits must be the same as the Station numbers.) Attendant Number
ND-45687 (E)
ASCL CM0-01 Business

siness
ASCL
Assignment of Station Class Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to change the station class (Telephone Equipment Class, Route Restriction Class, and Service Feature Restriction Class), without deleting the station number. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. The Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) cannot be changed from a Dterm Class (TEC = 12) to any other Telephone Class, or vice versa. When it is necessary to change the present TEC to another type of TEC, use the ASDT command to delete the present station data and assign new station data.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: ASDT ASDT ASDT, DLEN, DSTN LLEN, LSTN
-Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Station Class Data TN:1 STN:3113 TEC:3 RSC:1 SFC:1 WRT?
TN: STN:
Tenant Number Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
ASCL CM0-01 Business
TEC:
RSC: SFC:
Telephone Equipment Class (1-31) 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Data terminal via data module 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used 26: VPS 27: Eight Conference Equipment 28-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15) For assignment of RSC from ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15) For assignment of SFC from ASFC command.
ND-45687 (E)
ASDC CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASDC
Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is necessary when LCR six (6) digit translation is required for FX Prefix Codes, MCI, SPRINT and other applications. This command is used to assign, delete, and display this information. 3. Precautions Before using this command, the following must be confirmed. An Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has been assigned in the AFRS (Assignment of Flexible Route Selection) command. If it has not been assigned, error code is displayed. When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error-related information.
Note:
When the Translation Pattern is for an FX line, designate parameter KIND as PFX. When the Translation Pattern is for a Special Common Carrier (MCI, SPRINT, etc.), designate parameter KIND as SCC. When the route to be used is changed according to the time of day, a Time of Day Change Pattern Number from 1 to 7 is assigned, in accordance with the ATCP command. When assigning data to parameter EFFECT the following must be noted: a. When parameter KIND is assigned as PFX, 0/1 assigned to parameter EFFECT has the following meaning: EFFECT = 0: EFFECT = 1: b. means that an additional digit is not required for access to an FX line. means that the digit 1 is required as a prefix for access to an FX line.
When parameter KIND is assigned as SCC, 0/1 assigned to parameter EFFECT has the following meaning: EFFECT = 0: EFFECT = 1: means that the office code is not allowed for the area code dialed. means that the office code is allowed for the area code dialed.
When the EFFECT parameter is 2, 6-digit translation is not required for the area code designated.
ND-45687 (E)
ASDC CM0-02 Business, Hotel
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSDC
-Parameter OPRAssignment: AOPR Deletion: AOPR Display: AOPR List up: LOPR -Parameter TDPTNAssignment: ATCP Display: ATCP List up: LTCP 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing KIND:PFX TDPTN:0 OPR:0 RA:0 OFFICE:200 EFFECT:0
WRT?
KIND:
TDPTN: OPR: RA: OFFICE: EFFECT:
Kind of Selection (PFX/SCC) PFX: FX, Prefix SCC: MCI, SPRINT Time of Day Change Pattern Number (0-7) Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255) Route Advancing Order (0-7) Office Code (200-999) Designating Data (0/1) KIND = PFX EFFECT = 0: means that an additional digit is not required for access to an FX line. EFFECT = 1: means that the digit 1 is required as a prefix for access to an FX line. KIND = SCC EFFECT = 0: means that the office code is not allowed for the area code dialed. EFFECT = 1: means that the office code is allowed for the area code dialed.
ND-45687 (E)
ASDT CM0-01 ACD, Business

CD, siness
ASDT
Assignment of Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display station data. If the station number designated has already been assigned, the current data is displayed. If new data is to be assigned, the old data must be deleted before the new data can be entered. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Restriction Data command (ARSC). The Service Feature Restriction Class (SFC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Service Feature Class command (ASFC). The Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Class Data command (ARTD), and the assignment of signaling in ASYD, SYS 2, Index 2. When the station to be deleted is busy, an error indication is provided. When assigning a station to the first circuit of the circuit card, the message PKG CHECK is displayed on the CRT. When this occurs confirm that the circuit card is mounted in its proper location, then press the ENTER key. When deleting a specific Station Number, ensure to check the following items. If any item is applicable, follow the instructions specified in that item before deleting the Station Number. a. If the MW lamp on the station telephone set is lit (or if the Dterm is displaying Message Waiting), extinguish the MW lamp (or MW display on the Dterm) using the CMWL command before deleting the station data.
When TEC = 12 (D term) has been assigned, assign the key data by AKYD command, or initialize the DLC/ ELC circuit card concerned after assigning the station data. If station data is deleted, the data of the stations assigned via the AKYD command is also deleted. Note, however, that if there is data related to Intercom among the data of the stations assigned via AKYD command, station data cannot be deleted by means of this ASDT command unless the above-mentioned data assigned by AKYD command have been deleted beforehand.
ND-45687 (E)
4. Related Reference Command Display: DLEN, DSTN Change (Part): ASCL, ASTN List up: LSTN, LLEN -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Make BusyAssignment: (Busy/Idle) Display: 5. Entry Procedure
MBLE, MBST DMBL, DMBS
Assignment of Station Data TN:1 STN:3112 LENS:000002 TEC:14 RSC:1 SFC:1
WRT?
TN: STN:
Tenant Number Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
LENS:
Line Equipment number (6 digits) XX X XX X
Level (0-7) Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) TEC: Telephone Equipment Class (1-31) 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Data Terminal via data module 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line) 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used 26: VPS 27: Eight Conference Equipment 28-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15); For assignment of RSC from ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15); For assignment of SFC from ASFC command.
RSC: SFC:
ND-45687 (E)
ASFC CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASFC
Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, and display restriction information according to Service Feature Restriction Class (SFC) of the Station for the Service Feature Index (SFI). 3. Precautions Unused data should not be assigned. Data must be assigned to activate the feature.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LRTC
Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 SFI:1 SFC:0 RES:1 WRT?
DAY/ NIGHT:
SFC: SFI: RES:
Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Service Restriction Class (0-15) Service Feature Index (1-255) Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed
Note:
When WRT? = Y is entered the value of the SFC automatically increases by one (+1).
ND-45687 (E)
Each index of parameter SFI (Service Feature Index) is explained below. SFI: Service Feature Index 1: Outgoing Trunk Queuing 2: Call Back 3: Executive Right-of-Way (Calling Party) 4: Executive Right-of-Way (Called Party) 5: Call Waiting Originating (Calling Party) 6: Call Waiting Originating (Called Party) 7: Call Forwarding-All Calls 8: Call Forwarding - Dont Answer 9: Call Forwarding - Busy Line 10: Call Hold 11: Data Line Privacy / Attendant Camp on 12: Speed Calling System 13: Trunk Answer (TAS) 14: System Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 15: Not used 16: Line Load Control 17: Not used 18: Not used 19: Individual Speed Calling 20: Not used 21: Off-Hook OG Queuing 22: Not used 23: Voice Mail Password Display Elimination 24: Emergency Call 25: Call Forward Outside - local (0=Restricted 1=Allowed) 26: Call Forward Outside - long distance (0=Restricted 1=Allowed) 27: Authorization Codes 28: Digital Data 29: Direct Call Pickup 30: Off-Hook Alarm 31: SID to Terminating user DTE 32: Line Circuit Reverse Relay (for 16LC) 33: Periodic Time Indication Tone 34-35: Not used 36: Special Common Battery Station/Brokerage Hot line (Dterm) 37: Radio Paging Answer 38: Meet-Me Paging 39: Individual Trunk Access 40: Not used 41: Timed Reminder (for Business System) Automatic Wake Up (for Hotel System) 42: Group Announcement (for Hotel System) 43: Maid Dial (for Hotel System) 44: Last Number Call Redial 45: Front Desk Terminal (for Hotel System) 46: Bad Call Notify (Faulty Trunk Report)
ND-45687 (E)
47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57: 58: 59: 60: 61: 62: 63: 64: 65: 66: 67: 68: 69: 70: 71: 72: 73: 74: 75: 76: 77: 78: 79: 80: 81: 82: 83-86: 87: 88-89: 90: 91: 92: 93: 94: 95: 96: 97: 98:
Guest Information Display Terminal (Hotel/Motel) Disable Distinctive Ringing for analog ports (0/1 No/Yes) Not used Off-Premise Extension Boss-Secretary Features Voice Call using an Access Code Message Reminder using an Access Code Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Station-to-station SMDR Not used Not used Not used Priority Outgoing Queue Outgoing Queue Override Line Load Control 1, 2 and 3 Line Load Control 2 and 3 Line Load Control 3 Call Park Access and Answer Call Park Automatic Message Waiting Lamp Off (for Hotel System) Intercom Group Distinctive Dial Tone Calling Station Switch Hook Flash Restriction Not used MWL Setting from the ATT or Station (Called) D term Multiline Conference Add on Trunk Override Inhibit Trunk Override Station Barge in From a Tie Line Hold on Queuing From a Tie Line 8-Party Conference Terminal Recording for an Internal Call MWL Setting from the Station (Calling) Not used Multi Channel Recording (REC) Not used Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY) Subscriber with priority/without priority Not used Voice Call Restrict (0=No / 1=Yes) Calling Party Number Display Direct Call Restriction (for ACD only) Not used Send Facility Message Requesting SID Information Send Facility Message Requesting ANI Information
99: 100: 101-102: 103: 104: 105-106: 107: 108-110: 111: 112: 113: 114: 115-121: 122: 123-124: 125: 126-127: 128: 129-130: 131: 132-135: 136: 137: 138: 139: 140: 141-144: 145: 146: 147: 148: 149-150: 151: 152: 153: 154: 155: 156: 157-255:
Note:
Call Forward Im Here (Destination) Call Forward Im Here (Origination) Not used Assignment of No Answer Timer for Blind Transfer to Station/Blind Transfer to Attendant Note Blind Transfer Not used Slumber Time Override Not used Not used Voice Call during Dial Intercom Not used Display on D term when a station is in DND (0/1 RST/DND) (6000 version ICS and above) Not used Call Forward with ATT Camp-on (JO Hotel and D ver ICS) Not used Pad Lock Not used Call Forwarding - Busy Line Override Not used Add on Conference - 8 Party Not used Automatic Idle Return Authorization Code Display Elimination Hold on Consultation Hold Enhancement Not used Send Warning Tone to interrupted parties when THREE-WAY CALLING is established using Hold on Consultation Hold Enhancement Not used Internal Zone Paging; Answer Analog Caller ID-Station Not used Personal Ringer Not used When CF-OUT SIDE is performed, Route Restriction Class of the station which has set CF-OUT SIDE is used. Not used Analog Caller ID-Station (Single Mode) Not used Call Return Call Forwarding - Override Indication Not used
If 103=0, go to ASYD 140. If 103=1, go to ASYD 247.
ND-45687 (E)
ASGD CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASGD
Assignment of Special Group
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the specific terminating unit group for a station which has already been assigned. 3. Precautions The station number expansion information must be assigned before assignment in this command. When the specific terminating unit group information is assigned or deleted in this command, the specific terminating unit information must also be assigned or deleted in the ASID command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSGD
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN Lisp up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Special Group TN:1 STN:3111 F:0 GN:1 WRT?
TN: STN: F:
GN:
Tenant Number Station Number Function Number (0-7) 0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used 3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 1 5: Priority Call 2 6: Priority Call 3 7: Not used Group Number (1-7)
ND-45687 (E)
ASHC CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASHC
Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display a pilot station hunting group. 3. Precautions In the Assignment Mode, if no secretary station is designated, enter blank. A maximum of 40 stations can be assigned to one group per system. For all other groups, a maximum of 20 stations can be assigned. If the assigning group does not need secretary, enter blank. In the Change Mode, change and deletion of the secretary station are possible. To delete a Station in the Hunting Group, use the DELETE key. To insert a station into the Group, use the INSERT key. To exchange a station in the group, enter a new station Number over the existing station Number. In the Deletion Mode, if there is no data for the group, Not Assigned!! Assign? is displayed. If Y is entered, the mode changes to Assign Mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to station number entry. Special Key Table These keys are effective in the operation mode Assignment and Change only.
KEY FUNCTION
ESC INSERT DELETE
This key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group station entry. If this key is pressed, the WRT? prompt displays. This key is used to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group station entry.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSHG, LSHL
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Enter the kind of mode
Note:
To assign a Station Hunting Group

Assignment of Station Hunting Group-CIRCULAR TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETARY: 2401 CNT STN CNT STN 2: 2402 3: 2403 4: 2404 5: 2405 6: 2406 7: 2407 8: 2408 9: 2409 10: 2410 WRT? Y CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: CNT STN 16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station included in the CIRCULAR Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
Note 1: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN. Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the WRT? prompt. When entering other
parameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.
ND-45687 (E)
To change a Station Hunting Group

Assignment of Station Hunting Group-CIRCULAR TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETAR: 2401 WRT? Y CNT STN CNT STN 2: 2402 3: 2403 4: 2404 5: 2405 6: 2406 7: 2407 8: 2408 9: 2409 10: 2410 CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 CNT STN 16: 2416 17: 2417 18: 2418 19: 2419 20: 2420
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station included in the CIRCULAR Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
parameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt. To delete a Station Hunting Group
Assignment of Station Hunting Group-CIRCULAR TN:1 STN:2400 SECRETARY: 2420 CNT STN CNT STN 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10: 2419 WRT?Y CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419
Station numbers of the station belonging in the station hunting group are displayed automatically.
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. SECRETARY: Station Numbers of the Secretary Station. PHANTOM: Station Number of the Phantom Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the CIRCULAR Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
ND-45687 (E)
ASHP CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASHP
Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Pilot
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display a pilot station hunting group. 3. Precautions In the Assignment Mode, the pilot station number is the one which has been entered first. At the time of Station Hunting Group data entry, the pilot station number is displayed as P: 2400, for instance. If the assigning group does not need secretary, enter blank. When the phantom number for the hunting group is required, use the APHN command. A maximum of 40 stations can be assigned to one group per system. For all other groups, a maximum of 20 stations can be assigned. In the Change Mode, the designation of the pilot station cannot be changed. Change and deletion of the secretary station and phantom stations are possible. However, change or deletion of phantom stations are limited only where phantom stations have been entered or where no phantom stations are assigned yet. For deletion of a station in the hunting group, use the DELETE key. For inserting a station to the Group, use the INSERT key. Exchanging a station in the group can be made by entering a new station number over the existing station number. In the Deletion Mode, if there is no data for the group, Not Assigned!! Assign? is displayed. If Y is entered, the mode changes to Assign Mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to station number entry. When the group has a phantom station, delete the phantom station number first. Special Key Table These keys are effective in the operation mode Assignment and Change only.
KEY FUNCTION
ESC INSERT DELETE
This key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group Station entry. If this key is pressed, the WRT? prompt displays. This key is used to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry.
ND-45687 (E)
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure Enter the kind of mode.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
To assign a Station Hunting Group

Assignment of Station Hunting Group - PILOT TN:1 STN:2400 SECRETARY: 2401 CNT STN CNT STN P: 2400 2: 2402 3: 2403 4: 2404 5: 2405 6: 2406 7: 2407 8: 2408 9: 2409 10: 2410 WRT? Y CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: CNT STN 16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the PILOT Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
ND-45687 (E)
To change a Station Hunting Group

Assignment of Station Hunting Group - PILOT TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETAR: 2401 CNT STN CNT STN P: 2400 2: 2402 3: 2403 4: 2404 5: 2405 6: 2406 7: 2407 8: 2408 9: 2409 10:2410 WRT?Y CNT STN 11: 2411 12: 2412 13: 2413 14: 2414 15: 2415 CNT STN 16: 2416 17: 2417 18: 2418 19: 2419 20: 2420
Note 1: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the WRT? prompt. When entering other
ND-45687 (E)
To delete a Station Hunting Group

Assignment of Station Hunting Group - PILOT TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETARY: DEL? Y CNT STN CNT STN P: 2400 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419 2401
Station numbers of the station belonging in the station hunting group are displayed automatically.
ND-45687 (E)
ASHU CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASHU
Assignment of Station Hunting Group-UCD
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display a UCD Station Hunting Group. 3. Precautions In the Assignment Mode, the recommended maximum number of member stations in a UCD Hunting Group is 20. In the Change Mode, for deletion of a Station in the Hunting Group, use the DELETE key. For inserting a station into the Group, use the INSERT key. Exchanging can be made by entering a new station number over the existing station number. In the Deletion Mode, if there is no data for the group, Not Assigned!! Assign? is displayed. If Y is entered, the mode changes to Assign Mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to station number entry. The stations in the group are displayed in a prearranged order. A maximum of 63 UCD groups can be assigned on a system basis. If more than 63 UCD groups are attempted, an Error Code will be displayed. When assigning UCD Overflow Groups (refer to AUOG command), the Tenant and Station numbers of the UCD Pilot Station assigned in this Command are used to designate the overflow group. Special Key Table. These keys are effective in the operation mode Assignment and Change only.
FUNCTION
KEY
ESC INSERT DELETE
This key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group station entry. If this key is pressed, the WRT? prompt displays. This key is used to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry. This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group station entry.
ND-45687 (E)
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure Enter the kind of mode
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
To assign a UCD Group

Assignment of Station Hunting Group - UCD TN:1 STN: 2400 WRT? Y CNT STN CNT STN 1: 2400 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: CNT STN 16: 17: 18: 19: 20:
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the UCD Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
ND-45687 (E)
To change a UCD Group

Assignment of Station Hunting Group - UCD TN:1 STN: 2400 WRT? Y CNT STN CNT STN 1: 2400 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the UCD Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
Note 1: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the WRT? prompt. When entering other
ND-45687 (E)
To delete a UCD Group

Assignment of Station Hunting Group - UCD TN:1 STN:2400 DEL? Y CNT STN CNT STN 1: 2400 2: 2401 3: 2402 4: 2403 5: 2404 6: 2405 7: 2406 8: 2407 9: 2408 10:2409 CNT STN 11: 2410 12: 2411 13: 2412 14: 2413 15: 2414 CNT STN 16: 2415 17: 2416 18: 2417 19: 2418 20: 2419
Station numbers of the station belonging in the UCD group are displayed automatically.
TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station Included in the UCD Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)
ND-45687 (E)
ASID CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASID
Assignment of Special Incoming
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the information for a specific terminating unit in the terminating unit group which has been assigned via the ASGD command. 3. Precautions Data must be assigned in the ASGD command before data can be assigned or deleted in this command. This command must be programmed when Off-Hook Alarms, Attendant Night Transfer, and/or Priority Calls 1, 2, 3 are assigned. An Attendant Console cannot be assigned as the specific terminating unit type for ATT Night Transfer (Function Number = 3). This function can only be assigned for GN = 1.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSID
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure When the call connection destination is a station:

Assignment of Special Incoming TN: 1 GN:1 S/A: STA SSTN:3111 F: 0
WRT?
TN: F:
GN: S/A: SSTN:
Tenant Number Function Number (0-7) 0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used 3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 1 5: Priority Call 2 6: Priority Call 3 7: Not used Group Number (1-7) Specific Terminating Equipment (Enter S.) S: Station Special Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
When the call connection destination is an ATT:

Assignment of Special Incoming TN: 1 GN: 1 S/A: A F: 5
WRT?
TN: F:
GN: S/A:
Tenant Number Function Number (0-7) 0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used 3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 1 5: Priority Call 2 6: Priority Call 3 7: Not used Group Number (1-7) Specific Terminating Equipment (Enter A.) A: Attendant Console
ND-45687 (E)
ASLU CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASLU
Assignment of Slumber Time Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display of the Slumber Time Group designation, and the connection destinations and a time zone for each Slumber Time Group for the Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb service. 3. Precautions Time data should be assigned using military time. When assigning plural time data for a specific Slumber Time Group, the time data assigned should not be duplicated. When setting a 24-hour slumber time, set both FROM and TO to 00:00.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSLU
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure Designation of Slumber Time Group
Assignment of Slumber Time Data FUNC: 1 TN: 1 G: 1 WRT? STN: 2000
FUNC: STN: G:
Kind of Function (Enter 1) 1: Group Information Station Number Slumber Time Group Number (1-7)
ND-45687 (E)
ASLU CM0-04 Business, Hotel
Assignment of Connection Destinations and Zone for Slumber Time Group

Assignment of Slumber Time Data FUNC:2 G: 1 CNT: 2 2 TFR: 1
Input order of Slumber Time Count is displayed.

FROM:10:00 WRT? TO:13:00
Assign as many as designated by parameter CNT.
When all the data have been entered, WRT? displays.
FUNC: G: CNT: TFR:
FROM: TO:
Kind of function (Enter 2) 2: Transfer/Time Data Slumber Time Group Number (1-7) Slumber Time Counter (1-4) Transfer Kind (1/2) 1: Attendant 2: Announcement Slumber Time Start Time Slumber Time End Time
ND-45687 (E)
ASPA CM0-01 Business

siness
ASPA
Assignment of Special Access Code
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when a Special Access code or Trunk Access code has been dialed. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. When changing the data, the old data must be deleted before the new data can be assigned. When the Access Code (ACC) is for a station number, the first digit of the numbering plan must be assigned. For example, if the numbering plan for station numbers is 5xxx, 5 is entered as the ACC. The numbering plan data must be assigned before assigning the Access Code in this command. Unused levels should not be assigned. In the case of Speed Calling - System (SRV = SSC, SID = 15); assign NND as the number of digits for ACC, and NND1 as the number of digits for Abbreviated Digit Code (ADC). When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC, SID = 60), the maximum number of necessary digits (NND) is 5. When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC, SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 42), the maximum number of necessary digits NND is 15. When assigning Call Park Remote Retrieval Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 63), the ACC equals the number of necessary digits (NND). When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRC=SSC, SID=17), the maximum necessary digits (NND) is 8. When assigning individual TRR access (SRV= SSC;, SID = 17), the maximum number of necessary digits is eight.
ND-45687 (E)
4. Related Reference Command List up: LNPD
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter EQPAssignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE 5. Entry Procedure For Station Number Level:
Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 3 CI: N SRV: STN WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service (Enter STN.) STN: Station Number Level
ND-45687 (E)
For Service Code:

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 22 CI: H SRV: SSC SID: 1 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SlD:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index
The contents of parameter SID are explained below: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21:
Call Hold Attendant Call (OPR) Call Back; Entry Executive Right-of-Way (Override) Call Waiting Originating Call Back (Cancel) Call Pick-Up Group Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Set Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Cancel Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Set Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Cancel Call Forwarding-Dont Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Set Call Forwarding-Dont Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Cancel Speed Calling-Station (Program) Speed Calling-System TAS Answer Individual Trunk Access Not used OG Trunk Queuing (Set) OG Trunk Queuing (Cancel) Speed Calling-Station (Access)
ND-45687 (E)
22-27: 28: 29: 30-34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50-59: 60: 61: 62: 63:
Not used Call Forward - Im Here (Set) Call Forward - Im Here (Cancel) Not used Call Pick-up Direct Not used Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Account Code Authorization Code/Forced Account Code/Dial Access to Lock Flash Signal Send (CAS-Main) Last Number Redial Not used Bad Call Notify (Faulty Trunk Report) Wake Up Call Set (Hotel, Business 6100 Series Software and above) Timed Reminder, Entry Timed Reminder, Cancel Not used Attendant Manual Override Station Call Park (Park) Station Call Park (Local Retrieval) Station Call Park (Remote Retrieval)
ND-45687 (E)
For Service Code Appendix:

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 10 CI: B SRV: SSCA SIDA: 41 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SIDA:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service (Enter SSCA) SSCA: Service Code Appendix Service Feature Index A (1-225)
The contents of parameter SIDA are explained below: 1-40: Not used 41: Voice call 42: Message Remainder (D term) 43-45: Not used 46: Line Load Control; Assign 47: Line Load Control; Delete 48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel 50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel 52: Not used 53: Boss/Secretary Override 54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON or Station; Set 55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON or Station; Cancel 56-62: Not used 63: Call Pickup Expand 64-65: Not used 66: Multi Channel Recording (REC) 67: Not used 68: Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY) 69-84: Not used 85: Dial Access to Unlock 86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry 87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry 88: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for Station); Entry Note 89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for Station); Cancel 92-95: Not used
CHAPTER 2 Page 256 Revision 4.0 ND-45687 (E)
96: 97: 98: 99-105: 106: 107-225:

Note:
Follow Me Phone Call Hold Conference Internal Zone Paging Not used Call Return Not used
These indexes are used when ASYD, SYS1, Index 79, bit 2 is assigned as 1 (Call Forwarding is in service).
For Outgoing Call:

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 90 CI: B SRV: OGC RT: 3 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: RT:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service (Enter OGC.) OGC: Outgoing Call Route Number
ND-45687 (E)
For Outgoing Call (Advance):

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 CI: N CNT:3 WRT? ACC: 80 SRV: OGCA 1-3RT: 5
After entering CNT, enter Route No. of the alternate routes, one after another. (If ENTER is pressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead of RT increases by one and then the next RT No. can be entered.)
When as many RT Nos. as designated by CNT are entered, WRT? displays. TN: ACC: CI: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter OGCA) OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance) Number of advanced route Route Number
SRV: CNT: RT:
For Least Cost Route Selection:

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 70 CI: H SRV: LCR RT: 3 2nd DT: 0 AH: 0 SUB: 0 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: RT: 2nd DT: AH: SUB:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter LCR.) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection Route Number. (Enter Dummy Route Number.) Second Dial Tone (0/1: -/SDT) Authorization Code Dialing (0/1: -/AH) Sub Address Dialing (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service
ND-45687 (E)
For Register Sender LCR:

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 777 CI: H SRV: LCRS RT: 3 2nd DT: 0 AH: 0 SUB: 0 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: RT: 2nd DT: AH: SUB:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter LCRS.) LCRS: Register Sender LCR Route Number (Entry Dummy Route Number). Second Dial Tone (0/1: -/SDT) Authorization Code Dialing (0/1: -/AH) Sub Address Dialing (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service
For Office Termination:

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 888 CI: N SRV: UNIF SKIP: 0 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SKIP:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter UNIF.) UNIF: Office Termination Number of Digits to be skipped from the Access Code (1-5)
ND-45687 (E)
For Announcement Service:

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 CI: N TYPE: 1 ATN: 1 WRT? ACC: 11 SRV: ANNC EQP: 122
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: TYPE: ATN: EQP:

Note:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter ANNC). ANNC: Announcement Service Announcement Equipment Type. (0/1 . . . -/Multiple Announcement) Announcement Trunk Tenant No. (1-255) Announcement Equipment No. (1-127)
When TYPE equals 1, EQP must be 122 through 125.
For Paging Answer or Paging Cancel:

Assignment of Special Access Code TN: 1 ACC: 21 CI: N SRV: PAGA RT: 10 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV:
RT:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service (Enter PAGA or PAGC.) PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel Route Number
ND-45687 (E)
ASPD CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASPD
Assignment of Speed Calling Code
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the telephone number corresponding to each Abbreviated Digit Code. 3. Precautions The access code for the designated outgoing trunk route must be included in the telephone number to be assigned to the Abbreviated Digit Code. If a pause is required in the number to be assigned, P is entered where the pause is required. The standard length of a pause is 3 seconds. However, this can be changed in the ASYD command (SYS-1 INDEX = 131). When assigning a number in which certain digits vary, enter an M where digits are to be dialed manually. It should be noted that once M is entered in any part of telephone number, all digits following the M must be dialed manually.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LSDA
Assignment of Speed Calling Code TN: 1 ADC: 23 CD: 123 WRT?
TN: ADC: CD:

Note:
Tenant Number Abbreviated Digit Code (Max. 4 digits) Note 1 Telephone number (max. 24 Digits) corresponding to the Abbreviated Digit Code (ADC).
The data that can be assigned as ADC are limited to numbers 0 through 9, *, #, and pause.
Note 1: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of 3 digits can be as-
signed.
ND-45687 (E)
ASTD CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASTD
Assignment of State Translation Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign and display various kinds of status translation data on a system basis. 3. Precautions This command should only be used by NEC Engineering. At initialization, all the data becomes 0.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LSYD
Assignment of State Translation Date STM: 0 STS: 0 ST: 1 WRT?
STM: STS: ST:
State Translation Main Category Number (0-31) State Translation Category Number (0-31) State Translation Information (0/1)
For assigning parameters STM, STS, and ST, refer to the table on the following page.
ND-45687 (E)
ASTD CM0-03 Business, Hotel Table 2-7 List for Assignment of ASTD STM STS ST =standard settings *
Processing at the time of originating an outgoing C.O. line call
If the calling station is that of RSC = 1, 3, the call is outgoing via LCR. The call is processed by second dial tone system. Override not allowed Override allowed Invalid Valid Warning tone is sent out to both the ATT and the station. Warning tone is sent out to the Station, ATT, and C.O. side. Warning tone is not sent out to the C.O. side. Warning tone is also sent out to the C.O. side. BWT only Either BWT or OGT Restricted Allowed (depending on ARRC)
Note 1
1* Processing for an override from a station into a connection between COT and another station. Passing dial tone 0 Processing for warning tone sending at the moment when ATT has overridden into a connection between COT and station (Busy Verification) 0 Processing for warning tone sending at the moment when ATT has overridden into busy COT (Attendant Override) 0 1* 0 1* 0 1* 0 1*
Note 1: One setting applies to five items. (STM=0, STS 0)
Kind of Trunk to be seized for an outgoing C.O. line call from ATT Tandem connection with COT included
0 1* 0 1*
2 3 4 Enable Passing Dial Tone Busy Verification Tone for Att. and Sta. only Trunk Release 0 1 1 2 3 * = standard settings
0* 0* 0 1* Station (Calling Party Release) Trunk Note 2
Note 2: Valid when C. O. line has a release signal.
0* 0* 0*
ND-45687 (E)
ASTD CM0-03 Business, Hotel Table 2-7 List for Assignment of ASTD (Continued) STM STS ST =standard settings *
0 1 2 3 2 4
Three-way calling with COT included Three-way calling with COT included in Executive Right of Way service Outgoing call to a C.O. Line or a Tie Line after holding the COT. Outgoing call to a C.O. Line after holding a station or a Tie Line Processing for calling a fully-restricted station after holding the COT Processing in which ATT overrides to the connection between the COT and a station (Busy Verification), then Busy Verification Warning Tone is sent out periodically. Step Call when a Tie Line incoming call encounters busy. Remote Access to PBX/Automated Attendant. Type of System
0 1* 0 1* 0 1* 0 1* 0 1* 0* 1 0 1 0 1* 0* 1*
Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed (Note: The call can be transferred.) Warning tone is sent out to both the station and the ATT Warning tone is sent out to the station, ATT, and C.O. side. Allowed Restricted Not provided In service Standard for MMG/UMG/ IMGxh/IMGdxh Standard for IMG/IMGx
6 4 0
0 6 1 2 3 7 0 * = standard settings
0* 0* 0* 1*
ND-45687 (E)
ASTN CM0-01 Business

siness
ASTN
Assignment of Station Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to change the station number assigned to a particular LEN. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. If the MW lamp is lit at the station to be changed (or, in the case of a Dterm, if Message Waiting is displayed), extinguish the MW lamp (or MW display on the Dterm) using the CMWL command.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: 5. Entry Procedure ASDT ASDT ASDT, DLEN, DSTN LLEN, LSTN
Assignment of Station Number TN: 1 STN: 3113 NEW STN: 3666
WRT?
TN: STN: NEW STN:
Tenant Number Station Number New Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
ASTP CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASTP
Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display selection translation pattern numbers (PNO, PNI) in case digit addition or deletion is necessary for an outgoing or incoming call on any particular route. 3. Precautions When a signal translation pattern number (PNO, PNI) is to be assigned or deleted by means of this command, the following commands must be executed. a. b. In the case of Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNO), the AOSP (Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern) Command must be executed. In the case of Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNI), the AISP (Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern) Command must be executed.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSLP
-Parameter PNIAssignment: AISP Deletion: AISP Display: AISP List up: LSLP -Parameter PNOAssignment: AOSP Deletion: AOSP Display: AOSP List up: LSLP -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD
ND-45687 (E)
ASTP CM0-02 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For Incoming:

Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern IC/OG: IC TN: 1 PNI: 1 WRT? RT: 1
IC/OG: TN: RT: PNI: For Outgoing:
Kind of Assignment (Enter IC.) IC: Incoming Tenant Number Route Number Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15)
Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern IC/OG: OG TN: 1 PNO:1 WRT? RT:1
IC/OG: TN: RT: PNO:
Kind of Assignment (Enter OG.) OG: Outgoing Tenant Number Route Number Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15)
ND-45687 (E)
ASYD CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ASYD
Assignment of System Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is necessary for assigning and changing system data in the PBX. 3. Precautions ASYD is divided into three sections, as follows: a. b. c. Assignment of System Data-1. (SYS 1) Assignment of System Data-2. (SYS 2) Assignment of System Data-3. (SYS 3)
System data must be entered using hexadecimal numbers. Refer to Office Data Specification of each particular system for the applicable system data.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LSYD
Assignment of System Data SYS: 1 INDEX: 5 WRT? DATA: 00
SYS:
TN: INDEX:
DATA:
System Data Type 1: System Data 1 2: System Data 2 3: System Data 3 Tenant Number System Data Index SYS INDEX 1 0-511 2 0-15 3 0-31 System Data (Hexadecimal)
ND-45687 (E)
ATAS CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
M0-02
ATAS
Assignment of TAS Service Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display TAS (Trunk Answer from Any Station) information, on a per-tenant basis. 3. Precautions None 4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LTAS
Assignment of TAS Service Data TN: 1 MG: 00 WRT? UNIT: 0 CN: 0
TN: MG: UNIT: CN:
Tenant Number Module Group Number (00-31) Mounted Unit Number (0-3) Circuit Number (0/1)
ND-45687 (E)
ATCC CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
M0-03
ATCC
Assignment of Terminal Configuration
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to change the baud rate of the MAT. Any of the baud rates displayed at the right side of the ATCC screen may be enabled. The baud rate in the MAT is preset to 4800 bps. Depending on the type of connection to the system, this may have to be changed. If the baud rate is changed at any time, the IOC in the system must also be changed to match the new baud rate. 3. Related Reference Command None 4. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Terminal Configuration Program Version Number: 8.00 Program Version Date: 86/05/16 Data Transmission Speed:4800
This section is automatically displayed. Default data is displayed. Enter the intended data from the MAT.
WRT?
Data Transmission Speed Selection:
300 bps 600 bps 1200 bps (MODEM) 4800 bps (DEFAULT) 9600 bps
ND-45687 (E)
ATCP CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ATCP
Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to set or change the time period corresponding to each Time of Day Change Pattern Number (0-7). These Time of Day Change Patterns are used to change the routes to be used during a specific time period, so that trunks can be effectively utilized and call charges can be kept to a minimum. 3. Precautions The Data display function and data assignment function of this command are separate, and the required function must be selected at the start of the command operation.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure To Assign Time/Pattern Change Data
Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information WRT/DPY: W FROM 00:00 TO 08:00 TDPTN: 1 WRT?
LTCP
WRT/DPY:
FROM-TO-: TDPTN:
Note: Note:
Operation Mode (To assign data, enter W.) W: Assignment D: Display Time Data for TDPTN Time of Day Change Pattern (Enter 0-7).
Assignment intervals must be at least 30 minutes. The system will fill in any unassigned time patterns for a 24-hour period.
ND-45687 (E)
ATCP CM0-02 Business, Hotel
To Display Time/Pattern Change Data

Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information WRT/DPY: D FROM 00:00 TO 08:00 TDPTN: 1 WRT?
Press ENTER. This number will increase by one, and all assigned patterns will be displayed.
WRT/DPY:
FROM-TO-: TDPTN:
Operation Mode (To display data, enter D.) W: Assignment D: Display Time Data for TDPTN Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7).
To Delete Time/Pattern Change Data

Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information WRT/DPY: W FROM 00:00 TO 24:00 TDPTN: 0 WRT? Y
WRT/DPY:
FROM-TO-: TDPTN:
Note: Note:
Operation Mode (To delete data, enter W.) W: Assignment D: Display Time Data for TDPTN Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7).
Times must be entered from 00:00 to 24:00. This deletes all assignments. To change any assignments, you must delete all assignments and then reassign the new ones.
ND-45687 (E)
ATDP CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ATDP
Assignment of Toll Code Restriction
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display allowable calls or define 3/6 digit toll restriction on an outgoing connection basis and a tandem or trunk-to-trunk connection basis. 3. Precautions When assigning the destination (Area/Office) code (DC) all the digits plus the digits in the access code must be assigned. The AARP command is necessary when restriction data has been assigned to RES = 2 (Toll Restriction is required) in the ATDP command, the ARSC command or in the ARRC command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LTDP
-Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For a Tandem Connection: a. Enter the data of TDM/OG, DAY/NIGHT.
Assignment of Toll Code Restriction TDM/OG: T DAY/NIGHT: D
(Enter T.) T: Tandem Connection DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode TDM/OG: b. Enter the remainder data.
Assignment of Toll Code Restriction TDM ICRT: 1 OGRT: 1 DC: 44 TDI: 0
This is displayed when T has been entered.
WRT?
TDM: ICRT: OGRT: DC: TDI:
NND:
Tandem Connection Incoming Route Number Outgoing Route Number Destination (Area) Code (Max. 11 digits) Restriction Data 0: Connection is Restricted 1: Connection is Allowed 2: 3/6-Digit Toll Restriction 3: C.O. Operator Call (9 + 0) Applicable only when TDI=2
ND-45687 (E)
For an Outgoing Connection: a. Enter the data of TDM/OG, DAY/NIGHT.
Assignment of Toll Code Restriction TDM/OG:0 DAY/NIGHT:D
TDM/OG:
(Enter O.) O: Outgoing Connection DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode b. Enter the remainder data.
Assignment of Toll Code Restriction OG RSC: 0 DC: 44 DAY OGRT: 1 TDI: 0
This displays when 0 has been entered. However, when NIGHT has been entered for parameter DAY/NIGHT, NIGHT is displayed here.
WRT?
OGRT: DC: RSC: TDI:
Outgoing Route Number Destination (Area) Code (Max. 11 digits) Restriction Class (0-15) Restriction Data 0: Connection is Restricted 1: Connection is Allowed 2: 3/6-Digit Toll Restriction 3: C.O. Operator Call (9 + 0)
ND-45687 (E)
ATGL CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ATGL
Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the Trunk Group Busy Lamps on the Attendant Console, when all the trunks in a specific route are busy. This command allows each Attendant Console to have any route dedicated to any TG lamp.
3. Precautions None 4. Related Reference Command List up: LPAT
-Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp ATN: 1 TGN: 1 RT: 1 WRT?
ATN: TGN: RT:
Attendant Console Number Trunk Group Number (1-10) Route Number
ND-45687 (E)
ATIM SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ATIM
Assignment of Date and Time
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function The NEAX2400 ICS is provided with two kinds of clocks; a hardware clock showing the hour, minute and second, and a software clock. The clock information entered in this command sets both the software and the hardware clock. Clock information is executed when the Y key is pressed following the WRT? prompt. 3. Precautions This clock is assigned in military time.
4. Related Reference Commands None 5. Entry Procedure a. Enter YEAR.

Note:
Year must be entered in four digits: i.e., 1998.
Assignment of Date and Time DATE TIME YEAR 1998/07/15 [TUE] 16:16 :1998
b. Enter MONTH.
Assignment of Date and Time DATE TIME MONTH 1998/07/15 [TUE] 16:16 :7
ND-45687 (E)
ATIM SYS Business, Hotel
c. Enter DAY.
Assignment of Date and Time DATE TIME DAY 1998/07/15 [TUE] 16:16 :15
d. Enter HOUR.
Assignment of Date and Time DATE TIME HOUR 1998/07/15 [TUE] 16:16 :16
e. Enter MINUTE.
Assignment of Date and Time DATE 1998/07/15 [TUE] TIME 16:16 MINUTE :16 WRT?
When the MINUTE data is entered, the WRT? prompt displays.
ND-45687 (E)
ATMD CM0-11 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ATMD
Assignment of Timing Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command is used to assign the system timer value (ASYD,SYS1, INDEX 128-147, 149-152, 155-159, 189). 3. Precautions This command can assign only the typical timer value. The timer value other than this can be assigned by ASYD (Assignment of System Data). When the following message appears on the lower part of the screen during data entry, please take appropriate measures in accordance with the information below.
4. Related Reference Command ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 128-147, 149-152, 155-159, 189 Error messages are described below.
ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION RESPONSE
The existent data is invalid; therefore Timer value is correct, but no suitable data must be assigned. indication of command. Present data is invalid. Assign correct data first. Timer value is not correct.
Assign another value. Enter the correct data by this command.
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure a. Kind of System timer selection screen Selection Display -1
No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Assignment of Timing Data Kind of Timer Register Prepause Timer Register Inter Digit Timer Sender Connection Acknowledge Timer Sender Prepause Timer Sender Inter Digit Timer for DP Sender Inter Digit Timer for PB Trunk Soft Hold Timer for Attendant Console Seizure Guard Timer Ground Button on Hold Timer for SCB Telephone Periodic Timer Indication Tone Timer (Starting Timer) Periodic Timer Indication Tone Timer (Tone Interval) No Answer Timer (Station to Station Connection) No Answer Timer for Recall on Call Transfer No Answer Timer for Station Call from ATT using C.F.D. (via ATT) Automatic Recall Timer for D term > Up <
Assign Index 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 144 <ESC> Next Page
<
Assignment of Timing Data Kind of Timer No. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. Attendant Automatic Recall Timer Howler Tone Timer DIT Supervisor Timer at Terminal Station Busy Camp On Recall Timer for CAS-Satellite Station CAS Flash Signal Sending Guard Timer for CAS-Main Station CAS Flash Signal Timer for CAS Main Station Interval for Call Waiting Indication Tone to Busy Station Attendant Sender Pre-pause Timer Trunk Soft Hold Timer A Trunk Soft Hold Timer B Attendant Busy Verification Warning Tone Timer OG Queuing, Automatic Cancel Timer ACM, UBM signal No Receiving Timer > Up <
<
> Down
<RETURN> Execution
Selection Display - 2
Assign Index 145 146 147 149 150 151 152 155 156 157 158 159 189 <ESC> Next Page
> Down
<RETURN> Execution
ND-45687 (E)
Procedure: 1. Select the kind of Timer you want to assign: Use the ( or ) keys to move through the list.
Use the ESC key to move between Screen Display 1 and Screen Display 2. 2. Press ENTER. A screen will display for the kind of timer you have selected. [See (b).] a. Kind of Timer Display (Example: Register of Prepause Timer, as selected on Selection Display.)
Assignment of Timing Data Register Prepause Timer Index Number [128] Timing Data:12 sec. 12 30 WRT? Y 14 16 18
Assign
Select the timer value from the following. [sec.] * Default 2 4 6 8 10 20 22 24 26 28
*When this data is DEFAULT,12 sec. is to be set. < > Up < > Down < > Right < > Left
Procedure: 1. Move the cursor to the desired position. ( , , , or )
2. Press ENTER; WRT displays. 3. Y: N: Assign the Timer value. Return to the Selection Display.
4. To go back to the Selection Display screen (Timer Menu), press ESC.

Note 1: Timer, Index No., and present Timer value display. Note 2: To select another parameter, use the arrow keys. Note 3: When the following Message appears in the lower part of the screen,The Existing Data is Invalid.
Suitable Data Must Be Assigned, you can return to the Selection Display screen by pressing ENTER.
<RETURN> Execution <ESC> Timer Menu
ND-45687 (E)
ATNR CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ATNR
Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, and display tenant restriction information for each service feature. 3. Precautions Not used data should not be assigned. Data must be assigned to activate the feature.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LRTC
Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class DAY/NIGHT: D OGTN: 1 TMTN: 1 TRI: 0 RES: 1 WRT?
DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode OGTN: Originating Tenant TMTN: Terminating Tenant TRI: Tenant Restriction Index (0-15) 0: Station to Station Call 1: Assignment of Call Forwarding-All Calls from a Station 2: Not used 3: Assignment of Call Forwarding-All Calls from an ATTCON 4: Attendant Call, Interposition Transfer, Individual Attendant Calling 5: Day/Night Mode Change 6: Not Used 7: Routing of an incoming call to a station 8-15: Not used RES: Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Restricted 1: Allowed
ND-45687 (E)
ATRF CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ATRF
Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs. A request for traffic measurement is performed when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by this command. The collected traffic measurement data can be output from the MAT printer or stored on the HD of the MAT. 3. Precautions If error message 12 is displayed when data 1 or 2 (Traffic measurement) is entered for Type of Traffic Measurement, it is because System Data 1, INDEX 47, Bit 7 is assigned as 0(Traffic Measurement Out of Service). When assigning the traffic measurement duration time, an interval of less than one hour cannot be specified.
For Example:
9:00 a.m. - 9:30 a.m. This input data will be ignored; but from 9:00 a.m. to 11:00 a.m., this will not be ignored and a traffic-study for a two-hour period will be processed. 4. Related Reference Command Display: BackUp: DTFl, DTF2, DTF3 TDBU
ND-45687 (E)
ATRF CM0-03 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order TYPE: 1 INTERVAL:60 FROM 09:00 TO 17:00 OUTPUT: 1 WRT? PORT: 0
TYPE:
PORT: INTERVAL: FROM-TO-: TIME:
Type of Traffic Measurement (1-16) 1: Terminal Traffic 2: Route Traffic 3: Station Peg Count 4: ATT Peg Count 5: Route Peg Count 6: Service Peg Count 8: UCD Route Peg Count 9: UCD Group Peg Count 10: UCD Station Peg Count Traffic Information Output Terminal No. (0-7) Output Interval must be assigned by units of 10 Minutes (30-120 minutes). When designating output time particulary, assign 0. Measurement is to be designated. Output Time Note 1
Note 1: Enter this parameter only when INTERVAL = 0 and TYPE = 3 ~ 10 (assigning the output time of traffic
measurement information). OUTPUT: 0: 1: Printer MAT (HARD DISK) Note 2, Note 3
Note 2: The following types of Traffic Measurement can select OUTPUT=1 (MAT (HARD DISK)):
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Terminal Traffic Route Traffic Station Peg Count ATT Peg Count Route Peg Count
Note 3: A maximum of 100 files can be stored on the HD of the MAT for each type of Traffic Measurement.
When the number of files exceeds 100 for each type, the new data is overwritten eliminating the oldest data.
ND-45687 (E)
ATRK CM0-01 Business, Hotel
ATRK
Assignment of Trunk Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display LENs information corresponding to a route (RT) and trunk number (TK), on a per-tenant basis. 3. Precautions When trunks are assigned via this command, they are in the make-busy state, and must be made idle using the MBTK and MBTC commands. When assigning the first trunk of each circuit card, the message PKG CHECK is displayed on the CRT. When this occurs, confirm that a circuit card is mounted in the proper location; then press ENTER. If the trunk is a DCFT, the PKG CHECK message is always displayed.
Note:
When an Attendant Console is assigned, enter the number of the tenants which that Attendant Console can handle. (Maximum of 10) When deleting an Attendant Console, unplug the handset from the Attendant Console before executing the command. When deleting the ClC trunk of the No.7 CCIS, message LINE BUSY is sometimes displayed instead of DEL?. This message means that the CIC trunk is busy or the line concerned is not connected. Therefore, before deleting the ClC trunk, confirm the line status by means of DCON command.
ND-45687 (E)
ATRK CM0-01 Business, Hotel ROUTE No. TRUNK NAME ROUTE No. TRUNK NAME
901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916
Attendant Console Originating Register Trunk Incoming Register Trunk MF Receiver Sender Trunk DP/PB PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service AMP Not used Three-Way Conference Trunk Not used Not used Originating Register Trunk for ATTCON Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON Not used Night ATTCON MFC Register
917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931
MFC Sender Not used MODEM (Bus.); DLINT (H/M) MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM Not used Not used Data Signaling Trunk-Option Rate Adaptation Conversion Trunk Not used
4. Related Reference Command Display: List up: DLEN LTRK, LLEN, LHEN
-Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Deletion: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Deletion: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Make BusyAssignment: (Busy/Idle) Display:
MBLE, MBTK, MBTC DMBS, DMBT
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For OG/IC Trunk:

Assignment of Trunk Data RT: 1 TK: 1 LENS: 000160 TN: 1 WRT?
RT:
TK: LEN:
Route Number Do not enter the following Route Numbers for OG/IC Trunk. 901: ATT 902: ORT 903: IRT 904: MFR 905: Sender 906: PBR for Automated Attendant Service 907: AMP 909: DCFT 912: ORT for ATT 913: DCFT for ATT 915: Night ATT 916: MFCR 917: MFCS 919: DLINT (for H/M System); MODEM (for Business) 920-926: MODEM 929: DST 930: RCT 933: CRT Trunk Number (1-255) Line Equipment Number (6 digits) XX X XX X
Level (0-7) Group (00-23) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) TN: Tenant Number
ND-45687 (E)
For Intra-office Route

Assignment of Trunk Data RT: 901 TK: 1 LENS: 000200 MASTER CNT: 1 TN: 1
This is displayed only for the master ATTCON.
RSC: 0 SFC: 0 DEL?
RT:
TK: LEN:
Route Number Trunk Route Number Intra-office Route Number: 901: ATT 902: ORT 903: IRT 904: MFR 905: Sender 906: PBR for Automated Attendant Service 907: AMP 909: DCFT 912: ORT for ATT 913: DCFT for ATT 915: Night ATT 916: MFCR 917: MFCS 919: DLINT (for H/M System); MODEM (for Business) 920-926: MODEM 929: DST 930: RCT 933: CRT Trunk Number (1-255) Line Equipment Number (6 digits) XX X XX X
Level (0-1) Group (00-20) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) CNT: TN: RSC: SFC:
Number of Tenants Tenant Number Route Restriction Class (0-15) Service Feature Class (0-15)
ND-45687 (E)
ATRK CM0-01 Business, Hotel Note:
Be careful when entering the LENs of the ATTCON and DCFT.
ATT LENS: XX X XX X
Level (0-1) Group (20) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) DCFT
MG
UNIT
GROUP
LEVEL
X X X XX X X X X X LENS: XX X XX X
21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23
0 3 6 1 4 7 2 5
Level (0-7) Group (21-23) Unit (1, 3) MG (00-31)

Note:
DCFT cannot be assigned to Unit = 0, 2.
ND-45687 (E)
ATTD CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
ATTD
Assignment of Trunk Test Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display trunk test data for the TTLC Command. Trunk Test data: Tone type of response and dial code for sending/LENS data and Access Code for the LTST circuit card.
3. Precautions This data must be assigned before using the TTLC command. 4. Related Reference Command Test Operation: TTLC -Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD
ND-45687 (E)
ATTD CM0-03 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For Trunk Test Parameters:

Assignment of Trunk Test Data TYPE: 1 RESP: TT DC: 3 WRT? RT: 1
TYPE: RT: RESP:
Information Type (Enter 1.) 1: Trunk Test Parameters Route Number Response Pattern TT: Test Tone (Continuous 1 Khz Tone) RB: Ring Back Tone TO: Time Over (No Tone) Note
Note:
Each trunk is automatically tested eight seconds after the previous digits have been sent out. If Test Tone (TT) or Ring Back Tone (RBT) has been acknowledged, an error is indicated. Dial Code (Max. 24 digits)
DC:
For the LTST circuit card:

Assignment of Trunk Test Data TYPE: 2 LENS: 000001 TN: 1 WRT? ACC: 801 STN: 3111
TYPE: LENS: ACC: TN: STN:
Information Type (Enter 2.) 2: LENS of the LTST circuit card LENS of the station connected to LTST Individual Trunk Access Code (Max. 3 digits) Tenant Number Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
AUAD CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AUAD
Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display information relating to the delay announcement for each UCD group. 3. Precautions The Control Station of the UCD Group must be designated as the UCD Group Station, when the Delay Announcement-UCD Data is shared by all Groups. When designating b6 = 0/1: Common to All Groups/On an Individual Group basis in SYS-1, INDEX 70, take note of the following: a. The system data cannot be changed after Delay Announcement-UCD Data has been assigned. b. When the system data has been designated as common to all Groups (b6 = 0), GROUP COMMON is displayed, and the TN and STN parameters are not displayed. 4. Related Reference Command List up: LUAD
ND-45687 (E)
AUAD CM0-03 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data TN: 1 DLYT: 10 RP: 0 CNT: 1 WRT? Y STN: 3155 MSGT: 10 INT: 10 1 RT: 10 TK: 1
Only when RP=1
The sequence of the current data The WRT? prompt displays after entry of the number of trunks designated in CNT.
TN: STN: DLYT: MSGT: RP:
INT: CNT: RT: TK:
Tenant Number of UCD Group Control Station Station Number of UCD Group Control Station Delayed Timer (0-30 sec., 2-sec. interval) Message Timer (0-30 sec., 2-sec. interval) Number of Times Announcement is sent (0/1) 0: Once 1: Replay Announcements Replay Interval (0-30 sec., 2-sec. interval: applicable only when RP = 1) Number of Announcement Trunks (1-8) Route Number of Announcement Trunk Trunk Number of Announcement Trunk
ND-45687 (E)
AUCD CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AUCD
Assignment of UCD Control Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display the Threshold Value of Call Waiting to a UCD group for Call Waiting Display-UCD service. 3. Precautions Before assigning a Threshold Value by this command, be sure to assign the following data: a. b. ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 61 b5 = 1: Call Waiting Display-UCD in Service. ASHU: Assign the UCD Group for which Call Waiting Display-UCD service is to be provided.
LAHP flashing: When the preassigned number of calls or more are waiting in the UCD queue.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LUCD
TN: 1
STN: 2000 QTH ACT: 0 QTH: 0 CWT: 2 MCI: 0
WRT?
TN: STN: QTH ACT: QTH: CWT: MCI:

Note:
Tenant Number UCD Station Number Note UCD Queing Peg Count Value Valid/Invalid (1/0) UCD Queing Peg Count Value (0-255) Threshold Value of Call Waiting (1-255) Message Center Interface Data Transfer Valid/Invalid (0/1)
Enter any of the Station Numbers assigned within the UCD Group for which Call Waiting DisplayUCD service is to be provided.
ND-45687 (E)
AUNE CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AUNE
Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display the skip data for Uniform Numbering of EPN. 3. Precautions If error code is displayed, then the NPC is already assigned in the AFRS, and ASTP commands. (Double assignment)
Note:
When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explanation on the screen.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LUNE
Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN TN:1 RT:11
NPC:1009 SKIP:0
WRT?
TN: RT: NPC: SKIP:
Tenant Number Outside Route Number Number Pattern Code (Max. 12 digits) Skip Data (0-12)
ND-45687 (E)
AUNT CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AUNT
Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the type of unit to be mounted. 3. Precautions There are three (3) types of mounting units (see Entry Procedure below). Perform system initialization without DM clear, after assigning or deleting Unit Data.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure For PIM:

Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data MG:00 WRT? TYPE:1 UNIT:0
LSYD
MG: TYPE: UNIT:
Module Group Number (00-31) PIM Type Indication (Enter 1.) 1: Port Interface Module Unit Number (0-3)
ND-45687 (E)
AUNT CM0-03 Business, Hotel
For PFT
Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data MG:00 PKG:0 WRT? TYPE:2
MG: TYPE: PKG: For LTST
Module Group Number (00-31) PIM Type Indication (Enter 2.) 2: Power Failure Transfer Circuit Card Number (0-3)
Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data MG:00 WRT? TYPE:4
MG: TYPE:
Module Group Number (00-31) PIM Type Indication (Enter 4.) 4: Line Test Circuit Card
ND-45687 (E)
AUOG CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AUOG
Assignment of UCD Overflow Group
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete, and display Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Overflow Group information. 3. Precautions The station numbers assigned to a UCD group in the ASHU (Assignment of Station Hunting-UCD) command must be used. This command is required when all stations in one particular UCD group are busy. The calls designated to that group can overflow (Hunt) to another group. They overflow from Tenant-A, STN-A, to TenantB, STN-B. 4. Related Reference Command List up: LSHG, LSHL
-UCD Hunting GroupAssignment: ASHU Deletion: ASHU Display: ASHU List up: LSHG, LSHL 5. Entry Procedure
Assignment UCD Overflow Group TN-A:1 STN-A:3000 TN-B:1 STN-B:3100
WRT?
TN-A, STN-A: Tenant Number and Station which belongs to a UCD group TN-B, STN-B: Tenant Number and UCD Station Number of Overflow Destination
ND-45687 (E)
AVTC CM0-09 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AVTC
Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display Virtual Tie Line Numbers to be used in Virtual Tie Line Service. 3. Precautions This data is to be assigned at the terminating office. A Virtual Tie Line Number is a station number converted, as a number for Virtual Tie Line service, from one of the subscriber numbers assigned on the ISDN line.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LVTC
Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data TN : 1 STN: 1010
WRT?
TN: STN:
Tenant Number Idle Station Number use Virtual Tie Line Call
ND-45687 (E)
AVTL CM0-09 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AVTL
Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used to assign a schedule for virtual tie line implementation period in Virtual Tie Line Service. 3. Precautions At the time of data setting, assign outgoing /incoming call data synchronously. The maximum input value for Route Number should be the value assigned by ASYD. After entering Route Number, check to see if the corresponding Route Data is assigned or not. If not assigned, ERROR Number (ERR = 0019) is displayed. Of the Route Class Data, the B Channel Route is valid only when LSG = 12, and the D Channel Route is valid only when LSG = 13. Virtual Tie Line service is valid only within the time period designated by the Time Range on the days designated by the Week Range in the period designated by the Date Range.
Example:
DATE: 09/01-09/30 WEEK: MON-FRI TIME: 8:30-17:30 When the above is designated, Virtual Tie Line service is valid from 8:30 through 17:30 from Monday through Friday of every week starting from September 1st through September 30th. The entry range (DATE) of the Date Range is within one year.
Example:
01/01-12/31: 12/01-11/30:
One year from January 1st to December 31st. One year from December 1st to November 30th of the following year.
The Week Range is entered as follows.

Example:
MON-FRI: SAT-SUN: MON-MON:
Five days from Monday to Friday Two days from Saturday to Sunday One day if the same Monday is designated.
Designation in reverse direction MON-SUN: Seven days when going back by one week TUE-SUN: Six days when going back by two weeks SAT-WED: Five days when going back by three weeks
ND-45687 (E)
When the Date Range is one day, only the starting week is displayed. The relationship between the Data Range and the Week Range is as follows.
Example:|
In the case of DATA; 11/08-11/22, WEEK; MON-WED When 11/08 is Wednesday, 11/22 is Wednesday of two week after. In the designated Date Range, 8th is the first Monday. 13th through 15th are Monday through Wednesday of next week, and 20th through 22nd are Monday through Wednesday of the week after next. Thus, these seven days are the subject for processing. The Time Range cannot be designated when the end time is earlier than the start time.
Example:
00:10-20:00 From 0:10 to 19:59 05:20-05:30 From 5:20 to 5:29 10:10-09:10 Cannot be designated 10:50-10:10 Cannot be designated 4. Related Reference Command Deletion: Display: List up: RVTL RVTL LVTC
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data DATE : 03/27 - 03/31 PTN: 0 IC/OG : OG RT: 12 TK: 1 D-LENS : 001014 CH: 6 CALLING: 123456 KEYPAD : 1 NEXT? Y
If Y is entered to parameter NEXT, the display changes as follows.
Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data CALLED : 654321 SUB : 1 SUB NO : 1111 WEEK : TUE - SUN TIME : 08:30-17:20 WRT? RESULT: 03/29
DATE:
PTN: IC/OG: IC: RT: TK: D-LENS:
[a]/[b] - [c]/[d]: Date Range a: Start Month (01-12) b: Start Day (01-31) c: Last Month (01-12) d: Last Day (01-31) Pattern Number Incoming Call OG: Outgoing Call Route Number Trunk Number LENS of Dch XX X XX X
Level Group Unit MG CH: CALLING:
(0-7) (00-23) (0-3) (00-31)
Bch Number Calling Number (max. 24 digits) (Subscriber Number of ISDN Line of the Originating Office)
ND-45687 (E)
KEYPAD:
CALLED:
Keypad Information (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service Called Number (Max. 24 digits) (Subscriber Number of ISDN Line of the Terminating Office) Note
Note:
This Subscriber Line is the Subscriber Number of the ISDN Line corresponding to the Station Number assigned by Virtual Tie Line Call Data (AVTC) at the Terminating Office. Kind of Sub Address (0/1) 0: Not Assign 1: Assign Sub Address (Max. 12 digits) [e]-[f]: Week Range e: Start Week (SUN-MON) f: Last Week (SUN-MON) [g]:[h]-[i]:[j]: Time Range g: Start Time (0-23) h: Start Minute (0-50:10 minutes) i: Last Time (0-23) j: Last Minute (0-50:10 minutes) [k]/[I]: Result Display k: Month (01-12) l: Day (01-31)
SUB:
SUB NO: WEEK:
TIME:
RESULT:
ND-45687 (E)
AVTM CM0-09 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
AVTM
Starting of Virtual Tie Line
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used to activate Virtual Tie Line urgently. 3. Precautions This command is used in following conditions. a. b. When a failure is occurred in a Virtual Tie Line, causing a link release. When using the Virtual Tie Line urgently.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: List up: 5. Entry Procedure AVTL, AVTC LVTL, LVTC
Starting of Virtual Tie Line Starting of Virtual tie line execute WRT?: Y
ND-45687 (E)
BAID SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
BAID
Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only]
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is a debugging aid that should be used only under the supervision of NECAM Engineering. 3. Precautions Call NECAM Engineering before using this command.
ND-45687 (E)
BKUP SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
BKUP
Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)]
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command administers various data using a Hard Disk mounted in the NEAX2400 IMS and FD (Floppy Disk) of MAT. Save, Load and Verify are available. The following data can be processed by this command: Call Forwarding Data Office Data stored in DM (Data Memory) Individual Speed Calling Data Name Display Data
3. Precautions Parameters: The following are equipment options: a. b. MEM HDD ( HDD: in case of verify) HDD MAT (HDD FDD: in case of verify)
4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure Initial Display
Each Kind of Memory Backup Function: 1. Data Save 2. Data Verify 3. Data Load
Execution Status Indication Area
Supplementary Indication Area
Parameter Input Area
ND-45687 (E)
Data Save (MEM
Each Kind of Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Save 2.Data Verify 3.Data Load 1.Data Memory 2.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data 1. MEM HDD 2. HDD MAT 0 Office Name: Date :1992/07/22 22:00 MEM HDD0
Data:
Unit:
MEM 0
Accessing Now!!
Number of Files Remaining: 7 Files
FUNCTION: DATA (1-4):
(Enter 1.) 1: Data Save
1. Data Memory 2. Call Forwarding Data 3. Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data UNIT: (Enter 1.) 1: MEM HDD LP NUMBER: For MMG/UMG Note
Note:
This parameter appears for MMG/UMG when the Processed Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Call Data).
ND-45687 (E)
HDD)
50
100
HDD1 50
100
Data Save (HDD
Each Kind of Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Save 2.Data Verify 3.Data Load 1.Data Memory 2.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4.Name Display Data 1. MEM HDD 2. HDD MAT Office Name: Date :1992/08/19 14:39 HD0(ACT) MAT
Data:
Unit:
Number of Files Remaining: 1
HFC Selection: Accessing Now!!
0.HFC0/1.HFC1
FUNCTION: DATA(1-4):
(Enter 1) 1: Data Save
1. Data Memory 2. Call Forwarding Data 3. Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data UNIT: (Enter 2) 2. HDD MAT Note LP NUMBER: For MMG/UMG HFC SELECTION: (0/1) 0: HFC0 1: HFC1
Note:
This parameter for MMG/UMG appears when the Processed Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data).
ND-45687 (E)
MAT)
50
100
BKUPI CM0-10 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
BKUPI
Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMGx, IMGxh, IMGdxh and UMGx]
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function LOAD, SAVE and VERIFY are executed as follows depending on the type of equipment. MEM HDD (MEM HDD: in case of verify) SAVE and VERIFY are executed to the both system. HDD MAT (HDD MAT: in case of verify) SAVE and VERIFY are executed to the system in operation. HDD MEM LOAD is executed to both systems. 3. Precautions This command administers the following data using Hard Disk mounted in the NEAX2400 ICS and FD (Floppy Disk) of MAT. Save, Load and Verify are available. a. b. c. d. Call Forwarding Data Office Data stored in DM (Data Memory) Individual Speed Calling Data Name Display Data
Parameters: The following are equipment options. a. b. MEM HDD (MEM HDD: in case of verify) HDD MAT (HDD FDD: in case of verify)
Designation of LP Number is necessary in IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. The parameter appears when the following equipment options are selected. a. b. Call Forwarding Data Speed Calling Data
ND-45687 (E)
Designation of CM Number is necessary in UMGx. This parameter appears in the following conditions. a. Data Verity Data Memory Name Display Data b. Data Load Data Memory Name Display Data MEM HDD MEM HDD HDD MEM HDD MEM
Designation of system (0/1) is necessary in UMGx. The parameter appears when the Data Verify is selected. When System Data1, Index 30 is assigned as 02, two Data Memory files are made. Two FDs are required for saving Data Memory from HDD to MAT. When the storage capacity of FD is insufficient, a message appears. Change the disk according to the message.
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Initial Display
Memory Backup Function: 1. Data Save 2. Data Verify 3. Data Load
Execution Status Indication Area
Parameter Input Area Supplementary Indication Area
Data Save
Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Save 2.Data Verify 3.Data Load 1.Data Memory 2.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4.Name Display Data 1. MEM HDD 2. HDD MAT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 LP Number: OFFICE NAME: DATE :1995/07/22 22:00 MEM HDD0 0
Data:
Unit: LP Number:
MEM 0
Accessing Now!!
Number of Files Remaining: 7
ND-45687 (E)
50
100
HDD1 50 100
Function: Data (1-4):
(Enter 1.) 1: Data Save
1. Data Memory 2. Call Forwarding Data 3. Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data Unit: (Enter 1.) 1: MEM HDD 2: HDD MAT LP NUMBER (0 ~ 31): for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx
Note:
This parameter appears for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx when Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data). Only even numbers can be selected. The contents of the parameter LP Number vary depending on the system configuration.
Data Verify a. When the Data Memory or Name Display is selected.
[BKUPI] Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Save 2.Data Verify 3.Data Load 1.Data Memory 2.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4.Name Display Data 1. MEMHDD 2. HDDMAT 0.CM0/1.CM1 Note 1 Note 1 0 OFFICE NAME: DATE :1992/08/19 14:39 HD0(ACT)MAT 50 100
Data:
Unit: CM Number: System:
0.SYSTEM0/1.SYSTEM1
Note:
The parameter CM Number and System appears only for UMGx.
Note 1: This parameter appears when Unit is 1 (MEM HDD).
Note
Number of files remaining: 1
ND-45687 (E)
b.
When the Call Forwarding Data or Speed Calling Data is selected.
[BKUPI] Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Save 2.Data Verify 3.Data Load 1.Data Memory 2.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4.Name Display Data 1. MEMHDD 2. HDDMAT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0.SYSTEM0/1.SYSTEM1 Note 1 0 LP Number: OFFICE NAME: DATE :1992/08/19 14:39 HD0(ACT)MAT 50 100
Data:
Unit: LP Number:
Number of files remaining: 1
System:
Note 2
Accessing now!!
Note 1: Designation of LP Number is necessary for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. The contents of the parameter
LP Number vary depending on the system configuration. This parameter appears when Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data). How to assign LP Number is as shown below: Move the cursor to a desired number using arrow key. 1 Only Even numbers can be selected. Press the space key to select/cancel the number. 2 Designated numbers are indicated with flashing. After all desired numbers are designated, press the return key. 3 LP Number entry is complete, and designated numbers are highlighted.
Note 2: This parameter appears only for UMGx.
ND-45687 (E)
Data Load a. When the Data Memory or Name Display Data is selected.
[BKUPI] Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Save 2.Data Verify 3.Data Load 1.Data Memory 2.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4.Name Display Data HDDMEM 0.CM0/1.CM1 Note 1 0 0 OFFICE NAME: DATE :1992/07/22 22:00 HDDMEM0 50 100
Data:
Unit: LP Number:
HDDMEM1 50 100
Accessing now!! Number of files remaining: 1
Note 1: Designation of CM Number is necessary for UMGx.
ND-45687 (E)
b.
When the Call Forwarding Data or Speed Calling Data is selected.
[BKUPI] Memory Backup Function: 1.Data Save 2.Data Verify 3.Data Load 1.Data Memory 2.Call Forwarding Data 3.Speed Calling Data 4.Name Display Data 1. HDD MEM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 0 0 LP Number: OFFICE NAME: DATE :1992/08/19 14:39 HDD0MEM 50 100
Data:
Unit: Note 1 LP Number:
HDD1MEM 50 100
Accessing now!! Number of files remaining: 1
Note 1: Designation of LP Number is necessary for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. The contents of the parameter
LP Number vary depending on the system configuration. This parameter appears when Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data). How to assign LP Number is as shown below: Move the cursor to a desired number using arrow key. 1 Only Even numbers can be selected. Press the space key to select/cancel the number. 2 Designated numbers are indicated with flashing. After all desired numbers are designated, press the return key. 3 LP Number entry is complete, and designated numbers are highlighted.
ND-45687 (E)
BOSD CM0-04 Business, Hotel
BOSD
Backup of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function Save Function Saves the data residing in the One-Touch Speed Call Memory of DLC/ELC card onto a floppy disk. Verify Function Verifies the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk with the data residing in the OneTouch Speed Call Memory of DLC/ELC card. Note Load Function Loads the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk into the One-Touch Speed Call Memory of DLC/ELC card. Note 3. Precautions Before saving One-Touch Speed Call Memory data, floppy disks must be formatted. Memory data for as many as 704 lines can saved in one floppy disk. The numbers assigned to 20 Speed Calling One-Touch keys of D term are the subject for backup. Also, in the case of a Dterm on which Page Changeover Key (AKYD, FKY = 49) is assigned to one of the function keys, 40 numbers (2 20 Speed Calling One-Touch keys) are the subject for backup. When Speed Calling One-Touch key (AKYD, FKY = 49) is assigned to a function key D term, the number assigned to that function key is not the subject for backup. The circuit cards and the Port Microprocessor (PM) which can be backed up are as shown in Table 2-8. Error messages for Load or Verify do not display on the screen. You must turn on your printer to see the error messages.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
Error Indications [VR]: Data saved in the floppy disk does not match the data saved in DLC/ELC card. [NS]: The circuit card and the Port Microprocessor concerned are not the subject of backup. (Refer to Table 2-8.)
[NW]: An attempt has been made to write data into a circuit card and a Port Microprocessor into which data cannot be loaded. (Refer to Table 2-8.) [RD]: Indicates occurrence of a read error. [WR]: Indicates failure of load. [ND]: Indicates that there is no data of the designated station number on the floppy disk. For Example:
[ TENANT : 1 - COMMON ] ER __ ND TN __ 1 STN ____ 2870 LENS ______ 032060 MEM _____ SPD DAT _____________________________ DLC DATA: FD DATA: NO DATA LEFT IN FD
4. Related Reference Command Display: List up: DOSD LOSD

Table 2-8 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Backed Up CIRCUIT CARD PM NAME / PM NUMBER
PA-16ELCH
SP-3005
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Backup by designating a station

Backup Onetouch Speed Call Memory Data [INPUT PARAMETER] DRV :A FUNC1 : S FUNC2 : S TN: 1-COMMON STN: 51000 TO: 51003 [FILE INFORMATION] OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE: 95/11/01 [FRI] IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-A AND READY (Y/N)?Y
This is displayed when the Tenant Pattern is used in Common. File Information is displayed.
DRV: FUNC1:
FUNC2:
TN:
STN:
OFFICE: DATE:
FD Drive No. (A/B/C/D/E/F) Kind of Function (S/L/V) S: Save L: Load V: Verify Designation of Processing Order (Enter S) S: Station [a] TO [b]: Tenant Range a: Start Tenant Number b: End Tenant Number [c] TO [d]:Station Range c: Start Station Number d: End Station Number Office Name Date of File
ND-45687 (E)
Listed below are the messages that are displayed while this command is being executed: OVERWRITE EXISTING ONE-TOUCH SPEED DATA ON FD (Y/N)?: The diskette in the drive already has data on it. Do you wish to overwrite? NO SPACE LEFT ON FD!!: There is no space on the disk. IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-[ ] AND READY (ENTER Y ONLY)?: Floppy disk must be changed. MAKING ORIGINAL FILE, DRIVE- [ ]!!: The file is being copied to a floppy diskette. Reminder: The floppy diskette must be formatted. FLOPPY DISK IS DIFFERENT!!: There is no One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data File on the floppy disk. COMPLETED: Save, Load, or Verify has been completed VERIFY ERROR: Number of Unmatched Data This data is displayed when FUNC1 = V (Verify) RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?: Indication of next operation. Y: Return to MENU N: Restart of operation
ND-45687 (E)
Backup by designating Line Equipment Number (LENS)

Backup Onetouch Speed Call Memory Data [INPUT PARAMETER] DRV :A FUNC1 : S FUNC2 : L LENS: 000090 TO : 000090 [FILE INFORMATION] OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE: 95/11/01 [FRI] IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-A AND READY (Y/N)?Y
File Information is displayed.
DRV: FUNC1:
FUNC2: LENS:
OFFICE: DATE:
FD Drive No. (A/B/C/D/E/F) Kind of Function (S/L/V) S: Save L: Load V: Verify Designation of Processing Order (Enter L) L: LENS [e] TO [f]: Line Equipment Number Range e: Start LENS f: End LENS Office Name Date of File
ND-45687 (E)
Listed below are the messages that are displayed while this command is being executed: OVERWRITE EXISTING ONE-TOUCH SPEED DATA ON FD (Y/N)?: The diskette in the drive already has data on it. Do you wish to overwrite? NO SPACE LEFT ON FD!!: There is no space on the disk. IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-[ ]AND READY (ENTER Y ONLY)?: Floppy disk must be changed. MAKING ORIGINAL FILE, DRIVE-[ ]!!: The file is being copied to a floppy diskette. Reminder: The floppy diskette must be formatted. FLOPPY DISK IS DIFFERENT!!: There is no One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data File on the floppy disk. COMPLETED: Save, Load, or Verify has been completed. VERIFY ERROR: Number of Unmatched Data This data is displayed when FUNC1 = V (Verify). RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?: Indication of next operation. Y: Return to MENU N: Restart of operation
ND-45687 (E)
CARR CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
CARR
Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to continuously assign the restriction of alternative routing of an Incoming Route (ICRT) to an Outgoing Route (OGRT). 3. Precautions None 4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure
Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction ICRT: 1 To 2 OGRT: 3 To 4 ARI : ATT RES: DIAL RES:
ICRT [a] To [b] : Incoming Route Range a: Start Incoming Route Number b: End Incoming Route Number OGRT [c] To [d]: Outgoing Route Range c: Start Outgoing Route Number d: End Outgoing Route Number RES: Restriction Data (0-2) 0: Alternate routing is restricted 1: Alternate routing is allowed 2: Toll restriction is required Alternative Route Index ATT: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via ATTCON/Station. DIAL: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via Direct Dial Access from a station.
ARI:
ND-45687 (E)
CASD CM0-11 Business

siness
CASD
Continuous Assignment of Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command can assign many station data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. Line cards (LC, DLC, ELC and DTL) should be mounted on the designated LENs. Up to 10 blocks can be assigned at a time. You can assign the station data continuously from the designated LENs. When data entry is rejected while assigning station data, the following messages appear on the display:
Message List INDICATED MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
PACKAGE CHECK DIGITS UNMATCHED NGI DISCREPANCY STN ALREADY ASSIGNED STN DOUBLE ASSIGNMENT LENS ASSIGNMENT AREA NOTHING NUMBERING PLAN UNMATCHED TEC DISCREPANCY
Displays when the first circuit on the circuit card is assigned. Discrepancy in the digits of station number Note 1 Discrepancy in the digits of station number (NGI=Number Group Index)
Note 2
The same station number has been assigned. The same station number has been assigned in the other NGI. No area exists for data entry within the designated mounting location. Discrepancy in the numbering plan of station number Note 1 TEC is not correspond to the designated location.
Note 1: This message is applicable only when the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the
system.
Note 2: This message is applicable only when the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the
system.
ND-45687 (E)
When you delete station data while SMDR is in service, the system prints out the billing information of the stations which are deleted. In this case, all billing information is cleared from the system. Accordingly, prior to the deletion of station data, be sure to print out billing information. Deletion of any busy station results in error number indication. When the following message appears while deleting station data, delete the specific station number prior to deletion of station data. Indicated Message Night Station exists Secretary exist Phantom exist The related STN Night Transfer Station Secretary Station Phantom Station
The following should be noted when you want to delete station data: a. b. c. When you delete the pilot station in the Hunting Group, the Station Hunting-Pilot Data is also deleted. When you delete the master station of Individual Speed Calling, all speed calling information is also cleared. When you delete the station data which has Dterm key data, the information of the key also cleared.
When you assign initial station data to a Line Card PKG Check appears on the display.
4. Entry Procedure When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system a. Display of Station Data Assignment
Continuous Assignment of Station Data SYSTEM TYPE: 2MG Configuration TN TN 1 --- Range of STN --- --- Class --From- To Step TEC SEC 2000-2005 1 2 2 RSC 2
ASSIGNMENT --- Range and Type of LENS --From - To Type 000020-000025 1
1. 2.
Is Input Data correct? (Y/N): Y
ND-45687 (E)
TN: Tenant Number RANGE OF STN STN FROM: Start Station Number STN TO: End Station Number STEP: Size of increment (for example, step 2 increments by 2) TEC: Telephone Class (1-31) SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15) RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) RANGE AND TYPE OF LENS LENS FROM: Start line equipment number LENS TO: End line equipment number TYPE: LENS increment type (assign in this order; see screen prompt for descriptions) IS INPUT DATA CORRECT?: Confirmation of Input Data Procedure: 1. Enter Station Data in each parameter. 2. After entering Station Data on a block basis, press ESC. Input Data is correct? (Y/N) is on screen. 3. When you enter N the cursor returns to the first parameter (= TN). When you enter Y, the following prompt displays: Do you need Data list (Y/N)? 4. When you enter Y the display moves to the next one after printing out the existing one. When you enter N the display moves to the next one without printing.
Note:
Station Data can be assigned on the basis of block (up to 10 blocks). In this case Is Input Data correct? appears on screen without pressing ESC.
ND-45687 (E)
CASD CM0-11 Business Note 1: The Range of LENS data is assigned basically on a Group Number basis (See Example 1 and 2 ).
When the Range of LENS data comprises multiple Group Numbers, input these parameter according to the following conditions (See Example 3 and 4 ): From: Level Number of LENS must be 0. To: Level Number of LENS must be 7. Example (When the shaded ports are assigned as Range of LENS data)
1 Group No. PIM J 03 Level No. 02
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To
: XXX026 1 block
From : XXX022
2 Group No.
PIM J 03 Level No. 02
To
: XXX033 2 blocks
From : XXX030 To : XXX027 From : XXX022
3 Group No.
PIM J 03 Level No. 02 04
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To
: XXX047 1 block
From : XXX020
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To
: XX2057
Unit2 05 Group No. 04 Level No.
PIM J 03 05 Group No. 02 04 Unit0 Level No.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 block
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
From : XX0020
ND-45687 (E)
CASD CM0-11 Business Note 1: Type parameter determines how to arrange station data. See the following example for detailed in-
formation Example: (When the 16 LC circuit cards are accommodated as shown below)
U=2 00 05 16 L PIM J C 10 15 16 16 L C L C U=3 20
16 16 L PIM J C L C
16 L C
U=0
U=1
Type: 1 (Level Group Unit) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2 Slot No. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Level No. Group No. 05 06 56 64 15 16 U=3
72 80 88 96
1MG
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
49 57 16 24 32
65 73 81 89 40 48
9 17 25
33 41 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1
02 03 04 05
ND-45687 (E)
Type: 2 (Level Unit Group) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2 Slot No. LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 LV7 LV6 LV5 LV4 LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 16
05
06 24 56
32 64 80 96
1MG
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 49 40 72 88
25 57 73 89 16 48
33 65 81
41
02 03 04 05 U=0
00 01 02 03 U=1
Type: 3 (Group Level Unit) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 93 16 96
05
06 63 64
1MG
29
51 52 49 50 32
69 65 47 48
72 68
5 1
8 4
35 36 33 34 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1
02 03 04 05
ND-45687 (E)
Type: 4 (Group Unit Level) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 93 16 96
05
06 91 92
1MG
85
19 20 7 8 88
21 9 89 90
24 12
13 1
16 4
17 18 5 6 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1
02 03 04 05
Type: 5 (Unit Level Group) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 16
05
06 31 63
32 64 80 96
1MG
7 39 3 35 29 61 79 95
8 40 68 84 4 36 66 82 30 62
5 1
37 67 83 33 65 81
6 2
38 34
02 03 04 05 U=0
00 01 02 03 U=1
ND-45687 (E)
Type: 6 (Unit Group Level) Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 16
05
06 87 91
89 92 94 96
1MG
15 19 3 7 85 89 93 95
16 20 22 24 4 8 10 12 86 90
13 17 21 23 1 5 9 11 02 03 04 05 U=0
14 18 2 6 00 01 02 03 U=1
ND-45687 (E)
b.
Display of Circuit Card Localization (Two units display)

ASSIGNMENT 2MG Configuration
Continuous Assignment of Station Data SYSTEM TYPE: MG Number: 0 UNIT Number: 0 Group Number: 2 Circuit Card Type LC GroupDLC ELC SMI DTL Delete END GroupSlot0
MG-00
PIMA3 PIMA2 PIMA1 PIMA0 1 L C 7 15
23
15
23
0 4
6 8
12
20 12
0 15
6 19
12
20 23
- Card Selection <-,-> Group Selection
<RETURN> - Execute
ESC-Input Data End
MG NUMBER: UNIT NUMBER: GROUP NUMBER: PACKAGE TYPE:
MG No. Unit No. Group No. Circuit Card Type
ND-45687 (E)
Procedure: 1. Enter MG Number; press ENTER. 2. Enter UNIT Number; press ENTER. 3. Move the cursor (by or ) to the appropriate package type. 4. Move the cursor (by or ) to assign the selected type to the vacant Group No.; press ENTER. The Circuit Card information (i.e., LC) is displayed. When you want to eliminate the Circuit Card which you assigned by mistake, choose Delete, move the cursor to select the Group No., and press ENTER.
5. When you want to terminate Data entry in the specific UNIT, move the cursor to END and press ENTER. Respond Y to Is Input Data Correct? The cursor returns to the UNIT Number. 6. Repeat the same procedure to assign another Circuit Card (even if it is located in the same Unit). 7. When finished, press ESC. The following prompt displays: Do you need PACKAGE MOUNT DATA List? (Y/N). When you enter Y the current display shifts to the display (c) with a list. When you enter N the current display shifts to the display (c) without a list. Press the BACKSPACE key to move to the previous screen.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
c.
Display of Continuous Assignment
Continuous Assignment of Station Data
ASSIGNMENT
* Depress Y key when all data are right. Depress N key when data change is necessary. Is input correct? (Y/N) Assign vacant port? (Y/N) Stop on error? (Y/N) Error list required? (Y/N) Start now? (Y/N) :Y :Y :N :Y :Y
Procedure: 1. Is input data correct? (Y/N)- Confirmation of the input data N: Return to the display (b) Y: Next parameter appears. 2. Assign vacant port? Y: Enter when the mounted Circuit Card has any vacant ports. N: Enter when you want to assign data only to newly mounted Circuit Card. 3. Stop on error? - Appointment of temporary suspension in case of error Y: When the system detects an error Interruption!! Cancel it? displays and suspends processing. Y interrupts Continuous Assignment of Station Data, returning to the display (a). N resumes it. N: Even if an error is detected the system continues its processing. 4. Error list required? (Y/N) Y: With the completion of Continuous Assignment, an error list can be obtained. When the number of errors exceeds more than 250 Continuous Assignments are temporarily suspended. The system restarts its processing with the completion of an output of an error list. N: Error data appears only on screen.
Note:
The printer must be on for either response (Y or N).
5. Start Now? (Y/N) Y: Continuous Assignments start. The data from screen (d) displays and prints out. N: Returns to the previous indication Input data is correct? (Y/N)
ND-45687 (E)
d.
Display of Continuous Assignment Execution
Continuous Assignment of Station Data SYSTEM TYPE: 2MG Configuration Interrupted!! Cancel? (Y/N):Y TN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 STN 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 TEC 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 RSC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 SFC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 LENS reference 020010 020020 020030 ___
ASSIGNMENT
STN is already assigned 020050 NGI is not correct TEC is not correct 020060 020070
Complete, return to menu? (Y/N): Y 2MG Configuration Input Data is correct? (Y/N): Y
When you press END while Continuous Assignment is being performed, Interrupted!! Cancel it? (Y/ N) appears on screen with a warning tone resulting in a temporary half of processing. Y interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a). N restarts Continuous Assignment. When assignment completes, End of order. Return to Menu? (Y/N) is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system
a. Display of Station Data Assignment

Continuous Assignment of Station Data Note 1. TN : XXX STN : from XXXXX to XXXXX Step XX TEC : XX RSC : XX SFC : XX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX Group Number range : from XX to XX Level Number range : from XX to XX TYPE : X
Example of assignment data plan STN LENS STN LENS STN XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX LENS STN LENS STN LENS XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX
Note:
Block Number (1-10)
TN: Tenant Number STN From: Start Station Number To: End Station Number Step: Digit Increment (1-10) TEC: Telephone Class RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15) LENS From: Start Line Equipment Number To: End Line Equipment Number Group Number range (0-31) 0-23 Except TEC 18 0-31. Level Number range (0-7) TYPE: LENS Assignment (1-6) Procedure: 1. Enter Station Data in each parameter. 2. After entering Station Data on a block basis, Example of assignment data plan (STN, LENS) and Is Data Correct? (Y/N) appears on the screen. 3. When you enter N, the cursor returns to the parameter TN. When you enter Y, the display moves to the next one (= b).
ND-45687 (E)
b. Display of Continuous Assignment

[CASD] List of Station and LENS Data ? (Y/N) :Y Do you want to stop if an error is found ? (Y/N) :Y Do you want to an error list ? (Y/N) :Y Do you want to assign station data now ? (Y/N) :Y
Procedure: 1. List of Station and LENS Data?: (Y/N) Y: Station and LENS data list can be obtained. N: Station and LENS data appears only on screen. 2. Do you want to stop if an error is found?: (Y/N) Y: When the system detects an error, Interruption!! Continue the assignment? is on screen and suspends processing. Y interrupts Continuous Assignment of Station Data, returning to the display (a). N resumes it. N: Even if an error is detected, the system continues its processing. 3. Do you want an error list?: (Y/N) Y: With the completion of Continuous Assignment, an error list can be obtained. N: Error data appears only on screen. 4. Do you want to assign station data now?: (Y/N) Y: Continuous Assignments start. The screen changes to the display (c). N: Returns to the display (a).
ND-45687 (E)
c. Display of Continuous Assignment Execution

Continuous Assignment of Station Data Interruption !! Continue the assignment ? (Y/N) :N IN STN TEC RSC SFC XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX LENS REFERENCE XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
Executing
When you press / key or the system detects an error (in the case you have entered Y for Do you want to stop if an error is found?) while Continuous Assignment is being performed, Interruption!! Continue the assignment? (Y/N): N apperas on the screen resulting in a temporary halt of processing. Y restarts Continuous Assignment. N interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a). When assignment is complete, Complete!! Return to the menu? (Y/N) is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
Example 1
Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1. TN : 1 STN : from 100 to 200 Step 1 TEC : 1 RSC : 1 SFC : 1 LENS : from 000001 to 000237 Group Number range : from 0 to 15 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 Example of assignment data plan STN LENS 100 000001 101 000002 102 000003 103 000004 STN LENS 104 000005 105 000006 106 000007 107 000010 STN LENS 108 000011 109 000012 110 000013 111 000014 STN LENS 112 000015 113 000016 114 000017 115 000020 STN LENS 116 000021 117 000022 118 000023 119 000024
When you assign data as shown above, stations are assigned in the following LENS indicated with
L E V E L
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
Example 2
L E V E L
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
Example 3
L E V E L
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
Example 4
L E V E L
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
Example 5
L E V E L
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
CATK CM0-11 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
CATK
Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command can assign or delete many trunk data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers. 3. Precautions Trunk cards should be mounted on the designated LENs. Up to 10 blocks can be executed at a time. You can assign or delete the trunk data continuously from the designated LENs. When data entry is rejected while assigning/deleting trunk data, the following messages appear on the display.
Message List
When Trunk Data cannot be assigned
INDICATED MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
PACKAGE CHECK TK ALREADY ASSIGNED TK UNMATCHED
Displays when first circuit on the Trunk Card is assigned. The same trunk number has been assigned. Descrepancy in the trunk number
TRUNK CLASS HAS NOT BEEN Trunk Class has not been assigned. ASSIGNED LENS ALREADY ASSIGNED The same LENS number has been assigned.
When Trunk Data cannot be deleted
INDICATED MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
PACKAGE CHECK TK BUSY TK NOT ASSIGNMENT 4. Related Reference Command Display: List UP: Assignment:
Displays when first circuit on the Trunk Card is assigned. Make busy of trunks Trunk has not been assigned.
DLEN, ARTD, ARSC, ASFC, DMBL, DMBT LTRK, LLEN, LRTD, LRTC ARTD, ARSC, ASFC, MBLE, MBTK
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Parameter RT: TK Route number from: Range of TK-Start Trunk number to: Range of TK-End Trunk number Step: Number increment (1-10) CNT: Number of Tenant (1-10) Note 1 TN: Tenant number Note 2 RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) Note 1 SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15) Note 1 LENS from: Range of LENS-Start Line Equipment Number Note 3 (see the next page) to: Range of LENS-End Line Equipment Number Group Number range (0-23) Level Number range (0-7) Type: Line Equipment Number Assignment (1-6) Note 4 (see page 346~349.)
Note 1: When RT number is 901(ATT) or 915 (ATT), this parameter need to be designated. Note 2: When RT number is 0-899 (Inter-office Trunk) or 901(ATT) or 905(ATT), this parameter need to be des-
ignated.
ND-45687 (E)
CATK CM0-11 Business, Hotel Note 3: The Range of LENS data basically is assigned on a Group Number basis (See Example 1 and 2 ).
When the Range of LENS data comprises multiple Group Numbers, input these parameters according to the following conditions (See Example 3 and 4 ): From: Level Number of LENS must be 0. To: Level Number of LENS must be 7. Example (When the shaded ports are assigned as Range of LENS data)
1 Group No. PIM J 03 Level No. 02
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To
: XXX026 1 block
From : XXX022
2 Group No.
PIM J 03 Level No. 02
To
: XXX033 2 blocks
From : XXX030 To : XXX027 From : XXX022
3 Group No.
PIM J 03 Level No. 02 04
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To
: XXX047 1 block
From : XXX020
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To
: XX2057
Unit2 05 Group No. 04 Level No.
PIM J 03 05 Group No. 02 04 Unit0 Level No.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 block
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
From : XX0020
ND-45687 (E)
CATK CM0-11 Business, Hotel Note 4: Type parameter determines how to arrange trunk data. See the following example for detailed infor-
mation Example:
(When the 16 COT circuit cards are accommodated as shown below)

U=2 00 05 16 C PIM J O T 10 15 16 16 C O T C O T U=3 20
16 16 C PIM J O T C O T
16 C O T
U=0
U=1
Type: 1 (Level Group Unit) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 16
05
06 56 64
72 80 88 96
1MG
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
49 57 16 24 32
65 73 81 89 40 48
9 17 25
33 41 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1
02 03 04 05
ND-45687 (E)
Type: 2 (Level Unit Group) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 16
05
06 24 56
32 64 80 96
1MG
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 49 40 72 88
25 57 73 89 16 48
33 65 81
41
02 03 04 05 U=0
00 01 02 03 U=1
Type: 3 (Group Level Unit) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 93 16 96
05
06 63 64
1MG
29
51 52 49 50 32
69 65 47 48
72 68
5 1
8 4
35 36 33 34 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1
02 03 04 05
ND-45687 (E)
Type: 4 (Group Unit Level) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 93 16 96
05
06 91 92
1MG
85
19 20 7 8 88
21 9 89 90
24 12
13 1
16 4
17 18 5 6 00 01 02 03 U=0 U=1
02 03 04 05
Type: 5 (Unit Level Group) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 16
05
06 31 63
32 64 80 96
1MG
7 39 3 35 29 61 79 95
8 40 68 84 4 36 66 82 30 62
5 1
37 67 83 33 65 81
6 2
38 34
02 03 04 05 U=0
00 01 02 03 U=1
ND-45687 (E)
Type: 6 (Unit Group Level) Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
Level No. Group No.
U=3 15 16
05
06 87 91
89 92 94 96
1MG
15 19 3 7 85 89 93 95
16 20 22 24 4 8 10 12 86 90
13 17 21 23 1 5 9 11 02 03 04 05 U=0
14 18 2 6 00 01 02 03 U=1
ND-45687 (E)
a. Display of Trunk Data Assignment Procedure : 1. Enter Trunk Data in each parameter. 2. After entering Trunk Data on a block basis, Example of assignment data plan (TK, LENS) and Is Data Correct ? (Y/N) appears on the screen. 3. When you enter N, the cursor returns to the parameter TN. When you enter Y, the display moves to the next one (b). The followings shows the display vary kinds of TK data. When assigning ATT
01020304050607079 0 [CATK] 1 2 Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 3 4 1. RT : 901 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XX CNT : XX XX TN : XXX 5 Note RSC : XX SFC : XX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX 6 Group Number range : from XX to XX 7 Level Number range : from X to X TYPE : X 8 9 <Example of assignment data plan> 10 11 TK LENS TK LENS TK LENS TK LENS TK 12 XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX 13 XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX 14 XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX 15 XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
ASSIGNMENT
LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
TK XXX XXX XXX XXX
LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
Note:
Block Number (1-10)
ND-45687 (E)
When assigning the route for Inter-office Trunk

01020304050607079
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
[CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. Note RT : 1 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XX TN : XXX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX Group Number range : from XX to XX Level Number range : from X to X TYPE : X ASSIGNMENT
<Example of assignment data plan>

TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
Note:
Block Number (1-10)
ND-45687 (E)
When assigning the route for Intra-office Trunk
[CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. RT : 902 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XX Note LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX Group Number range :from XX to XX Level Number range : from X to X TYPE : X ASSIGNMENT

TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
Is Data Correct ? (Y/N)
Note:
Block Number (1-10)
ND-45687 (E)
b. Display of Continuous Assignment
[CATK] Do you want to stop if an error is found ? (Y/N) : Y Do you want to assign trunk data now ? (Y/N) : Y
Procedure : Select Y or N in the following parameters. 1. Do you want to stop if an error is found ? :(Y/N) Y: When the system detects an error, Interruption !! Continue the assignment ? is on screen and suspends processing. N interrupts Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data, returning to the display (a). Y resumes it. N: Even if an error is detected, the system continues its processing. 2. Do you want to assign trunk data now ? :(Y/N) Y: Continuous Assignments start. The screen changes to the display (c). N: Returns to the display (a)
ND-45687 (E)
(c)
[CATK]
Display of Continuous Assignment Execution
Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data Interruption !! Cotinue the assinment ? (Y/N) :N 1.

RT XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX TK XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX TN XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX RSC XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX SFC XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX LENS XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX REMARKS
ASSIGNMENT
Complete !! Return to the menu ? (Y/N) :Y
When you press / key or the system detects an error (in the case you have entered Y for Do you want to stop if an error is found ? ) while Continuous Assignment is being performed, Interruption !! Continue the assignment ? (Y/N) : N appears on the screen resulting in a temporary halt of processing. Y restarts Continuous Assignment. N interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a).
When assignment is complete, Complete !! Return to the menu ? (Y/N) is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
Example 1
[CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1 LENS : from 000001 to 000237 Group Number range : from 0 to 15 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 ASSIGNMENT

TK 100 101 102 103 LENS 000001 000002 000003 000004 TK 104 105 106 107 LENS 000005 000006 000007 000010 TK 108 109 110 111 LENS 000011 000012 000013 000014 TK 112 113 114 115 LENS 000015 000016 000017 000020 TK 116 117 118 120 LENS 000021 000022 000023 000024 TK 120 121 122 123 LENS 000025 000026 000027 000030
When you assign data as shown above, trunks are assigned in the following LENS indicated with K.
7 K 6 K 5 K L E V E L 4 K 3 K 2 K 1 K 0 0
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
Example 2
[CATK] Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1.RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1 LENS : from 001000 to 003237 Group Number range : from 0 to 23 Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1 ASSIGNMENT

7 K 6 K 5 K L E V E L 4 K 3 K 2 K 1 K 0 K 0
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
Example 3

7 6 5 K L E V E L 4 K 3 K 2 K 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
Example 4

7 6 5 L E V E L 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
Example 5

7 6 5 L E V E L 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
GROUP
ND-45687 (E)
CCSE CM0-08 CCIS, Business, Hotel

CIS, siness, tel
CCSE
Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-08 2. Function This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the CCH circuit card and to display the status of CCH. 3. Precautions Make-busy by this command is executed at system initialization or of a fault occurrence. Therefore, this command is not to be used while the system is in operation unless there is a reason otherwise. CCH cannot be placed into make-busy state or cannot be released from make-busy state, the corresponding Error Number is displayed. If the intended make-busy setting/cancel is not executed within about 2 min. after the processing has been activated (statement Under Processing is already on display), Return to Menu (Y/N)? comes on the screen. Therefore, to retry the intended processing, return the screen display back to the menu and enter the command once again. Even if the processing has failed to complete within 2 minutes or a key has been pressed, this command is not aborted. To abort the command, press / key.
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure a. Type 2
Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment TYPE OF CHANGE:2 PROCESSOR: MB:1 CHANGE? Y CCH00005
TYPE OF CHANGE: Specify the type of processing 2 - Make Busy of Processor 3 - Status Display of Processor PROCESSOR: CCH name and accommodation location CCH XX X XX
Group (00-20) Unit (0-3) MG (00-31) MB: Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy 2: Not Available
CHANGE (Y/N)?
Change instruction/make busy instruction Y: Execute X: Not execute
Note:
During processing, UNDER PROCESSING displays.
ND-45687 (E)
b. Type 3
Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment TYPE OF CHANGE:3 PROCESSOR: MG 00 PROCESSORMBLINKPROCESSOR MBLINK LP00-0 0 LP00-1 0 CCH0000022 CCH0000122 CCH0000222 CCH0000322 CCH0000400 CCH0000522
TYPE OF CHANGE: Specify the type of processing 2 - Make Busy of Processor 3 - Status Display of Processor PROCESSOR: Processor Selection LINK: Link Status 0: Link Open 1: Link Close 2: Not Available MB: Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy 2: Not Available
ND-45687 (E)
CDSD CM0-11 Business

siness
CDSD
Continuous Deletion of Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command deletes all station data within the specific numeric range by designating both start station number and end station number. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. When deletion of station data is rejected, the following messages display on the screen:
MESSAGE MEANING
Secretary exists Intercom exists Night STN exists Phantom exists Digits mismatch NGI is not correct LENS not assigned STN BUSY Package Check STN not found 4. Related Reference Command List up: LRTC
Deletion is not allowed because the station is a secretary Deletion is not allowed because the station is a member of Intercom Group Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station. Deletion is not allowed because the station has a phantom number. The number of digits is not correct Number Group discrepancy (NGI=Number Group Index) LENS have not been assigned yet. Deletion is not allowed because of Line Busy Circuit Card is OFF LINE Information appointed does not exist
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure a. Display of Continuous Deletion [Entry]

Continuous Deletion of Station Data Deletion
System Type: Consists of 2MG TN: 1 STN: 2000 TO: 2009 Is Input data correct? (Y/N): Y * Depress Y key when all data are right. Depress N key when change is necessary. Stop on error? (Y/N): N Error List required? (Y/N) Start Now? (Y/N): Y
:Y
TN: STN FROM: STN TO: Procedure:
Tenant Number Start station number End station number
1. Enter tenant number. 2. Enter initial station number to be deleted. 3. Enter terminal station number to be deleted. 4. Is input data correct? (Y/N) - Confirmation of Input Data Y: Shifts to next parameter. N: Return to procedure (3) 5. Stop on error? (Y/N) Y: Each detection of error suspends the processing. N: Any detection of error does not stop the processing. 6. Error list required? (Y/N) Y: With the completion of Continuous Deletion, an error list is printed. N: No list will appear. 7. Start Now? (Y/N) Y: Starts the processing N: Returns to the procedure (4). I: Abort
Note:
To return the cursor to the previous parameter while you are entering data, press the key.
ND-45687 (E)
b. Display of Continuous Deletion [While Printing]
Continuous Deletion of Station Data System Type: TN: 1 STN: 2000
Deletion 2MG Configuration TO: 2070 Break Now!! Cancel? (Y/N):Y
TN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
STN 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009
TEC 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
RSC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
SFC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
LENS Remarks 020010 020020 STN is busy 020030 STN not found 020050 020060 020070 020100 020110 020120
End of Order. Return to menu? (Y/N): Y 2MG Configuration Input Data is correct? (Y/N): Y
STN From: STN To:
Start Station Number End Station Number
Break Now!! Cancel? (Y/N) displays when you cannot delete a station. Continuous Deletion is suspended temporarily. Y: Interrupts continuous Deletion; returns to display (a) N: Restarts Continuous Deletion End of order, return to menu? (Y/N) appears on the screen with the completion of Continuous Deletion. Y: Returns to menu. N: Returns to the display (a) The information of the station which is under processing always appears on the screen. When the deletion is rejected, the reasons display under Remarks.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
CMOD SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
CMOD
Change of System Mode
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is used to execute ACT/STBY change of the processor (CPU)/TSW.ACT system number display. 3. Precautions Note that the contents of this command vary slightly according to the system type. This command can be executed only with a dual system configuration. ACT/STBY change can be executed only in the case of dual system configuration. When CPU/TSW system change is executed, the current ACT-side CPU/TSW number is displayed. When CPU change is executed, the ACT-side data memory and the STBY-side data memory are verified with each other. If an error exists in the data memory, CPU change is not executed. ACT/STBY change by this command is executed only when the system is initialized or when an error has occurred. Otherwise, a bit error may occur at a terminal engaging in data communications when ACT/STBY change is executed. When the processor and the TSW designated by ACT system change is of single system configuration, or when the processor designated by ACT system change happens to be in operation, parameter entry into the MAT is restricted. If an attempted ACT/STBY change has failed, the reason for the failure is indicated by an error number. The contents of error numbers can be viewed if F1 (Help) is pressed.
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure The entry procedure varies depending on the system you are using. Refer to the table below to locate the appropriate entry procedures for your system.
System See
IMG (ICS) IMGx IMGxh, IMGdxh MMG (ICS) UMG (ICS) UMGx a. For IMG (ICS):
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
Change of System Mode Function: Change CPU System ACT. Change TDSW System ACT. Set / Cancel HFC. Change Copy / Separate Mode. Change HFC Connection. Change CPU System ACT.
Display (Example only)
TDSW0
TDSW1
CPU 0 ACT
CPU 1 MB
Note:
Different colors represent different states, as follows: Red = Make Busy Green = Active Blue (***) = Changing Brown = Standby
ND-45687 (E)
b. For IMGx
Change of System Mode Equipment : CPU : TDSW Display State
TDSW 0 ACT
Supplementary Explanation Display Area
TDSW 1 ST-BY
CPU 0 ACT
CPU 1 ST-BY
In Execution Display Area
Note:
Parameters are to be entered using the cursor.
[Input Parameters and Supplementary Explanations] Equipment Selection: CPU

INPUT PARAMETER SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION
Execution? (YES/NO) Equipment Selection: TDSW

INPUT PARAMETER
* Execute change ACT system for CPU
SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION
Execution? (YES/NO)
* Execute change ACT system for TDSW
ND-45687 (E)
c. For IMGxh and IMGdxh: To change the operating mode
Change of System Mode Function: Change of Operating Mode. Make Busy of TDSW. Device (CPU/TDSW) PLO STBY ACT CLK STBY ACT TDSW STBY ACT CPU STBY ACT 1 0
Display ACT System: 0 CHANGE? (YES/NO)
To make busy the TDSW (one card at a time)
Change of System Mode Function: Change of Operating Mode. Make Busy of TDSW. Switch Switch No: 1 (SSW/TSW) Note 1 PLO STBY ACT CLK STBY ACT TDSW STBY ACT CPU STBY ****
1 0
System (0/1) Status: STBY SET MB? (YES/NO) Note 2
SSW: TSW:
Note:
Secondary switch TDSW
Different colors represent different states, as follows: Red =Make Busy Green = Active Blue (***) = Changing Brown = Standby
Note 1: This parameter appears when TSW is selected. Note 2: When status is MB, Cancel MB? (YES/NO) appears
ND-45687 (E)
d. For MMG (ICS) and UMG (ICS): To change operating mode
Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode. Make Busy of Processor. Displaying other MG. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Change HFC Connection. Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP)
Display Area
To make busy the processor
Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode. Make Busy of Processor. Displaying other MG. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Change HFC Connection. Device (Processor/TDSW/CM/HC)
Display Area
Note:
If the processor is already in a make-busy state, you are prompted, CANCEL MB? (YES/NO).
ND-45687 (E)
To display other MGs
Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode. Make Busy of Processor. Displaying other MG. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Change HFC Connection. Displaying other MG: LP00-07 & AP0 & IP0 LP08-15 & AP1 & IP1 LP16-23 & AP0 & IP2 LP24-31 & AP1 & IP2
Display Area
Note: Note:
The Display on the right will change for each module group selected. You can display only eight (8) module groups at a time. To change Copy/Separate mode
Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode. Make Busy of Processor. Displaying other MG. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Change HFC Connection. Processor (SP/ LP /AP/IP) Processor No: 0 CHANGE SEPARATE MODE? (YES/NO)
Display Area
ND-45687 (E)
To change the HFC (hard drive controller) connection
Change of System Mode Function: Change Operating Mode. Make Busy of Processor. Displaying other MG. Change COPY/SEPA Mode. Change HFC Connection. Select HFD (0/1) Connect HFC Display: 0 CHANGE? (YES/NO)
Display Area
ND-45687 (E)
e. For UMGx:
Change of System Mode Function: Change operating Mode. Make Busy of Processor. Displaying other MG.
P BUS 0 ACT SP STBY ACT 1 ACT IP0
MODULE GROUP SWITCH NUMBER:0 Note 1

AP0 HP PLO CLK TDSW CM
STBY STBY STBY STBY STBY STBY STBY 1 ACT MP ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT 0
Supplementary Explanation Display Area
0 ACT
1 ACT
2 ACT
3 ACT LP
0 STBY ACT
7 1 0
To change Operating Mode

Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP) Note 1 Processor No: Note 2 Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) CHANGE? (YES/NO)
Selected Processor, TDSW, CM Change ACT System
Note 1: AP is not used. Note 2: This parameter appears when the Processor is LP or AP or IP.
ND-45687 (E)
To Make Busy/Make Busy Cancel of Processor

Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP) Note 1 Processor No: Note 2 Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Switch (SSW/TSW) Switch No.: Note 3 System (0/1) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) System (0/1) SET MB? (YES/NO) CANCEL MB? (YES/NO)
Selected Processor, TDSW, CM Make Busy Set/Cancel.
TDSW Switch No. Corresponds to Module Group No.
Note 1: AP is not used. Note 2: This parameter appears when the processor is LP or AP or IP. Note 3: This parameter appears when the switch is TSW.
To displaying other Module Group (MG)

Displaying other MG. LP00-07 & AP0 & IP0 LP08-15 & AP1 & IP1 LP16-23 & AP0 & IP2 LP24-31 & AP1 & IP2
Display other Module Group Status.
ND-45687 (E)
CMWL CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
CMWL
Control Message Waiting Lamp
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to indicate ON/OFF status and to control the Message Waiting Lamp ON/OFF (MW Lamp) at the station telephone set. If the station telephone set is a Dterm, this command can also be used to control Message Waiting Display on the Dterm. 3. Precautions This command should not be used to control the ON/OFF of the MW lamp while the system is in service. If the need arises to use this command for this purpose while the system is in service, the current status of system operation must be confirmed. This command can control ON/OFF of the MW lamp independent of the call processing status within the PBX itself. If this command has been used to control ON/OFF of the MW lamp without performing the required procedures thereafter, synchronization may be lost. If the station telephone set to be designated is a Dterm, the input data for Dterm designation is Station/LEN at the Voice Port, not Station/LEN at the Data Port. If the designated station data has been entered by LEN, lamp control cannot be executed if the LEN entered is not that of a station.
ND-45687 (E)
CMWL CM0-03 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Control Message Waiting Lamps TYPE: 1 TN: 1 STN: 3500 MWLAMP: 1 MCI: 0 ATT: 0 STA: 1 VMM: 0 CONTROL FOR MW LAMP: READY (Y/N)?
MW Lamp Control side status is displayed. When CONTROL FOR MW LAMP = 9 has been entered, this prompt is not displayed.
TYPE:
Type of Input 1: Station Designation 2: LENS Designation TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number Information (6 digits) (Enter the data only when TYPE = 2 has been entered.) MWLAMP: Message Waiting Lamp Status 0: Lamp Off 1: Lamp On Names of MW Lamp Controlling Side MCI: Message Center MW Status ATT: Attendant Console MW Status STA: Station VMM: Voice Mail Module MW Lamp Control Side Status Indication 0: Off 1: On CONTROL FOR MW LAMP: MW Lamp Processing Directive Code 0: Lamp Off 1: Lamp On 8: Details of Lamp Control Side 9: Only Display
ND-45687 (E)
CPRS CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
CPRS
Controlled Alternate PRSCs
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is necessary for the Controlled Alternate PRSCs function. It either selects the class used between two priority restriction classes (Normal or Urgent), or indicates the class used. 3. Precautions This command is allowed only when Bit 1 of System Data 1, Index 59 is 1 (Controlled Alternate PRSCs in service). When the Priority Restriction Class is specified as normal in this command, the Day/Night control data set in the AEFR command is used. If urgent is specified, the urgent control data assigned in the AEFR command is used. Priority Restriction Class control is also possible by operation of the ATTCON key.
Controlled Alternate PRSCs NORMAL/URGENT: N READY?
FACILITY RESTRICTION LEVEL N: Normal U: Urgent
ND-45687 (E)
CSCL CM0-11 Business

siness
CSCL
Continuous Change of Station Class
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command can change the station class information (TEC, RSC, SFC) by designating the range of the station number (TN / Tenant Number, STN < From > /first station number, STN < To > /last station number). 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. Change of TEC is refused when Circuit Cards are a different type. When change of the station data is rejected, the following message appears on the screen.
4. Related Reference Command ASCL

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
STN not found LEN not assigned Numbering Plan Mismatch NGI discrepancy Digit discrepancy TEC discrepancy RSC discrepancy SFC discrepancy Package Check
Station data is not assigned yet. LEN is not assigned yet. Numbering Plan Mismatch NGI discrepancy (numbering group) Digits discrepancy Telephone Class discrepancy Restriction Class discrepancy Service Feature discrepancy Circuit Card OFF LINE
ND-45687 (E)
CSCL CM0-11 Business
5. Entry Procedure
Continuous Change of Station Class
Is input data correct? (Y/N) : Y Stop on error? (Y/N): Error list required? (Y/N): Y Start now?(Y/N) : Y
TN: STN FROM: STNTO: OLD TEC: OLD RSC: OLD SFC: NEW TEC: NEW RSC: NEW SFC:
Note:
Tenant Number Start Station Number End Station Number Old Stations Telephone Class Old Stations Route Restriction Class Old Stations Service Feature Restriction Class New Stations Telephone Class New Stations Route Restriction Class New Stations Service Feature Restriction Class
If you want to change all existing classes, enter ** for each parameter (present TEC, old RSC, old SFC). You can return the cursor to the previous parameter during data entry by pressing the key or the BACKSPACE key.
6. Related Commands ASCL
TN: 1 Old TEC: 3 Old RSC: 2 Old SFC: 3
STN: 1000 New TEC: 24 New RSC: 1 New SFC: 1 N
TO: 1005
ND-45687 (E)
CSTN CM0-11 Business

siness
CSTN
Continuous Change of Station Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command can change the consecutive station numbers by designating the initial station number. 3. Precautions This command is used for Business System only. In the process of Continuous Change of Station Number, the following message appears on the screen when change of station number is rejected.
4. Related Reference Command ASTN

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Present STN not found New STN **** already assigned LENS not assigned yet Numbering Plan Mismatch NGI Discrepancy Present STN busy Digits Discrepancy PKG Check
The station has not assigned yet. New station number is already used. LENS is not assigned yet. Numbering Plan is mismatching Numbering Group Discrepancy Deletion is not allowed because of Line Busy Digits Discrepancy Circuit Card Off Line
ND-45687 (E)
CSTN CM0-11 Business
5. Entry Procedure
Continuous Change of Station Number TN: 1 Old STN: 1000 TO: 1005 New STN:2000 TO: 2005 Is input data correct? (Y/N) : Y Stop on error? (Y/N) : Y Error list required? (Y/N) : Y Start now? (Y/N): Y
TN: OLD STN FROM: OLD STN TO: NEW STN FROM: NEW STN TO:
Tenant Number Old Start Station Number Old End Station Number New Start Station Number New End Station Number
Note 1: You can return the cursor to the previous parameter during data entry by pressing the key. Note 2: Numbers which can be renewed are 0-9. * and # cannot be renewed.
ND-45687 (E)
CTDK CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
CTDK
Connection of Test-Desk and LTST
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to connect and disconnect the LTST with the Test-desk. 3. Precautions The printer must be on. 4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure To Connect:
Connection of Test-Desk and LTST FUNC:CN LENS:000001 READY (Y/N)?
FUNC: LENS: To Disconnect:
Function Code (Enter CN.) CN: Connection LENs of LTST
Connection of Test-desk and LTST FUNC:CO LENS:000001 READY (Y/N)?
Function Code (Enter CO.) CO: Cut-off LENS: LENS of LTST The displayed FUNCTION (CN/CO) indicates the current status. By changing the function, connection status will be changed. FUNC:
ND-45687 (E)
DCON CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DCON
Display of Connection Status
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command displays the connection status of the station and trunks. If the specified station or trunk is busy, the connected party is displayed. 3. Precautions One of the following messages is displayed, depending on the connection status. IDLE: Idle state BUSY: Busy state MAKE BUSY: Made-busy state LOCKOUT: Lockout state STN (Station No.) or LENS of Dterm must be for the prime line.
4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure To display connection status of Station:
Display of Connection Status
TYPE: 1 TN: 1 IDLE STN: 3111
Line status is displayed here (Common to TYPE = 1, 2, 3) Kind of Connection Status: (Enter 1.) 1: Stations Connection Status Tenant Number Station Number
TYPE: TN: STN:
ND-45687 (E)
DCON CM0-03 Business, Hotel
To display connection status of Trunk:

Display of Connection Status TYPE:2 RT:1 TK:1 IDLE LENS:O00160
LENS of the designated Trunk is displayed. Line status is displayed here.
TYPE: RT:
TK:
Kind of Connection Status (Enter 2.) 2: Trunk Connection Status Route Number Trunk Route Number Intra office Route Number Trunk Number
To display connection status of LENS:

Display of Connection Status TYPE:3 LENS:000160 IDLE
TYPE: LENS:
Kind of Connection Status (Enter 3.) 3: LENS Connection Status Line Equipment Number
ND-45687 (E)
DDA1 CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DDA1
Display of DTE Attribute Data-1
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to display designated DTE Attribute Data-1. 3. Precautions When the input Station Number is not a DTE, error code is displayed and DTE Attribute Data-1 is not displayed. When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error-related information.
Note:
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: List up: ADA1 LDA1
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST Deletion: ASDT, RAST Display: ASDT, RAST, DLEN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure
Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 TN:1 STN:3555 LENS:000036
MEDIA:1 CNTP:0 TCP:0 FCY:3 PRI:0 RST:0 SRP:0 CI:0
TN: STN: LENS:

Note:
Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number
LENS of the entered STN is automatically displayed.
The contents of DTE Attribute Data-1 are explained in the command ADAl. Refer to ADA1.
ND-45687 (E)
DDA2 CM0-02 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DDA2
Display of DTE Attribute Data-2
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02 2. Function This command is used to display designated DTE Attribute Data-2, which is assigned at a DTE terminal with manual operation. 3. Precautions When the data cannot be read from P.M, error code is displayed. (Made Busy or not mounted). When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display supplementary information.
Note:
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: List up: ADA2 LDA2
-Parameter STNAssignment: ASDT, AAST Deletion: ASDT, RAST Display: ASDT, RAST, DSTN, DLEN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN 5. Entry Procedure
Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 TN:1 STN:3555 LENS:000036 DTR: 0 AUT0:0 MDM1:0 MDM2:0 SPD: 0 PRTY:0 ASYC:0 HDX: 1 STOP:0 CODE:0 PRFN:4 HL: 0 HTL: 0 RA: 0
TN: STN: LENS:

Note:
Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number
The LENS of the entered STN is automatically displayed.
The contents of DTE Attribute Data-2 are explained in the command ADA2. Refer to ADA2.
ND-45687 (E)
DFSN CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DFSN
Display File Serial Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to display and print the serial numbers of the files in the HD. 3. Precautions Enter parameter Generation (0/1). If the back tab key is pressed, the operation returns to the System Selection. If the back tab key or N key is pressed when the inquiry message has been displayed as to whether serial number display is to be made or not, the operation returns to the entry of System. If the back tab key or N + ENTER is pressed when the inquiry message has been displayed as to whether the command is to be terminated or not after display of Display End message, the operation returns to the entry of System.
4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure Designate the equipment. a. HDD File Serial Number Display Screen
Display File Serial Number SYSTEM : 0 (0/1) GENERATION: 0 (0/1) Start display (Y/N)? Y FILE NAME \MMLM\00\MMLM0l. PRG SYSTEM GENERATION SERIAL NO. 73OEU97518 : HFC/HDD System (0/1) : Program file area number FILE NAME \UPDR\00\UPDR0l.PRG SERIAL NO. 73OEU97518
Display completed!! Return to the MENU (Y/N)? Y
SYSTEM: GENERATION:
HFC/HDD System (0/1) Program File Area Number
To start the display, enter Y.
ND-45687 (E)
DFTD SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DFTD
Display of System Message With Details
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is necessary for printing system messages detected by the PBX Fault Diagnostic programs. 3. Precautions To end this command, press the / key. Refer to the Maintenance Manual for information on how to interpret each System Message. Refer to the Maintenance Manual if no details are available.
Display of System Message With Details List New or Previous Message (N/P)? Are details necessary (Y/N)? Stop on next message display (Y/N)?
The following messages may be displayed during and following execution of this command. a. b. c. Messages print out completed. No message Printer not ready (1: continue 2:end) If 2 is pressed, messages will display on the screen only.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
DFTD SYS Business, Hotel
Example of System Message:
SYSTEM MESSAGE O-C [MN] RESTORATION FROM CCS LINK FAILURE NEC TOKYO JUL 15 13:05 LP00-0-ACT 1:EC00 F063 4004 0000 2:0109 0000 0000 0000 3:0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000 Denotes Package mounting location Module Group number: 01 Unit number: 03 Group number: 12
ND-45687 (E)
DHDF CM0-10
DHDF
Display of File Information [for Engineering use only]
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function This command should be used only under the supervision of NECAM Engineering. 3. Precautions Call NECAM Engineering before using this command.
ND-45687 (E)
DISS CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DISS
Display of Program Issue
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command outputs to the printer and displays at the MAT, the program information (version, issue No. and date) in the main memory and the program information (SP No. and issue No.) in the port microprocessor memory mounted in each circuit card in the PBX. 3. Precautions The main memory program issue No. display does not occur in the following cases: a. b. The program information is not stored at the specified location in the main memory. The corresponding processor has been made busy.
The port microprocessor program issue No. display does not occur in the following cases: a. b. c. d. The program information is not stored at the specified location in the port microprocessor memory. The circuit card has been made busy. The circuit card is not mounted. The circuit card is not assigned in the ASDT or ATRK command.
Any of the following specifications is allowed for port microprocessor memory program issue No. display: a. b. c. Display of one port microprocessor Display of all port microprocessors mounted in one unit Display of all port microprocessors mounted in the system
ND-45687 (E)
4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure a. Main Memory

Display of Program Issue PBX TYPE V7.0: IMG MP/PM/IP/ACDP: M VERSION x x ISSUE xx.xx xx.xx DATE 94/12/27 xx/xx/xx
The applicable system type displays. Main Memory/PM Memory/IP/ACDP Memory Generic version installed in the switch. Boot RAM version and issue.
MM/PM: VERSION: ISSUE: DATE: PMN:
Main Memory/PM Memory (Enter M.) Program Version Program Issue No. Program Issue Date Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
b. Display of one processor of main memory

Display of Program Issue MM/PM/BT:M MMG
The applicable system type displays
PROCESSOR: SP-0 VERSION x ISSUE xx.xx DATE xx/xx/xx
MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter M.) PROCESSOR: Processor Number.
PROCESSOR No. SYSTEM
SP MP LP PMN:
-00 -15 00 - 07
0/1 -0/1
Port Microprocessor Equipment Number
ND-45687 (E)
c. Display of all Main Memory processors mounted in the system

Display of Program Issue PBX TYPE V7.0: MMG MM/PM/BT:M PROCESSOR: ALL ISSUE DATE XX.XX XX/XX/XX
The system type displays. Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot Program. Processor Number/MPXX/LPXX/SP/AP/IP/ ACDP All= All processors.
PROCESSOR VERSION SP-X X
---------
---------
---------
CONTINUE (Y/N)?
MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter M.) PROCESSOR: Processor Number (Enter ALL.) CONTINUE (Y/N)?: This displays if the list of processors (with version, issue, and date) fills the screen. To display data of other processors, press Y. To stop further display, press N.
--------ND-45687 (E)
For Port Microprocessor (example for MMG system): a. Display of one port microprocessor
Display of Program Issue MM/PM/BT:P PMN: 00150 SP No. XX.XX ISSUE XX
The applicable system type displays.
------
-----Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter P.) BT will not display for the IMG system. Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits) XX X XX Line Group Number Unit Number Module Group Number Firmware Number Program Issue No.
MM/PM/BT:
Note:
PMN:
SP No.: ISSUE:
ND-45687 (E)
b.
Display of all port microprocessors mounted in one Unit
Display of Program Issue M/PM/BT:P PMN: 001 GROUP No. 0 1 SP No. XXXX ISSUE XX MMG
System type is displayed here. Enter the Unit Number.
---------
MM/PM/BT:
Note:
Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM? (Enter P.)
BT will not display for the IMG system. Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (3 digits) XX X
PMN:
--------Unit Number Module Group Number

ND-45687 (E)
GROUP No.: SP No.: ISSUE:
------
Group Number (0-23) Firmware Number Program Issue No.
c.
Display of all port microprocessors mounted in system
Display of Program Issue MM/PM/BT:P PMN: ALL GROUP No. 0 1 SP No. XXXX ISSUE XX MMG
System type is displayed here. Enter ALL.
---------
CONTINUE (Y/N)
MM/PM/BT:
Note:
Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter P.)
BT will not display for the IMG system. Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (Input ALL.) Group Number (0-23) Firmware Number Program Issue No. This parameter is displayed every time the data of one PIM is displayed. When the data of another PlM is to be displayed, press Y. Otherwise, press N.
PMM: GROUP No.: SP No.: ISSUE: CONTINUE (Y/N):
--------ND-45687 (E)
------
DLEN CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DLEN
Display of LENS Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to display the data (station data or trunk data) assigned for a designated LEN. For the Hotel system, Room Class and Floor Service Data [Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)] will also be displayed. 3. Precautions Floor Service data are displayed only in the case of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165, b7=1 (Floor Service is provided).
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: ASDT, AAST, AGST, ATRK ASDT, RAST, RGST, ATRK ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, ATRK, DSTN LSTN, LHST, LTRK, LLEN, LHEN.
-Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For Business System

Display of LENS Data LENS:000001 TN:1 TEC:3 STN:3111 RSC:1 SFC:1
LENS:
Note: Note:
Line Equipment Number
When the LENS is entered, the following parameters are displayed. When the designated LENS is for a station, parameters TN, STN, TEC, RSC, and SFC are displayed. When the designated LENS is for a trunk, parameters TN, RT, and TK are displayed. The ATT will show RSC and SFC. Tenant Number Station Number Telephone Class (1-31) 1: DP(10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4-10: Not used 11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot line 15: CAS Line 16: Data terminal via data module 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used 26: VPS 27: Eight Conference Equipment 28-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15) Service Feature Class (0-15) Route number Trunk Number
TN: STN: TEC:
RSC: SFC: RT: TK:
ND-45687 (E)
For Hotel System a. Enter the data for parameter LENS
LENS:010201 TN: 1 STN: 3000 TEC:1 RSC:2
SFC:3
NXT?
Note: Note:
When the LENS is entered; the following parameters are displayed. When the designated LENS is for a station, parameters TN, STN, TEC, RSC, SFC, NXT are displayed. When the designated LENS is for a trunk parameters TN, RT, and TK are displayed. Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Tenant Number Station Number Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) 1: Admi. DP (10 pps) 2: Admi. PB 3: Admi. DP/PB 4: Admi. DP (20 pps) 5: Guest DP (10 pps) 6: Guest PB 7: Guest DP/PB 8: Guest DP (20 pps) 9: Admi. House Phone 10: Guest House Phone 11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Enter Y, and cause the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR to be displayed [See (b)].
ND-45687 (E)
LENS: TN: STN: TEC:
RSC: SFC: NXT:
b.
Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR
LENS: 010201 ROOM CLASS: 1 ANX:0 G:0 FLR:1
The LENS entered in (a) is displayed.
ROOM CLASS:Room Class (0-15) ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground FLR: Floor (1-127)
ND-45687 (E)
DLSL CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DLSL
Display of Lock Out Station-LENS
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to print out the LENS of stations in lockout mode.
Note:
All LENS numbers display, but only those LENS in lockout stations will print out.
3. Precautions If there are no lockout stations to be displayed, NOTHING is printed out. 4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure To display the LENS of all lockout stations in the system:
Display of Lockout Station-LENS TYPE:1 LENS: XXXXXX
TYPE:
Type of printout (Enter 1.) 1: Printout of all Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)in lockout LENS.
To display the LENS of the lockout stations in a specific MG:

Display of Lockout Station-LENS TYPE: 2 MG:0 LENS: XXXXXX
TYPE: MG:
Type of printout (Enter 2.) 2: Printout of MG indication in LENS Module Group Number
ND-45687 (E)
DLSL CM0-03 Business, Hotel
To display the LENS of the lockout stations in a specific unit:

Display of Lockout Station-LENS TYPE:3 MG:0 UNIT:0 LENS: XXXXXX
TYPE: MG: UNIT:
Type of printout (Enter 3.) 3: Printout of unit indication in LENS Module Group Number Unit Number (0-3)
ND-45687 (E)
DLSS CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DLSS
Display of Lock Out Station-Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to print out stations in lockout mode by station number. 3. Precautions If there are no lockout stations to be displayed, NOTHING is printed out. 4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure To display the Station Numbers of all lockout stations in the System:
Display of Lockout Station-Number TYPE: 1 XXXX
Station number displays after ENTER is pressed.
TYPE:
Type of Print out Number (Enter 1.) 1: Print out of all lockout stations
To display the Station Numbers of the lockout stations in a specific Tenant:

Display of Lockout Station-Number TYPE: 2 TN: 1 XXXX
Station number displays.
TYPE: TN:
Type of Print out Number (Enter 2.) 2: Indication of lockout stations by tenant. Tenant Number
ND-45687 (E)
DLSS CM0-03 Business, Hotel
To display the Station Numbers of the lockout stations within a designated range of Station Numbers:
Display of Lockout Station-Number TYPE: 3 TN:1 STN:3111 TO 3113 XXXX
Type of Print out Number (Enter 3.) 3: Print out of lockout stations within a specified range of station numbers. TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]:Station Numbers a: Start Station Number b: Last Station Number TYPE:
ND-45687 (E)
DMBL CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DMBL
Display of Make Busy LENS Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to print out LENS in make busy state on a system-wide basis or for each MG or each unit. 3. Precautions If there are no LENS in make busy state, NOTHING is printed out. 4. Related Reference Command Assignment (Busy/Idle): Display: 5. Entry Procedure To display all LENS:
Display of Make Busy Lens Data TYPE: 1 XXXXXX
MBLE, MBST, MBTK MBLE, MBST, MBTK, DMBS, DMBT
LENS number displays.
TYPE:
Type of Print out (Enter 1.) 1: Print out of all LENS in make busy state.
To display the LENS for a specific MG:

Display of Make Busy Lens Data TYPE:2 MG:0 XXXXXX
TYPE: MG:
Type of Print out (Enter 2.) 2: Print out of LENS in make busy state for a specific MG. Module Group number
ND-45687 (E)
DMBL CM0-03 Business, Hotel
To display the LENS related to a specific unit:

Display of Make busy Lens Data TYPE:3 MG:0 UNIT:0 XXXXXX
TYPE: MG: UNIT:
Type of Print out (Enter 3.) 3: Print out of LENS in make busy state for a specific unit. Module Group number Unit Number (0-3)
ND-45687 (E)
DMBS CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DMBS
Display of Make Busy Station
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to print out all stations in the make-busy state, or to print out specific stations in the makebusy state by tenant or station numbers. 3. Precautions If there are no stations in the make-busy state to be displayed, NOTHING is printed out. 4. Related Reference Command Assignment (Busy/Idle): Display: 5. Entry Procedure For all stations:
Display of Make Busy Station TYPE:1 XXXX
MBST, MBLE MBST, MBLE, DMBL
TYPE:
Type of Print out (Enter 1.) 1: Print out of make-busy stations in all tenants.
Note:
In a multi-tenant environment, all stations will print out under tenant 1.
For stations in a specific tenant:

Display of Make Busy Station TYPE:2 TN:1 XXXX
TYPE: TN:
Type of Print out (Enter 2.) 2: Print out of make-busy stations in a specific tenant. Tenant Number
ND-45687 (E)
DMBS CM0-03 Business, Hotel
For specific stations:

Display of Make Busy Station TYPE:3 TN: 1 STN:3111 TO 3113 XXXX
Type of Print out (Enter 3.) 3: Print out of make-busy stations in a specific tenant and station range. TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]: Station Numbers a: Start Station Number b: Last Station Number TYPE:
ND-45687 (E)
DMBT CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DMBT
Display of Make Busy Trunk
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to display the numbers and locations of trunks in the make-busy state, for all trunks in the system, trunks in a specific route, or trunks in a specific range of routes. 3. Precautions If there are no trunks in the make-busy state NOTHING is printed out. 4. Related Reference Command Assignment (Busy/Idle): Display: 5. Entry Procedure For all trunks:
Display of Make Busy Trunk RT: XXX TYPE: 1 TK: XXX
MBTK, MBLE MBTK, MBLE, DMBL
TYPE:
Kind of Print Out (Enter 1.) 1: All of the Trunks
Note:
All route numbers and trunk numbers will display; but only those in a make-busy state will print out.
ND-45687 (E)
DMBT CM0-03 Business, Hotel
For trunks in a specific route (single route):

Display of Make Busy Trunk TYPE:2 RT: 1 RT: XXX TK: XXX
Enter route number.
TYPE: RT:
Kind of Print out (Enter 2.) 2: All trunks of a specific route number. Route Number
For trunks in a specific range of routes:

Display of Make Busy Trunk TYPE:3 RT:1 TO 3 RT: XXX TK:XXX
Enter a range of route numbers.
Kind of Print out (Enter 3.) 3: All trunks of a specific trunk number range. RT [a] TO [b]: Route Numbers a: First Route Number b: Last Route Number TYPE:
ND-45687 (E)
DOSD CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DOSD
Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to display One-Touch Speed Call Memory data either from the floppy disk in with OneTouch Speed Call Memory data has been saved by BOSD command or from the DLC/ELC card. 3. Precautions The numbers assigned to 20 Speed Calling-One-Touch keys of Dterm are displayed. Also, where a Dterm on which Page Changeover Key (AKYD, FKY = 55) is assigned to one of the function keys, up to 40 numbers (220 Speed Calling One-Touch keys) are displayed. When Speed Calling One-Touch key (AKYD, FKY = 49) is assigned to a function key of Dterm, the number assigned to that function key is not displayed. For displaying One-Touch Speed Call Memory data, both station number and LENS can be designated from DLC/ELC card, but only station number can be designated from the floppy disk. The circuit cards and the Port Microprocessor (PM) which can be displayed are as shown in the table below.
Table 2-9 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Displayed CIRCUIT CARD PM NAME/PM NUMBER
PA-16ELCH Error Indications
SP-3005, SP-3033
NS: Indicates that the circuit card and the Port Microprocessor concerned are not backed up. RD: Indicates occurrence of a read error ND: Indicates that there is no data of the designated station number on the floppy disk. 4. Related Reference Command Back up: List up: BOSD LOSD
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure When displaying the data by designating station from DLC/ELC card. a. Designating a station:
Display One-Touch Speed Call Memory [INPUT PARAMETER] FUNCl: P FUNC2: S TN: 1 -COMMON READY (Y/N)?Y
STN: 2000
This is displayed when the Tenant Pattern is used in common.
FUNC1: FUNC2: TN: STN: b.
Kind of Function (Enter P). P: Circuit Card Kind of Function (Enter S). S: Station Tenant Number Station Number
If Y is entered to parameter READY, the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of the designated station is displayed.
NO. SPEED CALLING DATA 11 : XXXXX 12 : XXXXX 13 : XXXXX 14 : XXXXX 15 : XXXXX 16 : XXXXX 17 : XXXXX 18 : XXXXX 19 : XXXXX 20 : XXXXX
ND-45687 (E)
When displaying the data by designating Line Equipment Number (LENS) from DLC/ELC card. a. Designating a LENS:
Display One-Touch Speed Call Memory [INPUT PARAMETER] FUNCl: P FUNC2: L LENS: 000012 READY (Y/N) ?Y
FUNCl: FUNC2: LENS: b.
Kind of Function (Enter P). P: Circuit Card Kind of Function (Enter L). L: LENS Line Equipment Number
If Y is entered to parameter READY, the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of the designated LENS is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
When displaying the data from floppy disk. a. Designating a station:
Display One-Touch Speed Call Memory [INPUT PARAMETER] FUNC1: F DRVNO: B FUNC2: STATION ONLY TN: 1 STN: 2000 [FILE INFORMATION] OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE :91/11/1 [FRI] IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-B AND READY (Y/N) ?Y
File Information is displayed.
FUNC1: DRV NO: FUNC2: TN: STN: OFFICE: DATE: b.
Kind of Function (Enter F). F: Floppy Disk FD Drive No. (A/B/C/D/E/F) Station only Tenant Number Station Number Office Name Date of File
If Y is entered to IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-xx AND READY (Y/N), the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of the designated station is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
DPKG CM0-11 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DPKG
Display Setting on Port Package
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command displays information of Circuit Cards accommodated in the specific PIM or in all PIMs. 3. Precautions If a Circuit Card is in operation, the circuit card name is displayed. If a circuit card is in make-busy status, it is displayed with an asterisk and the card type (e.g., *TRK, *DLC). Even if the Circuit Cards do not belong to the table below, the type of the Circuit Card will appear on the display. In this case, * is attached before the type of Circuit Card. (ex. ELC*DLC) The Type of Circuit Cards which is printed out from MAT are shown below.
Table 2-10 Reference Table for Type of Circuit Cards TYPE OF CIRCUIT CARDS FUNCTION
LC TRK DTI RST ATI DLC CFT MODEMT GWT 4. Related Reference Command None
Line Circuit Trunk Digital Trunk Interface Register Sender Trunk Attendant Interface Digital Line Circuit 3 party Conference Trunk Modem Pool Trunk DST (Digital Signaling Trunk)
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system
Display Setting on Port Package MG : 00 UNIT: 0 Group Number MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number 1 1 6 L C B H Group Number Slot Number 0 0 5 6 7 8 R S T J 12 10 20 0 15 6 15 23 1 7
Display
15
23
12 20
20 23
MG: UNIT:
Module Group Number (When displaying all circuit cards mounted in all PIMs, enter All.) Unit Number
ND-45687 (E)
When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system (Unit 0 of PIMJ is used in the following example.)
DISPLAY
Display Port Package Location MG : 00 UNIT : 0 Group Number MG : Module Group Number UNIT : Unit Number
0 5 10 15 20
23
# # #
R S T
L C
L C
D T I
D T I
D T I
D T I
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
MG: UNIT:
Module Group Number Unit Number
Note 1: Indicates the 8RST card is mounted in Slot 4. ### is displayed on Group 00 because no data is as-
signed.
Note 2: Indicates the 16LC card is mounted in Slot 6. Note 3: Indicates the 24DTI card is mounted in Slot 9.
ND-45687 (E)
DPSW CM0-11 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DPSW
Display Package Switch
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command displays the status and function of all switches on each Circuit Card (control and line circuit cards) which are accommodated in the PBX. Only explanations of function of each circuit card are available. 3. Precautions When you choose the display of the status and function, without connecting MAT to the system, only the function of the switches appears on the screen. When the Circuit Card has plural switch information, you can see only one switch information at a time. In this case, you can scroll the display to obtain another switch information.
4. Related Reference Command None. 5. Entry Procedure a. Selection of Display Type

Display Package Switch Selection of Display Type: Display of Both Status and Function Display of Function
Select using the up or down arrow keys.
Display of Both Status and Function: Shows actual settings in the switch and explanations of switch settings Display of Function: Provides explanations of switch settings
ND-45687 (E)
Specify package type and package name:
Display Package Switch Package Type: Package Name:
Switch Status and Function Explanation Control Package Line/Trunk Package
Depending on the package name entered, additional information may display, such as MG# or Processor selection.
Ready?
Yes/No
Package Type: Select type of package by () Package Name: Type in Circuit Card Name (number of characters will vary)
ND-45687 (E)
Example a. EMA Card (for UMGx)

[DPSW] Display Package Switch Package Type: Control Package Package Name: XXXXXXXXXX Processor Number : X Ready? Yes/No Display Switch Function Area Note 1
Switch status and Function Explanation Line/Trunk Package Processor Select : SP LP
Display Switch Status Area
Continue Display? Yes No Before Note 2
Package Type: Package Name: Processor Select: Processor Number:
Select Control Package by () Type in Circuit Card Name Select the Processor Enter LP Number
Note 1: This parameter appears when the Processor Select is LP.
See Figure entitled System Configuration (UMGx) for the LP number.

Note 2: With the completion of display of status and function this indication changes to Return to menu? Yes/
No.
ND-45687 (E)
b. PBI, CPU KEY Card (for UMGx)

[DPSW] Display Package Switch Package Type: Control Package Package Name: PH-BS21 Processor Number : 0 Note 1 Ready? Yes/No Display Switch Function Area
Switch status and Function Explanation Line/Trunk Package Processor Select : SP LP MP Select System : Zero One Note 2
Package Type: Package Name: Processor Select: Processor Number: Select System:
Select Control Package by () Type in Circuit Card Name Select the kind of Processor Enter the selected Processor No. Select the system of Circuit Card
Note 1: This parameter appears when the Processor Select is LP or MP.
See Figure System Configuration (UMGx) on page 424 for the LP number.
Note 2: This parameter appears when the Processor Select is LP. Note 3: With the completion of display of status and function this indication changes to Return to menu? Yes/
No.
ND-45687 (E)
c. DTMC Card (for UMGx)

[DPSW] Display Package Switch Package Type: Control Package Package Name: Processor Number : 0 Note 1 Ready? Yes/No Display Switch Function Area
Switch status and Function Explanation Line/Trunk Package
Package Type: Select Control Package by () Package Name: Type in Circuit Card Name Processor Number: Enter the MP
Note 1: This value is the MP number.
See Figure System Configuration (UMGx) on page 424 for the MP number.
Note 2: With the completion of display of status and function this indication changes to Return to menu? Yes/
No.
ND-45687 (E)
PMG1
PMG0
MP3 MP2 MP1 MP0
IMG0 PIM MPM PIM PIM PIM

LP00
IMG1 PIM PIM PIM PIM HSWM
HSWM HSWM MISCM
HSWM HSWM SPM
LPM
Note 1
IMG4 PIM PIM PIM PIM

LP08
IMG8 PIM PIM ....... PIM PIM

LP16
IMG12 PIM PIM ....... PIM PIM

LP24
.......
LPM
LPM
LPM
Note 1: One LP is in charge of four IMGs.
System Configuration (UMGx)
ND-45687 (E)
Specify PMN number (Additional information displays.)
Display Package Switch Package Type: PMN Number: XXXXX
Switch Status and Function Explanation Control Package Line/Trunk Package XPackage Edition: X
Package Name: XX-XXX
Firm information: XX-XXXX V.X Ready? Yes/No
Displayed information varies depending on the Package Name.
Display Package Switch Package Type: Control Package Package Name: Switch Status Area (display of actual switch settings)
Switch Status and Function Explanation Line/Trunk Package
Switch Function Area (explanation of functions of specific settings)
Continue Display? Yes/No
Note:
With the completion of display of status and function, this indication changes to Return to menu? Yes/ No.
ND-45687 (E)
DSTN CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
DSTN
Display of Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to display the registered Station Data. The command can also be used to display the following data related to Number Group. Specific Attendant Number (ASAT command) Remote Access Code (ARAC command) Listed Directory Number (ALDN command) Individual Phantom Number (APHN command) Group Phantom Number (ASHP command)
In addition, the information of Hot Line, Dterm Key Layout, Hunting, and Call Pickup is also displayed as the data related to the designated stations. Room data is also displayed in Hotel. 3. Precautions When a secretary station has been designated, the details of the Hunting Group to which that specific secretary station belongs cannot be displayed. When the Station Number of TEC = 13 (Data terminal via Dterm) has been designated, the Station Number assigned to Voice port and the key data of the Dterm are displayed. When the station number belonging to a group (Pilot, UCD DSTN or Call Pickup) is designated, the station of the group is displayed in a preassigned order. However, in UCD Hunting Group display, the designated station is usually displayed as the first one.
ND-45687 (E)
4. Parameters TN: STN: Tenant Number Presently Assigned Station Number
-Station NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number G: Group Number LEVEL: Level Number TEC: Telephone Class (Message display at the same time too) RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15) ROOM CLASS: Room Class (for Hotel system) PHANTOM TYPE: Phantom Number Type (NOTHING/INDlVIDUAL/GROUP) NUMBER: Individual Phantom Number HOT CON TN, STN: Hot Line-Opposite Partys Tenant Number and Station Number
Note:
When the registered destination of hot line connection of the designated station is a station registered for Speed Calling-System service, parameter HOT ADC is displayed. Hot Line-Opposite Partys Abbreviated Digit Code.
HOT ADC:
Note:
When the registered destination of hot line connection of the designated station is a station, parameter HOT CON TN, STN is displayed.
HUNTING:
Kind of Hunting (PILOT/CIRCULAR/UCD/SECRETARY) CALL PICKUP: Belonging to Call Pickup Group or not. (BELONG/BLANK) VOICE STN: Station Number of Voice Port corresponding to the Data Port. [To be displayed only when TEC = 13 (Data terminal via Dterm)] Detail Data The following detail data can be displayed: Next Station Display Dterm key Position Hunting Group Call pickup Group
ND-45687 (E)
Dterm key Position The following detail data can be displayed: Detail Data Change Key Position (1-16) Key Position (17-40) Flexible key position (1-8) -Parameters after detail data has been requestedPILOT: Pilot Number SECRETARY: Secretary Number PHANTOM: Phantom Number CNT: Enter the number of Group Station Number STN: Enter the lead station Number of the Hunting Group -Specific Attendant NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number G: Group Number LEVEL: Level Number RT: Route Number (901 or 915) TK (ATK): Trunk Number (Attendant Number) CNT: Number of handling TNs TN: Handling TNs (Smaller number first) TRSC: Trunk Route Restriction Class TSFC: Trunk Service Feature Restriction Class -Listed Directory Number/Remote Access CodeEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number -Individual Phantom Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number TN: Tenant Number of Master Station STN: Master Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number of Master Station MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number G: Group Number LEVEL: Level Number TEC: Telephone Class of Master Station (Message is to be displayed simultaneously) RSC: Route Restriction Class of Master Station SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class of Master Station ROOM CLASS: Room Class (for Hotel system)
ND-45687 (E)
-Group Phantom NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number The following parameters are the data of a Pilot Group for which a Phantom Number is registered. PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: STN: 5. Entry Procedure Pilot Number Secretary Number Phantom Number Enter the number of Group Station Number Enter the lead station Number of the Hunting Group
TN: 1
STN: 5000
TN: STN:
Tenant Number Station Number, Specific Attendant Number, Listed Directory Number, Remote Access Code, Individual Phantom Number, Group Phantom Number
Data are displayed of the Number Group of the number entered.
ND-45687 (E)
For Station Number a. Station Data

Display
TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: ROOM CLASS: SFC: <Related data> PHANTOM: NUMBER: HUNTING: CALL PICKUP: HOT CON TN: STN: Detail Data? Next Station Display Dterm key Position Hunting Group Call Pickup Group MODE SELECTION: Up Arrow MODE ACTIVATION: Down Arrow
When a Station Number has been entered, the above data are displayed. If there are Dterm key data, Station Hunting Group data, and Call Pickup data to be displayed, select the desired item with the (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow); then press ENTER.
Note:
When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm), the corresponding Station Number of VOICE port displays. The key position on the Dterm at this time is the VOICE-side station.
TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system) PHANTOM: Phantom Number Type NUMBER: Individual Phantom Number HUNTING: Kind of Hunting PICKUP: Belonging to Call Pickup Group or not HOT CON TN: Hot Line-Opposite Partys Tenant Number HOT CON STN:Hot Line-Opposite Partys Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
The following explains a request for detail data. b. When a D term key Position has been entered in display (a), the following information displays:
Display of Station Data TN: STN: LENS: TEC: SFC:
DISPLAY
EFFECTIVE TN: MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC MESSAGE RSC: ROOM CLASS:
Dterm Position Type? Detail Data Change
When a D term key Position has been entered, the above data is displayed. If there are Dterm key data, Dterm Add on Module key data, and Dterm Flexible key data to be displayed, select the desired item with the (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow); then press ENTER.
Note:
When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm), the corresponding Station Number of VOICE port is displayed. The key position on the Dterm at this time is that of the VOICEside station.
TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system)
ND-45687 (E)
Key Position (1-16) Key Position (17-40) Flexible Key Position (1-8)
MODE SELECTION: Up Arrow MODE ACTIVATION: Down Arrow
The following explains a request for detail data. c. When key position (1-16) has been entered as the answer for the question Dterm Position Type? in display (b), the following displays.
DISPLAY
Display of Station Data TN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC MESSAGE ROOM CLASS:
<Dterm key position>
Note VOICE STN: PRI: SPK: ANS:
ORG:
MWD:
1 9
2 10
3 11
4 12
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16
ENTER RETURN KEY!!
With the Enter key pressed, the screen returns to display (a).
Note:
When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm), the corresponding Station Number of VOICE port is displayed. The key position on the Dterm at this time is that of the VOICEside station.
TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system) PRI: From of Line Preference SPK: Line Preference of Speaker Button ANS: Line Preference of Answer Button ORG: Line Preference of Originating Button MWD: Waiting Message *: Dterm Key Data
ND-45687 (E)
The following explains a request for detail data. d. When key position (17-40) has been entered in reply to the question Dterm Position Type? in the display (b), the following will display.
DISPLAY
Display of Station Data TN: LENS: TEC: RSC: SFC: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X) TEC MESSAGE
<D term key position> PRI:
SPK: ANS: ORG: MWD:
17 25 33
18 26 34
19 27 35
20 28 36
21 29 37
22 30 38
23 31 39
24 32 40 ENTER RETURN KEY!!
After a detail data request has been entered, the contents of key data for Keys 17 through 40 are displayed. When Enter is pressed, the screen returns to display (a). TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class PRI: From of Line Preference SPK: Line Preference of Speaker Button ANS: Line Preference of Answer Button ORG: Line Preference of Originating Button MWD: Waiting Message *: Dterm Key Data
ND-45687 (E)
e.
In reply to the question Detailed Data? in the display (a), when you set Hunting Group, the following will display. [Station Hunting-Pilot]
DISPLAY
TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL: X) TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: SFC: <HUNTING-PILOT> PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: STN: ENTER RETURN KEY!!
**
[Station Hunting-Circular]
<HUNTING-CIRCULAR> SECRETARY: CNT: STN: **
ND-45687 (E)
[Station Hunting-UCD]
<HUNTING-UCD> CNT: STN: Note <UCD OVERFLOW GROUP> TN: STN: **
After a detail data request has been entered, the stations belonging to either one of Station Hunting GroupPilot/-Circular/-UCD are displayed there depending on the case involved. When the Enter key is pressed, the screen returns to display (a).
Note:
No display is made if UCD Overflow Group is not assigned. Number of Stations in the Group Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group
CNT: **:
ND-45687 (E)
f.
When you answer by Call Pick-up Group in reply to the question Detailed Data? in the display (a), the display scrolls to the following.
Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X) TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: SFC: <CALL PICKUP> CNT: STN:
DISPLAY
ENTER RETURN KEY!!
**
After a detail data request has been entered, the stations belonging to the Call Pickup Group are displayed. When the Enter key is pressed, the screen returns to display (a). TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class CNT: Number of Stations in the Group **: Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group
ND-45687 (E)
For Specific Attendant Number When a Specific Attendant Number is entered, the following displays.
Display of Station Data TN: LENS: RT: CNT: TN: TRSC: Display
STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Specific Attendant Number (ASAT) (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL: X) TK(ATN): MASTER Note TSFC:
Note:
This MASTER is displayed for Master ATT with respect to the Effective TN. For Night Master ATT, NIGHT MASTER is displayed here.
TN: Tenant Number STN: Specific Attendant Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number RT: Route Number TK(ATN): Trunk Number (Attendant Number) CNT: Number of ending TN TN: Handling TNs (Smaller Number first) TRSC: Trunk Route Restriction Class TSFC: Trunk Service Feature Restriction Class For LDN Number When an LDN Number is entered, the following displays.
Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Display Listed Directory Number (ALDN)
TN: Tenant Number STN: Listed Directory Number EFFECTIVE TN:Effective Tenant Number
For Remote Access Code When a Remote Access Code is entered, the following displays.
Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: DISPLAY Remote Access Code (ARAC)
TN: Tenant Number STN: Remote Access Code EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number For Individual Phantom Number When an Individual Phantom Number is entered, the data of the Master Station displays.
Display of Station Data DISPLAY Individual Phantom Number (APHN)
TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: <MASTER> TN: STN: LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL:X) TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: ROOM CLASS: SFC: TRSC:i TSFC:j
TN (line 1): Tenant Number STN (line 1): Individual Phantom Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number TN (line 3): Tenant Number of Master Station STN (line 3): Master Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number of Master Station TEC: Telephone class of Master Station RSC: Route Restriction Class of Master Station SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class of Master Station ROOM CLASS: Room Class (H/M only)
ND-45687 (E)
For Group Phantom Number When a Group Phantom Number is entered, the data are displayed of the Pilot Group to which that phantom is assigned.
Display of Station Data TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: <HUNTING-PILOT> PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: STN: DISPLAY Group Phantom Number (APHN)
**
TN: STN: (2nd) TN: PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: **: Tenant Number Group Phantom Number Effective Tenant Number Pilot Station Number Secretary Station Number Group Phantom Number Number of Stations in the Group Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group
ND-45687 (E)
6. Related Reference Command -Station NumberAssignment/Deletion: ASDT, AAST, AGST/RAST, RGST APHN ASHP ASHC ASHU ACPG AHLS AKYD -Specific Attendant NumberAssignment/Deletion: ATRK ASAT AMAT -Listed Directory NumberAssignment/Deletion: ALDN -Remote Access CodeAssignment/Deletion: ARAC -Individual Phantom NumberAssignment/Deletion: APHN ASDT, AAST, AGST/RAST, RGST -Group Phantom NumberAssignment/Deletion: ASHP
ND-45687 (E)
DTF1 CM0-03 Business, Hotel
DTF1
Display of Traffic Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to display the traffic data recorded in the system. The traffic information which can be displayed by this command is as follows: Terminal Traffic Route Traffic Station Peg Count Attendant Console Peg Count Route Peg Count
3. Precautions System Data 1, Index 47, Bit 0, determines whether traffic data is to be printed out in Erlang or CCS. If Type of a Traffic Measurement is requested, the following messages may be displayed. WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned, but no traffic data has been obtained. NOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned, or Traffic Measurement is not in service in System Data 1, Index 47, Bit 7. In the display of Station Peg Count and Attendant Console Peg Count, if the number of calls has exceeded 1,000,000, the data will be displayed as 999,999.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: ATRF
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure
Display of Traffic Data TYPE:5 PRINTING OUT NOW
This message is displayed while printout of the traffic information is in progress.
TYPE:
Type of Traffic Measurement 1: Terminal Traffic 2: Route Traffic 3: Station Peg count 4: ATT Peg Count 5: Route Peg Count
6. Examples of Printout For Terminal Traffic (CCS)

* TERMINALTRAFFIC(CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 LENS LVO LV1 000000 000010 000020 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.49 0.99 0.00
LV2 0.99 0.49 0.00
LV3 0.00 21.21 0.00
LV4 0.00 28.11 0.00
LV5 0.00 0.00 0.00
LV6 0.00 0.00 0.00
LV7 0.00 0.00 0.00
The total traffic for each Unit or MG is printed out.
ND-45687 (E)
For Route Traffic (CCS)

* ROUTE TRAFFIC (CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 ROUTE 902 905 909 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NUMBER OF TRUNKS 20 20 4 4 4 32 12 12 8 8 8 4 TRAFFIC 8.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
For Station Peg Count

* STATION PEG COUNT * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 TENANT 1 ORIGINATOR STA TO STA-OG OUTGOING OTHER : : : : 13 9 1 3
STA TO STA-IC INCOMING RINGING NO ANSWER (30 SEC) ANSWER NO ANSWER OTHER
: : :
6 0 6
: : : :
0 1 5 0
ND-45687 (E)
An explanation of the output results is given below: ORIGINATOR (Number of times call origination is attempted). Number of times a station went off-hook for call origination. STA TO STA-OG (Number of Station to Station calls) a. Number of times a station went off-hook and dialed a station number, a dead number or a specific attendant number. b. Last number calls, Hot Line calls, Priority Calls, Off-Hook Alarm calls and Calls Back of Message Reminder, are counted. c. When a station, while engaged in a call, places the call on hold, and dials a station number, a dead number or a specific attendant number, such calls are counted. d. Stop calls are not counted. e. Calls back from Call Back or Call Waiting are not counted. OUTGOING (Number of Outgoing Attempts) a. Number of times a station went off-hook and dialed an access code for an outgoing trunk group (OGC, OGCA, LCR, LCRS). b. Last number calls and Hot Line-Outside calls, are counted. c. When a D term user presses the Trunk Line button and makes an outgoing trunk call, such calls are counted. d. When a station engaged in a call places the call on hold and dials an access code for an outgoing trunk group (OGC, OGCA, LCR, LCRS), such calls are counted. OTHER (Others-Outgoing) The number obtained by subtracting the number of STA TO STA-OG and the number of OUTGOING from ORIGINATOR. Examples of OTHER are: a. A station lifted the handset but did not dial any digits. b. A station started dialing but replaced the handset before dialing was completed. STA TO STA-IC (Number of terminations of Station to Station calls) Same as STA TO STA-OG. INCOMING (Number of terminated C.O. line, tie line incoming calls) a. Number of station calls attempted by direct dialing (not via the Attendant) from C.O. lines or TIE lines. b. Number of terminated DIT (Direct-In Termination) calls. RINGING (Number of terminated station calls) Add STA TO STA-IC and INCOMING above for the number of terminated station calls. NO ANSWER (30 SEC) (Number of times a call is unanswered for a predetermined period of time) Of the RINGING, number of times a call is unanswered within a predetermined timing (standard 30 seconds). Note that even if a station user answers the call after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is not counted as ANSWER.
Note:
Number of Call Forwarding-Dont Answer is not included in the count.
ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) Of the RINGING, number of answered terminated calls. NO ANSWER (Number of unanswered calls) Of the RINGING, number of unanswered calls. (Number obtained by subtracting ANSWER from RINGING)
OTHER (Others-Incoming) The number obtained by subtracting the number of RINGING (Number of terminated station calls) form the sum of STA TO STA-IC and INCOMING (Number of terminated C.O. line/tie line incoming calls), and there are the following cases. a. The cases where the calls encountered line busy b. The cases where the calls were transferred to ATTCON For Attendant Peg Count
* ATTENDANT PEG COUNT (CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 TM LDN ATND RCL FX WATS 1 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 * ATTENDANT ANSWER * ATN LDN ATND RCL 1 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 1 0 6 0 0 0
CCSA 0 0 0 0
TIE 0 0 0 0
BUSY NANS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ICPT 0 0 0 0
SCB 0 0 0 0
TF 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 3 0 0 0
(1) Number of incoming calls on each Tenant basis

FX 0 0 0 0 0 0 WATS 0 0 0 0 0 0 CCSA 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 BUSY NANS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ICPT 0 0 0 0 0 0 SCB 0 0 0 0 0 0 TF 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOTAL 1 0 0 0 1 0
7. Number of incoming calls on each ATTCON
ND-45687 (E)
The following table explains how to interpret the output results.

SYMBOL NAME OF KEY ON ATTCON DESCRIPTION
LDN ATND RCL FX WATS CCSA TIE BUSY NANS ICPT SCB TF
Listed Directory Name Attendant Recall Foreign Exchange Wide Area Telephone Service Common Channel Signaling Arrangement Tie Line Busy Dont Answer Intercept Special Common Battery Inter-Position Transfer
CALL termination from C.O. line Operator access from C.O. line Recall from station Outside prefix Wide Area Telephone Service Direct Inward Dial Trunk Call termination from Tie line Call which encountered called line busy has terminated to ATTCON Call which encountered no answer has terminated to ATTCON Call which was restricted has terminated to ATTCON Not Used Call termination by Inter-Position Transfer
ND-45687 (E)
For Route Peg Count

ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00 ROUTE902 ATTEMPTS BLOCK ESTABLISHED ROUTE 1 ATTEMPTS BLOCK OUTGOING INCOMING REGISTER ACCESS: ATT STATION TANDEM OTHER
: 18 : : 18 : 5 : 5 : 0 : 0 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0
Below is an explanation of the output results: a. For Intra office Trunks (ex. Route 901, 902, etc.) ATTEMPTS Number of times a trunk selection was attempted. BLOCK Number of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk. ESTABLISHED Number of connections to specific intra-office trunks. (Connections to Attendant Consoles are not included). b. For IC/OG Trunks ATTEMPTS Number of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk. BLOCK Number of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk. OUTGOING (Number of call originations) Number of times trunks were accessed. The count does not always coincide with the number obtained by subtracting BLOCK from ATTEMPTS. INCOMING Number of terminated incoming trunk call arrivals. REGISTER ACCESS This value, from the count in INCOMING, is the number of actual ORT/IRT register connections. In the case of Bothway C.O. Trunks (CBWT), the count becomes 0. Also, when register blocking has occurred, the count in INCOMING and the count in REGISTER ACCESS do not always coincide.
ND-45687 (E)
ATT (Number of Connections to Attendant Consoles) This value is calculated from REGISTER ACCESS and INCOMING only when the calls are directed to the ATTCON. STATION (Number of Station to Station calls) This value is calculated from REGISTER ACCESS and INCOMING only when the calls are station-to-station (not via the Attendant Console). TANDEM (Number of Tandem Connections) This value, from the count in REGISTER ACCESS, is the number of calls that received an outgoing trunk group access code (OGC, OGCA, LCR, LCRS) through an incoming trunk. OTHER The number obtained by subtracting ATT, STATION, and TANDEM from INCOMING. These calls include the following: Incoming calls terminated but released before the connection was made. Calls to unused numbers Calls that encountered station busy
ND-45687 (E)

siness, tel
DTF2
Display of Traffic Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is for printing out the result of traffic measurement data for Type 6 (Service Peg Count) assigned in the Assignment of Traffic Measurement (ATRF) command. 3. Precautions When Type of Traffic Measurement is requested, the following messages may be displayed. WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned, but no traffic data has been obtained. NOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned. In the display of Service Peg Count, if the number of calls has exceeded 1,000,000, the data will be displayed as 999,999. Printout of the traffic measurement results by this command is applicable only to Service Peg Count. Printout of other traffic measurement data is performed either by command DTF1 or DTF3.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: 5. Entry Procedure ATRF
Display of Traffic Data TYPE:6 PRINTING OUT NOW!
This message is displayed while output of traffic measurement result data to the printer is in progress.
TYPE:
Type of Traffic Measurement 6: Service Peg Count
ND-45687 (E)
6. Example of Printout
SERVICE PEG COUNT FROM 07/24 09:00 TO 07/24 10:00 TENANT 1 CALL HOLD CALL BACK CANCEL EROW CALL WAITING-ORIGINATE CALL WAITING-TERMINATE CALL PICK UP DIRECT CALL PICK UP CF ALL CALLS-ENTRY CF ALL CALLS-CANCEL CF-BUSY LINE-ENTRY CF-BUSY LINE-CANCEL CF-DONT ANSWER-ENTRY CF-DONT ANSWER-CANCEL SPEED CALLING ACCESS SYSTEM SPEED CALLING ACCESS INDIVIDUAL SPEED CALLING INDIVIDUAL-ENTRY TAS ANSWER OFF HOOK OG QUEUING ON HOOK OG QUEUING-ENTRY ON HOOK OG QUEUING-CANCEL CONSULTATION HOLD CALL TRANSFER ADD ON CONFERENCE
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
An explanation of the output results is given below: CALL HOLD Count Number of calls originated by a station while keeping the original call on hold. CALL BACK (ENTRY) Count Number of times a busy station has called back to the calling station. CALL BACK CANCEL Count Number of times Call Back is canceled. EROW (EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY Count) Number of times a specific station has entered a busy stations call using EROW. CALL WAITING-ORIGINATING Count Number of times a busy station is automatically called by camp-on tone being sent from another station. CALL WAITING-TERMINATING Count Number of times a busy station is automatically called by a camp-on tone being sent to indicate an external call waiting.
CALL PICK UP - (GROUP) Count Number of times a terminating call is answered by another station in the same pick-up group by dialing the call pick-up code. DIRECT CALL PICK UP Count Number of times a terminating call is answered by another station by dialing a call pick-up code and the terminating station number. CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ENTRY Count Number of times Call Forwarding-All Calls is set by a station. CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-CANCEL Count Number of times Call Forwarding-All Calls is canceled by a station. CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE-ENTRY Count Number of times Call Forwarding-Busy Line is set by a station. CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE-CANCEL Count Number of times Call Forwarding-Busy Line is canceled by a station. CALL FORWARDING DONT ANSWER ENTRY Count Number of times Call Forwarding-Dont Answer is set by a station. CALL FORWARDING DONT ANSWER-CANCEL Count Number of times Call Forwarding-Dont Answer is canceled by a station. SPEED CALLING ACCESS SYSTEM Count Number of times a System Speed Calling number is dialed. SPEED CALLING ACCESS INDIVIDUAL Count Number of times an individual Speed Calling number is dialed. SPEED CALLING INDIVIDUAL-ENTRY Count Number of times an individual Speed Calling number is registered. TAS ANSWER Count Number of calls answered via Trunk Answer from Any Station. OFF-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING Count Number of times trunk is seized after a station is getting Off-Hook Queuing upon encountering all trunks busy. ON-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-ENTRY Count Number of times the Off-Hook Queuing feature is set after encountering all trunks busy. ON-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-CANCEL Count Number of times Off-Hook Queuing feature is canceled. CONSULTATION HOLD Count Number of times CONSULTATION HOLD is executed.
ND-45687 (E)
CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS Count Number of times a station and attendant console are called out by dialing, by hooking, without the intervention of attendant console operator, the office originating/terminating calls as well as busy calls generated in self-office. ADD ON CONFERENCE (THREE-WAY CALLING count) Number of three-party conference calls.
ND-45687 (E)

siness, tel
DTF3
Display of Traffic Data 3
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to display the traffic data recorded in the system. The traffic information which can be displayed by this command is listed below. UCD Route Peg Count UCD Group Peg Count UCD Station Peg Count
3. Precautions If Type of Traffic Measurement is requested, the following messages may be displayed. WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned, but no traffic data has been obtained. NOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned. In the Uniform Call Distribution Route Peg Count, Uniform Call Distribution Group Peg Count and Uniform Call Distribution Station Peg count, if the number of calls has exceeded 1,000,000, the data will be displayed as 999,999.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: 5. Entry Procedure For UCD Route Peg Count:
Display of Traffic Data 3 TYPE:8
ATRF
TYPE:
Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 8.) 8: UCD Route Peg Count
ND-45687 (E)
For UCD Group Peg Count

TYPE:
Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 9.) 9: UCD Group Peg Count
For UCD Station Peg Count:

TYPE:
Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 10.) 10: UCD Station Peg Count
6. Example of Printout For UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT:
UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07:24 09:00 ROUTE 1 UCD GROUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ROUTE TOTAL 1 2 3 4 5
T0 07:24
10:00
INCOMINGANSWER ABANDON XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX
XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXXXX
An explanation of the output is given below: INCOMING (Number of terminated calls) ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls)
For UCD GROUP PEG COUNT:

UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07:24 09:00 T0 07:24 UCD GROUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TOTAL
10:00 ANSWERABANDON XXXXX XXXXX
INCOMING XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
An explanation of the output is given below: INCOMING (Number of terminated calls) ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls) For UCD STATION PEG COUNT:
UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07:24 09:00 T0 07:24 UCD GROUP 1 TN XXX
10:00 STN XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX TOTAL XXXXX INCOMING XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX ANSWER XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX ABANDON XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX
GROUP XXXX
An explanation of the output is given below: TN (Tenant Number) STN (Station Number) INCOMING (Number of terminated calls) ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls)
ND-45687 (E)
INST SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
INST
System Install [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)]
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is used to install various data from Floppy Disks (FDs), including office data, Call Forwarding data, Speed Calling-Station Data and Name Display Data, to the Hard Disk (HD) of the HFC.The FDD of the MAT is used for installing this data. 3. Precautions Data installation is to be made on FD basis. Installation is executed to the ACT-side HD. Verify must be executed after Install. If an HD copy processing has resulted in an error such as Verify Error, etc., be sure to install data on an FD basis.
4. Related Reference Command AIOC BKUP SINZ 5. Entry Procedure Input Parameters Select the data to be installed. Data Memory/CF/SPD/Name Display Data/Main Memory Select the equipment to be installed. MAT/FDD Is data to be installed on HD basis? Yes/No Is verify to be executed at the time of installation? Yes/No (This prompt displays if Yes was entered above.) Data installation on an HD Basis: When this type of install is used, the data of the selected item is stored once on the MAT HD from the FD(s) before loading the data to the PBX. Copy the target file into the HD of the MAT. Is the file to be verified after copying? Yes/No Place the target FD into Drive: X. If ready, press any key. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No The number of copied FDs is X. When confirmed, press any key.
If NO, repeat
ND-45687 (E)
HDD initialization? Yes/No Set the FD (Basic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X. When ready, press any key. Data Installation on an FD Basis: When this type of install is used, the data of the selected item is directly loaded to the PBX from FD. HDD initialization? Yes/No Place the FD (Basic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X. When ready, press any key. Installation will start. Place the FD with the target file into Drive: X. When ready, press any key. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No a. Initial Display
If NO, repeat
DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND Install data Select (Multiple selections possible) ( Selection: [] Choose: [RETURN] Cancel: [SPACE] Start: [S] )
Data Memory / Call Forwarding Data / Speed Calling Data / Name Display Data

DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Select Install Type HD_BASE/FD_BASE HD_BASE : This Function copies all install FD to MAT-HD then installs from MAT to HD in PBX FD_BASE : This Function does not use MAT-HD installs from MAT to HD in PBX
ND-45687 (E)
b. When Install data is selected
[INST] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND Install HFC number select HFC0 / HFC1
c. When HFC number is selected
System Install Selected HFC: HFC0 Data Install Set install FD in drive: A. If you are ready, Hit the return key.
DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND
Install Passage 0:end
ND-45687 (E)
System Install Selected HFC : HFC0 Data Install
DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND
Office Name: ICS RAM-SYSTEM File Number: 1 x
Date: 1995/03/10 15:19
25
50 75 100% xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Install Passage 0:end
ND-45687 (E)
INSTI CM0-10 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
INSTI
System Install [for IMGx, IMGxh, IMGdxh, and UMGx]
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function In the PBX, various data (program, office data, call Forwarding data, name display, and individual Speed Calling Data) need to be installed to the HDD. Using this command, the following installations can be controlled from the MAT. Note that the FDD of the MAT is used when installing the program. Formatting of HDD Data installation from MAT to HDD Data installation from FDD to HDD
3. Precautions When data is not to be installed on an HD basis, data installation is to be made on FD basis. HD basis indicates the method to install data after copying all target FDs onto the HD of the MAT. When installing the data from the MAT, only the ACT side HDD should be installed. Verify must be executed after Install. If an HD copy processing has resulted in an error such as Verify Error, etc., be sure to install data on an FD basis.
4. Related Reference Command AIOC BKUPI SINZ 5. Entry Procedure Input Parameters Select the data to be installed. Data Memory/CF/SPD/Name Display Data/Main Memory Select the equipment to be installed. MAT/FDD Is data to be installed on HD basis? Yes/No Is verify to be executed at the time of installation? Yes/No (This prompt displays if Yes was entered above.)
ND-45687 (E)
Data installation on an HD Basis: When this type of install is used, the data of the selected item is stored once on the MAT HD from the FD(s) before loading the data to the PBX. Copy the target file into the HD of the MAT. Is the file to be verified after copying? Yes/No Place the target FD into Drive: X. If ready, press any key. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No The number of copied FDs is X. When confirmed, press any key. HDD initialization? Yes/No Set the FD (Generic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X. When ready, press any key.
If NO, repeat
Data Installation on an FD Basis: When this type of install is used, the data of the selected item is directly loaded to the PBX from FD. HDD initialization? Yes/No Place the FD (Generic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X. When ready, press any key. Installation will start. Place the FD with the target file into Drive: X. When ready, press any key. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No
If NO, repeat
ND-45687 (E)
a. Initial Data
[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Install data Select (Multiple selections possible) (Select: [] Choose: [RETURN] Cancel: [SPACE] Start: [S]) Data Memory / Call Forwarding Data / Speed Calling Data / Name Display Data / Main Memory
When Main Memory is selected, the display changes to (l).
b. When Call Forwarding Data or Speed Calling Data or Name Display, or Data Memory is selected.
DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Select Install Type HD_BASE/FD_BASE HD_BASE : This Function copies all install FD to MAT-HD then installs from MAT to HD in PBX FD_BASE : This Function installs from MAT-FD to HD in PBX
When FD_BASE is selected, the display changes to (h).
ND-45687 (E)
c. When HD_BASE is selected

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM
MAT-HD file reference now! !
When no files exist on the HD of the MAT, the display changes to (f). d. When files exist on the HD of the MAT
[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM
Do you want to install files on MAT - HD? Yes / No
When Yes is selected, the display changes to (g). e. When No is selected

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Delete Files in MAT - HD Deleting Files Now ! !
Files are being deleted.
ND-45687 (E)
f.
When files on the HD have been deleted or when no files exist on the HD of MAT
[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Install Files copy to MAT - HD Files copy with verify? Yes / No Set Install FD in drive: X If you are ready, Hit the Return Key Are all the FD copied? Yes / No Copied FD number : n If you are ready, Hit the Return Key Note: Note
Select No to install another FD.
g. When the Return Key is pressed

[INSTI] System Install ACT System : 0 System Install Now! ! Office Name: ICS RAM-SYSTEM File Number: 1 x DM Install Progress 0: end Date: 1995/03/10 15:19 Data: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM
25
50
75
100%
************************************** CF SPD
When the install is completed, the display changes to (k).
ND-45687 (E)
h. When FD_BASE is selected on display (b)

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM ACT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Data Install Set install FD to drive : x If you are ready, Hit the return key
i.
When the Return Key is pressed

[INSTI] System Install ACT System : 0 System Install Now! ! Office Name: ICS RAM-SYSTEM File Number: 1 x DM Install Progress 0: end Date: 1995/03/10 15:19 Data: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM
25
50
75
100%
************************************** CF SPD
The data of the FD is being installed.
ND-45687 (E)
j.
When the install is completed

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM ACT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Install Normal end! ! Are all FD loaded? Yes / No
When No is selected, the display returns to (h). k. When Yes is selected

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM ACT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Install all end! ! Return to menu? Yes / No
When No is selected, the display returns to (a). When Yes is selected, the display returns to the menu.
ND-45687 (E)
l.
When Main Memory is selected on display (a)

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM Select system to install 0 SYSTEM / 1 SYSTEM
m. When a system of the HD is selected

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Do you want to initialize the HD in the PBX? Yes / No
When No is selected, the display returns to (r).
ND-45687 (E)
n. When Yes is selected

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Set System management FD (basic software #1) in PBX FDD If you are ready, Hit the return key
o. When the Return key is pressed

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Format HD in PBX Format now ! !
The HD is being formatted.
p. When formatting is completed

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM System management file install to PBX HD Install now ! !
ND-45687 (E)
q. When the system management fifle has been installed

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Create directory on HD in PBX Creating now ! !
Creating a directory on the HD.
r.
When the directory has been created on the HD

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Data install Set install FD to FDD in PBX If you are ready, Hit the return key
ND-45687 (E)
s.
When the Return key is pressed

[INSTI] System Install Data: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Install Now! !
Install passage 0: end
The data of the FD is being installed.
ND-45687 (E)
t.
When Data Install is completed

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM Are all FD loaded? Yes / No
When No is selected, the display returns to (r).
u. When Yes is selected

[INSTI] DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM
Install all end
Return to menu? Yes / No
When No is selected, the display returns to (a). Select Yes to return to the menu.
ND-45687 (E)
LPRO CM0-11
LPRO
Processor Occupancy List
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command provides occupancy statistics for the local processor, including: Occupancy data for the past 24 hours, recorded at either 10-minute or 1-hour intervals Maximum occupancy for the past 24-hour period Average occupancy over the same 24-hour period
The results can be printed but not displayed. 3. Precautions None 4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure Example for the IMG
Processor Occupancy List INTERVAL: 1 INTERVAL: Measurement information for output interval 1 - Every ten minutes 2 - Every one hour
Ready?
ND-45687 (E)
LPRO CM0-11
Example (for the IMG)
LP OCCUPANCY LIST TIME 17:00 18:00 19:00 MM 0.0 13.7 19.3 SYSTEM 0.0 13.7 19.3
AVERAGE
XX.XX
XX.XX
- - - - - -Maximum occupancy ratio of 10 seconds - - - - - (94/10/2315:49 to 94/10/24 16:50 MAXIMUM DATE TIME 26.7 10/24 15:25
ND-45687 (E)
MBBS CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
MBBS
Make Busy of Processor Bus
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the processor bus. This command is for the UMGx only. 3. Precautions If the BUSR circuit card corresponding to a Specified processor bus is made busy by the MB switch, make busy resetting in software is not allowed, and an error is indicated. In this case, the make busy state can be reset using the MB switch of the BUSR circuit card. The system will not allow all processor buses to be made busy at the same time. Accordingly, if the system is operating with one processor bus, any attempt to make busy that bus will result in an error.
4. Related Reference Command None. 5. Entry Procedure
Make Busy of Processor Bus PBUS NO:0 MB:1 WRT? Y
PBUS No.: MB:
Processor Bus Number (0/1) Make Busy Information 0: Idle 1: Busy
Note:
When the Processor Bus Number is entered, the current status is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
MBLE CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
MBLE
Make Busy of LENS
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of LENS (Line Equipment Numbers). 3. Precautions If the LENS of a trunk or station which is busy on a call is entered, the make busy request is executed after the call is completed. When PKG CHECK is displayed, it means that the circuit card is not mounted or has been made busy by the MB switch. Proceed to the next operation by pressing the ENTER key. When the designated LENS is a port of the SMINT, SMINT: XXXXX-X is displayed. (Ex. SMINT: EMM00-0)
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: 5. Entry Procedure MBTK, MBST DMBL, DMBS, DMBT
Make Busy of LENS LENS:000001 MB:1 WRT? Y
LENS: MB:
Line Equipment Number Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy
Note:
When the LENS is entered, the current status of the entered LENS is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
MBPM CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
MBPM
Make Busy of Port Microprocessor
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the circuit card in which the port microprocessor is contained. This setting and resetting is performed individually for each circuit card. If the location of the circuit card containing the port microprocessors is specified in this command, the operating state of all circuit cards mounted in the associated unit is displayed. 3. Precautions If the specified circuit card is made busy by the MB switch, any attempt to reset the make-busy state in software will result in an error. In this case, the MB switch can be used to place the circuit card in operation. If the circuit card is not mounted, the make busy state will be displayed; but, an error will result if an attempt is made to reset the circuit card. When specifying the PMN (Port Microprocessor Location Number) of a multiple-width circuit card (such as the DTI, etc.), be sure to specify the actual mounting location. If setting of the make busy state is specified, this command also checks whether the request has been executed as specified. This confirmation occurs once, after two seconds. If the request has not been performed as specified, UNDER PROCESSING is displayed. To check whether execution has been completed, this command must be input again. The following messages are displayed during and after execution of this command. EXIST BUSY PORT: If any circuits (line/trunk) of the specified circuit card are busy, this message will be displayed. However, setting of the make busy state is allowed even if this message is displayed. UNDER PROCESSING: If make busy has not been executed two seconds after inputting the command, this message is displayed. 4. Related Reference Command Assignment Line/Trunk: MBST, MBTK, MBLE Display Line/Trunk: DMBS, DMBT, DMBL
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system:
PMN:00100 MB:1 WRT? Y LC
The type of circuit card is displayed here. CIRCUIT CARD TYPE LC TRK DTI RST ATI DLC MODEM T GWT Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits) XX X XX Group Number Unit Number Module Group Number
PMN:
MB:
Make Busy Information (0/1). 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy When PMN is entered, the current status of the entered Port Microprocessor is displayed, thus enter the data from the MAT.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system (Unit 0 of PIMJ is used in the following example.)
Make Busy of Port Microprocessor PMN : Port Microprocessor PMN :00000 XXXX Equipment Number (5 digits) MB : Make Busy Information (0/1) MB :X 0 : Make Idle 1 : Make Busy 0 GROUP NO. OPE N-OPE # # # * * * * * * * 5 10 15 20 23
Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
PMN: MB:
Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits) Make Busy Information (0/1) 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy
Note 1: Indicates a circuit card using 8 ports (e.g. 8 RST) is mounted in Slot 4 and is in make busy state. ##
is displayed on Group 00 because no data is assigned.

Note 2: Indicates a circuit card using 16 ports (e.g. 16 COT) is mounted in Slot 6 and is in make busy state. Note 3: Indicates a circuit card using 24 ports (e.g. 24 DTI) is mounted in Slot 9 and is in make busy state.
ND-45687 (E)
MBRT CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
MBRT
Make Busy of Route
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used for assigning IDLE/BUSY status for all the trunks in the route designated. 3. Precautions Even if there is any trunk under Make-Busy (or Idle) status in the route, Make-Busy setting (or clearing) is executed with respect to all the trunks in the route. While execution of this command is in progress, the Trunk Number of the trunk under processing and message Making Busy Now!! or Making Idle Now!! are displayed on the CRT screen. When a specific circuit card is not mounted or is under Make Busy status with its MB switch set in the UP position, the message PKG CHECK is printed in the list.
RT: 1 MB: 0 WRT? Y
RT: MB:
Route Number Make Busy Information (0/1) 0: Idle 1: Busy The parameters of the data to be provided to the printer are as follows. - TK: Trunk Number - LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) - Make Busy OK (Make Idle OK): The trunk concerned has been made busy (or idle) as designated. - Already Busy (Already Idle): Before this command has been executed, the trunk concerned was already under Make Busy (or Make Idle) status as designated. - PKG CHECK: The circuit card is not mounted or MB switch on the circuit card is in the UP position. Thus, Make Busy status cannot be changed by means of this command.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
MBSM CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
MBSM
Make Busy of System Message Printout
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command allows or inhibits the automatic printout of system messages on the stand-alone printer. 3. Precautions This command is allowed only when bit 4 of System Data 1, Index 86 is 1 (automatic system message printing function in service). Port specification by this command has priority over the following data: a. b. c. System Data 1, Index 38 (printer installation specification) System Data 1, Index 39 (system message output port specification) System Data 1, Indexes 116 to 121 (port type specification)
Make Busy of System Message Printout PORT NO.: 0 MB: 0 WRT? Y
PORT NO.: MB:
Port Number (0-7) Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy
Note:
When PORT No. is entered, the current status of the entered PORT No. is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
MBST CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
MBST
Make Busy of Station
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations. 3. Precautions Make busy assignment is executed even if the specified station is engaged in a call. Upon completion of the call, the make busy assignment will be put into effect. When PKG CHECK is displayed, it means that the circuit card is not mounted or has been made busy by the MB switch. Press ENTER to return to TN to enter new data.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: 5. Entry Procedure MBLE DMBL, DMBS LLEN, LHEN, LSTN, LHST
Make Busy of Station TN:1 MB:1 WRT? Y STN:3155
TN: STN: MB:
Tenant Number Station Number Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy
Note:
When TN and STN are entered, the current status of the specified station is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
MBTC CM0-04
MBTC
Make Busy of Trunk - Continuous
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function This command is used to display trunks that are busy and to make busy a range of trunks. 3. Precautions Be sure not to make all trunks busy.
Make Busy of Trunk - Continuous RT:10 MB: 0 TK 01234,56789 TK 01234,56789 MB MB X: 1100 00000 10X: 1X:00000 00000 11X: 2X: 0001 12X: 3X: 13X: 4X: 14X: 5X: 15X: 6X: 16X: 7X: 17X: 8X: 18X: 9X: 19X: TK 01234,56789 MB 20X: 21X: 22X: 23X: 24X: 25X: TK:1 TO
RT: TK: MB:
Route Number Trunk Number Make Busy Information (0/1) 0 - Make Idle 1 - Make Busy In the example above, trunks 1, 2, and 23 are busy.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
MBTK CM0-01 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
MBTK
Make Busy of Trunk
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-01 2. Function This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. 3. Precautions Make busy assignment is executed even if the specified trunk is engaged in a call. Upon completion of the call, the make busy assignment will be put into effect. When PACKAGE is displayed, it means that the circuit card is not mounted, or has been made busy by the MB switch. Proceed Press the Backspace key to go back to TK.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: 5. Entry Procedure MBLE DMBL, DMBT LLEN, LHEN, LTRK
Make Busy Trunk RT:1 MB:1 WRT? Y TK:3
RT: TK: MB:
Route Number Trunk Number Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy (outgoing) (depends on setting of ARTD) Outgoing make busy Package make busy Blocking make busy 2: Make busy (bothway) When RT and TK are entered, the current status of the specified trunk is displayed.
Note:
ND-45687 (E)
MMNF CM0-11
MMNF
Make Menu File
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command is used to make menu files. 3. Precautions Make sure the appropriate disk is loaded before making an addition.
Make Menu File CCIS ACD PSM VMM FMM TMM OAI AEP ISDN ACD (OAI) :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0
Change MENU (Y/N)?
MENU Addition (0/1) 0: 1:
Not Addition Addition
ND-45687 (E)
NDBU CM0-04 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
NDBU
Name Display Data Back Up
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-04 2. Function Name Display Data Save This parameter is necessary to save into a floppy disk the Name Display Data assigned by the ANDD command. Name Display Data Verify This parameter is necessary to verify the Name Display Data in the system with the Name Display Data stored in a floppy disk. Name Display Data Load This parameter is necessary to load the Name Display Data stored in a floppy disk into the system. 3. Precautions Before saving the Name Display Data, the floppy disk to be used must be formatted (initialized). When executing data Save/Load using this command, list up the data using the List Up command (LNDD in advance to save. When loading the data, be sure to load the data after listing up check errors. Also, after the data have been loaded, list up the data by the List Up command. Be sure to perform data corrections before and after loading in this manner. Since data loading is executed as per the LEN number, the correspondence between station numbers and the user information cannot be guaranteed when the correspondence between LEN and Station Numbers before data loading and after data loading differ from each other.
4. Related Reference Command For Name Display DataAssignment: ANDD Deletion: ANDD Display: ANDD List up: LNDD
ND-45687 (E)
NDBU CM0-04 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure:
Name Display Data Backup [INPUT PARAMETERS] (S:Save L:Load V:Verify P:Verify with Error List) FUNCTION: S [FILE INFORMATION IN FD] OFFICE: NEC CORPORATION DATE: 85/01/01 FLOPPY DISK SET IN DRIVE-A READY FOR OPERATION (Y/N) ?Y
File Information displays.
Function:
OFFICE: DATE:
Operation Mode S: Save L: Load V: Verify P: Verify with Error List Office Name Date of the File
The following messages are displayed during execution or upon completion of this command: FLOPPY DISK IS FILLED: There is no space in the floppy disk. COMPLETED: ERRORS: Save, Load or Verify has been completed. Number of Unmatched Data. This message is displayed only in the case of FUNCTION = V (Verify).
ND-45687 (E)
PMBU CM0-11 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
PMBU
Port Microprocessor Back Up [for Engineering use only]
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command saves the contents of PM (port microprocessor) into FD (floppy disk) or verifies them. Information of firmware (program code) also appears on the screen. 3. Precautions When an error message appears on the screen after data entry, see Table 2-11. The FD (floppy disk) in which you are going to save the PM memory should be formatted. When you cannot read out the information of the firmware in the PM memory, by entering SP number ( = firmware number), ISSUE ( = issue of software) and office name, you can take out the information.
Table 2-11 Counteraction Table against Command Execution Error ERROR MESSAGE CAUSE OF ERROR RESPONSE
Disk I/O Error
Flaw on the FD < In SAVE Mode > The contents of the FD have been Format FD. destroyed, rejecting Data writing. If you have the same result even using the formatted FD, change the FD. < In VERIFY Mode > Data stored in the FD is invalid.
Write Protect Error
FD is protected by write protect notch.
Confirm the data stored in the FD is necessary or not. If it is unnecessary data put a protect seal on the notch, then use it after formatting.
File Not Found
There is no file in the FD which is Replace it with the proper one. inserted into the Drive.
ND-45687 (E)
PMBU CM0-11 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Port Microprocessor Memory Backup [Input Parameter] Function: v (S:Save V:Verify P:Verify with Error list) PMN : 00010 (PM Number) Capacity: 64 (K Byte) Note [File Information] SP Number: 0455 ISSUE : 06 PMN : 00010 Office : NEC Corporation Date : xx/xx/xx FLOPPY DISK SETTING ON DRIVE-A READY (Y/N)?
COMPLETED! RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?
Function:
Modes S: V: P:
Save Verify Verify with Error list
PMN:
The location of the Circuit Card on which the firmware program is mounted. XX X XX Group Number Unit Number Module Group Number
Capacity:
Capacity of Port Microprocessors memory to save into FD (2/4/8/16/32/64). Floppy Disk is set in the Drive-A? (Y/N): Set a formatted FD into Drive-A.
Note:
Enter the capacity of PM memory which you are going to save into a FD. Parameters of File information appear on the display. Firmware Software ISSUE displayed again Office Name xx/xx/xx
SP Number: ISSUE: PMN: OFFICE: DATE:
ND-45687 (E)
RALM SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
RALM
Release Alarm
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is used for clearing the fault indications. 3. Precautions When an alarm is indicated and the MAT is initially powered on, the MAT will automatically print out any Fault Data in the system. (The printer must be turned on.)
Release Alarm RELEASE (Y/N)? Y
When processing has been completed, the following displays:
RELEASE (Y/N)? Y RELEASED! ! RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?
RELEASED:
Completion of alarm release.
RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?: Indication of next prompt Y: Return to MENU. N: Start operation again.
ND-45687 (E)
RLST CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
RLST
Release of Station/Trunk
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to release a station or trunk. 3. Precautions One of the following messages is displayed, depending on the connection status of the specified station or trunk. IDLE: BUSY: MAKE BUSY: LOCKOUT: Idle state Busy state Make busy state Lockout state
The busy tone (reorder tone) state is displayed as BUSY. When the trunk number is input (Type 2), the line equipment number (LENS) of the trunk is displayed. If this command is used to force the release of a station, and that station is in the off-hook state, recall is indicated. The STN (Station No.) or LENS of a Dterm must be designated for the prime line.
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For a Station
Release of Station/Trunk TYPE:1 TN:1 IDLE RELEASE (Y/N)? Y STN:3111
Connection status is displayed here. In the case of Busy Tone state or Reorder Tone state, BUSY is displayed. When the status is BUSY and the station/trunk is connected to a certain destination, the information of the connected destination is displayed as follows.
Destination is a station: Destination is a trunk:
LENS: XXXXXX TN: X STN:XXXX LENS: XXXXXX RT: XXX TK: XXX 1: Stations for Release 2: Trunk for Release 3: LENS for Release Kind of Release 1: Station Release 2: Trunk Release 3: LENS Release Tenant Number Station Number Route Number Trunk Route Number Intraoffice Route Number Trunk Number Line Equipment Number
TYPE:
TN: STN: RT:
TK: LENS:
ND-45687 (E)
For a Trunk:
Release of Station/Trunk TYPE:2 RT:1 IDLE RELEASE (Y/N)? Y TK:1 LENS:000160
LENS of the designated trunk is displayed.
TYPE: TN: RT: TK: LENS: For LENS:
Kind of Release (Enter 2.) 2: Release of a Trunk Tenant Number Route Number Trunk Number Line Equipment Number
Release of Station/Trunk TYPE:3 LENS:000001 IDLE RELEASE (Y/N)? Y
TYPE: LENS:
Kind of Release (Enter 3.) 3: Release of a LENS Line Equipment Number
ND-45687 (E)
RVTL CM0-09 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
RVTL
Remove Virtual Tie Line Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-09 2. Function This command is used to delete a schedule for virtual tie line implementation period in Virtual Tie Line Service. 3. Precautions The entry range (DATE) of the Date Range is within one year.
Example:
01/01-12/31: 12/01-11/30:
One year from January 1st to December 31st. One year from December 1st to November 30th of the following year.
The Week Range is entered as follows.

Example:
MON-FRI: SAT-SUN: MON- MON:
Five days from Monday to Friday Two days from Saturday to Sunday One day if the same Monday is designated.
Designation in reverse direction MON- SUN: TUE-SUN: SAT-WED: Seven days when going back by one week Six days when going back by two weeks Five days when going back by three weeks
When the Date Range is one day, only the starting week is displayed. The relationship between the Data Range and the Week Range is as follows.
Example:
In the case of DATA; 11/08-11/22, WEEK; MON-WED In a case where 11/08 is Wednesday, 11/22 is Wednesday of two weeks after. In the designated Date Range, 8th is the first Monday, 13th through 15th are Monday through Wednesday of next week, and 20th through 22nd are Monday through Wednesday of the week after next. Thus, these seven days are the subject for processing. When displaying the currently assigned data by designating a specific date or by batch designation (designation of a specific period), the data is displayed as follows. If only one day is to be deleted, the data of that specific day is displayed. If a specific period is designated, the data of only the first date of the designated period is displayed. Note, however, that if no data is assigned on the first day of the designated period, Error is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: List up: 5. Entry Procedure AVTL LVTL
Remove Virtual Tie Line Data TL / SPC:
NEXT? Y
TL / SPC:
Kind of Tie Line (T/S) T - Time Link S - Semi Permanent Connection
For T (Time Link) selection

Remove Virtual Tie Line Data DATE : 03/27-03/31 PTN: 0 WEEK : TUE-SUN IC/OG : OG RT: 12 TK: 1 D-LENS : 001014 CH: 6 CALLING: 1111 NEXT? Y
ND-45687 (E)
a.
If Y is entered after Next? the display changes as follows:
Remove Virtual Tie Line Data KEYPAD: 1 CALLED : 2222 SUB NO : 123 TIME : 08:30-17:20 DEL? RESULT : 03/27
DATE:
PTN: WEEK:
IC/OG:
RT: TK: D-LENS: CH: CALLING: KEYPAD: CALLED: SUB NO: TIME:
RESULT:
[aa]/[bb]-[cc]/[dd]: Date Range aa: Start Month (01-12) bb: Start Day (01-31) cc: Last Month (01-12) dd: Last Day (01-31) Pattern Number (0-15) [ee]-[ff]: Week Range ee: Start week (SUN, MON, TUES, WED, THURS, FRI, SAT) ff: Last week (SUN, MON, TUES, WED, THURS, FRI, SAT) King of Assign (IC/OC) IC: Incoming Call OG: Outgoing Call Route Number Display Trunk Number Display LENS of Dch Bch Number Display Calling Number Display Keypad Information (0/1) Called Number Display Sub Address Number Display (Only Assign Data is) [aa]:[bb]-[cc]:[dd]: Time Range aa: Start Time Display bb: Start Minute Display cc: Last Time Display dd: Last Minute Display [aa]/[bb]: Result Display aa: Month bb: Day
ND-45687 (E)
For S (Semi Permanent Connection) selection

Remove Virtual Tie Line Data PTN: 0 IC/OG: D-LENS: CALLING: SUB:
RT:
TK: CH:
PTN: IC/OG:
RT: TK: D-LENS: CH: CALLING: CALLED: SUB:
SUB NO:
Pattern Number (0-15) Kind of Assign (IC/OG) IC - Incoming OG - Outgoing Route Number Trunk Number Lens of Dch Bch Number (6-24: every 6ch/1-30) Calling Number (Max. 24 digits) Called Number (Max. 24 digits) Kind of Sub Address (0/1) 0 - Not Assigned 1 - Assign Sub Address (Max. 12 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
SINZ SYS Business, Hotel

siness, tel
SINZ
System Initialize
1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS 2. Function This command is used to initialize the PBX from the MAT. Also, at the time of system initialization, this command allows the programs and the office data to be loaded from a hard disk into the RAM. If no office data file exists in the hard disk, the system starts off-line. 3. Precautions This command is used to initialize the system. It is generally not used during system operation. However, if this command is used during system operation, it is necessary to check the operating state of the system. During system initialization, UNDER-PROCESSING is displayed on the screen. In some cases, when the operation returns to MENU, a password is necessary to access the system.
System Initialize 1. System Initialize 2. Office Data Load & System Initialize 3. Program Load & System Initialize 4. Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize Ready?: Yes/No
a. Using digit keys, key, and key, select a mode. With a mode selected a supplementary explanation corresponding to the selected mode will be displayed. When the Enter key is pressed, the operation proceeds to the next step. When the / key is pressed, the screen returns to MENU screen. b. Using key and key, select whether the processing designated by this command is to be executed or not (Yes/No). When the Enter key is pressed, the processing will be executed. With No selected, the operation returns to mode selection.
ND-45687 (E)
SPTS CM0-11 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
SPTS
Scanning of Port Status
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command displays momentarily the working status of PM (= Port Micro processor) on MG (= Module Group), Unit and Group basis. By entering Module Group Number, you can see the following status on a Module Group basis. (BY): All Busy (ID): Idle at least one (MB): Under Make Busy Status (- -): Not mounted Note By entering Unit Number, you can obtain the following information on a circuit card basis. [On a circuit card basis] (ON): On-Line status (MB): Make Busy/Not mounted [On a circuit level basis] (I): Idle (M): Line Busy/Not programmed By entering the Group number, you will see the type of the Circuit Card (ISSUE, Type, Group Status, OnLine, MB, and not mounted). Each circuit level information (TN number, STN number, TEC, Status) appears. This information appears when the Circuit Card is in make busy status (MB key is set upward) or when the designated location has no Circuit Card.
Note:
3. Precautions To interrupt the processing while PM status is being observed, use the following keys:
KEY FUNCTION
/ ESC 4. Related Reference Command Make Busy: Display:
All processing halts returning to menu. You can resume the processing or return to PM designation.
MBST, MBTK, MBLE, MBPM DLEN, DISS
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure Display of Scanning (by designating MG)

Scanning of Port Status Type? (l:MG/2:Unit/3:Group):1 MG Number?: 0 Group 22 23 Unit 0 DS MO Unit 1 CF Unit 2 . . ID BY Unit 3 Scanning Package Status ID : Idle MB: Make Busy BY : Busy --: Not Mounted <ESC>Abort
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 LC LC LC LC DL DL LC LC LC DL DL KT TK AI KS RS LC LC LC LC ID ID ID BY BY .. MB MB MB MB BY BY ID ID ID MB MB BY BY BY ID .. .. .. LD LC LC DL DL DL DL LC LC LC LC TA AI RS RS CF SM DT AI RS BY MB BY .. .. ID ID ID ID MB MB MB MB BY BY BY ID ID ID ID ID BY ID ID HU DT SM CF AI TK DL DL DL
MO MO
MB BY MB .. .. ID ID ID . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID ID ID MB . . . . . . . .
Type: MG Number:
Display Type (Enter 1) 1: MG Module Group Number
Type of Circuit Cards and the working status of PM in each Group appear on the display. (Refer to Table 2-12 below.)
Table 2-12 Type of Circuit Cards TYPE OF CIRCUIT CARDS FUNCTION NAME
LC TK RS AI DL CF MO DT DS
Line Circuit Trunk Register Sender Attendant Interface Digital Line Circuit 3 party conference Modem Pool Trunk Digital Interface Trunk DST
ND-45687 (E)
Display of Scanning (by designating Unit)

Scanning of Port Status Scan Type ? (1:MG 2:UNIT 3:GROUP) : 2 MG No. ? : b
0 L C PKG Kind > Status > Level-7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 O M M O O O O M O O O O N B B N N N N B N N N N B B B B I I B I M M M M B B B B M M M M M M M B I I I I B B B M B B B B I I I I B B B B B B B B I I I I I I I I I I I B B B B I M M M M M M M M O M M O M M O O O M M M N B B N B B N N N B B B B B B B B B B B I M M M I M M M I I M B B L L I I M B M I B I I I B I B I B I B
Scanning PORT STATUS I = IDLE B = BUSY <ESC> - Abort

10 L D D L C L L C 12 L T C K 16 R S 20 R T A S K I 22
L = LOCK OUT M = MAKE BUSY
UNIT No : c
5 L L L L C C C C
Display Type (Enter 2) 2: Unit Note Unit Number: Unit Number Type: The status of Circuit Cards in each Unit can be displayed.
Note:
The entire PIM (two units) will display.
ND-45687 (E)
Display of Scanning (by designating Group)
Scanning of Port Status SCAN TYPE ? (1:MG 2: UNIT 3:GROUP) : 3 MG No. ? : d SP No. : 0100 TN 1 1 2 2 5 5 7 15 STN 2400 2410 2415 2420 2431 2444 2451 2460 UNIT No. ?: e ISSUE: 01 GROUP No. ? : f KIND OF PACKAGE:
Scanning
<ESC? - Abort L C O N I B B L M B I B 16LC ON LINE IDLE BUSY BUSY LOCK OUT MAKE BUSY BUSY IDLE BUSY
Level - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PACKAGE STATUS: TEC (TELEPHONE CLASS) : 1=DP (10PPS) : 1=DP (10PPS) : 1=DP (10PPS) : 1=DP (10PPS) : 2=BP : 2=BP : 1=DP (10PPS) : 3=DP/PB :
Display Type (Enter 3) 3: Group MG Number: Module Group Number Unit Number: Unit Number Group Number: Group Number Type: The Issue and Type of Circuit Cards, the status of the Group, Terminal data of each circuits and their status appear on the display.
Note:
Unassigned ports are displayed as space.
ND-45687 (E)
Display of Scanning (by designating Group-Trunk)
Scanning of Port Status SCAN TYPE ? : (1:MG 2:UNIT 3:GROUP) : 3 MG No. ? : D SP No. : 0100 RT Level- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 UNIT NO. ?: e ISSUE : 01 TK GROUP No. ? : f : : PACKAGE STATUS : TCL (TRUNK CLASS) : : : : : 1 = DDD LINE : 2 = FX LINE : 3 = WATS LINE : 10 = DICTATION TRUNK : KIND OF PACKAGE
Scanning
<ESC> - Abort T O O N 4COT ON LINE
1 2 3 4
15 20 22 25
M B I B
MAKE BUSY BUSY IDLE BUSY
Type: Display Type (Enter 3) MG Number: Module Group Number Unit Number: Unit Number Group Number: Group Number The issue and Type of Circuit Cards, the status of the group, the terminal data of each circuits (= level) and their status are appeared.
Note:
Unassigned ports are displayed as space.
ND-45687 (E)
SRTS CM0-11 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
SRTS
Scanning of Route Status
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-11 2. Function This command displays the designated trunk status (busy/idle) at predetermined intervals. (maximum 15 routes) 3. Precautions When you want to interrupt the processing while trunk status is being observed, the following keys are effective.
KEY FUNCTION
/ ESC
All processing halts. This takes you out of the command and returns you to the Main menu. You can resume the processing or return to route designation.
Make busy and lockout status do not belong to idle status nor to busy status. Any route status does not appear when the number of trunking in the designated route is 0. While entering route number which is to be observed, you can use the following keys.
KEY FUNCTION
ESC INSERT DELETE
Stop entering the data before reaching 15 routes. Insert additional data at the cursor location. Delete data at the cursor location.
ND-45687 (E)
SRTS CM0-11 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure Display of Route Observation Entry

Display Route Number? (Max 15) RT Number: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 1 2 3 4 5 6: 6 7: 7 8: 8 <ESC>-Input Data End <INS>-Insert <DEL>-Delete
Input data is correct? (Y/N): Y Print out Required? (Y/N): Y Checking Trunk Configuration (XXX)
RT Number: Observed Route Number Input Data is correct? (Y/N): Confirmation of Observed Route Number Trunk Configuration: XXX= Trunk Number Display of Route Observation Status
Route Status RT/Number of Trunk 1/ 2/ 3/ 4/ 5/ 6/ 7/ 15 20 16 1 18 30 22 Time10:00 Time10:05 Idle Busy Idle Busy 10 5 10 5 Time10:10 Idle Busy Time10:15 Idle Busy Scanning Time10:20 Idle Busy
RT: Route Number Number of Trunk: Number of Trunks in each Route Time: Sampling Time Idle: Number of idle trunks Busy: Number of busy trunks To return to the display (1) while Route Status is on the screen, press ESC. Stop display? (0: stop, 1: continue) displays. 0: Return to Display of Route Observation Entry 1: Route Observation Status restarts On the screen, at one minute interval, the designated route status (Number of trunks, idle trunks and busy trunks) is displayed with time indication.
ND-45687 (E)
Note:
TDBU CM0-03 Business, Hotel
TDBU
Traffic Data Back Up
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to back up traffic data which has been stored on the hard disk of the MAT onto a floppy disk on the basis of type of traffic measurement data such as Terminal Traffic, Route Traffic, Station Peg Count, ATT Peg Count and Route Peg Count. 3. Precautions The following types of traffic measurement can be backed up: a. b. c. d. e. Terminal Traffic Route Traffic Station Peg Count ATT Peg Count Route Peg Count
MS-DOS formatted FDs are required.
4. Related Reference Command Display: Assignment: 5. Entry Procedure DTF1, DTF2, DTF3, PTF1 ATRF
Traffic Data Back Up Selection of back up data:1.Terminal Traffic 2. Route Traffic 3. Station Peg Count 4. ATT Peg Count 5. Route Peg Count Please insert floppy disk. Selection of drive (FDD): A B set OK? Yes/No
ND-45687 (E)
TSTL CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
TSTL
Test Station Line
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command causes the CPU to execute line tests and displays the results of the tests performed. In accordance with the Line Test Start Order given from the CPU, the three kinds of tests shown in Table 2-13 below are executed in sequence in the time periods shown in Figure 2-7. As shown in Figure 2-7, the results of the tests can be known in about 500 msec. by Test Scan Order given by the CPU. Figure 2-8 shows the functional block diagram.
Table 2-13 Kind of Tests ITEM No. TEST ITEM CONTENT OF TEST
Ground Test (GT) 1 False Cross and Ground Test (FCG) Continuity Test (CON)
Test as to whether ground exists on either A wire or B wire. If ground has been detected at less than 25 resistance, the test result becomes invalid. Test as to whether -48 V exists on either A wire or B wire. If -48 V via less than 25 resistance has been detected, the test result becomes invalid. Test as to whether a telephone set is connected to the line being tested. If a telephone set is connected to the line via more than 10 resistance, the test result becomes invalid.
Command Input START 0-133 ms GT TEST 133 ms
GT RESULT FCG TEST 133 ms
FCG RESULT CON TEST 133 ms
CON RESULT
400-532 msec
Figure 2-7
Line Test Sequence
ND-45687 (E)
TEL
LC
LTST LTST CON CR CON CR DETECT CKT.
LTST (PH-M16)
CON RESULT OK/NG
CON RELAY CONTROL FCG LTST -48 V/G DETECT CKT. GT RESULT FCG RESULT
LINE TEST START
SEQUENCE CKT. G
-48V FCG
Figure 2-8
Functional Block Diagram of TSTL
3. Precautions The starting and ending test station numbers must consist of the same number of digits, and the test ending station number must be a higher number than the test starting station number. If tests are to be executed for a single station, the station to be tested must be entered as both the starting and ending station number. For the line test sequence and the functional block diagram, refer to Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8, respectively.
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure
Test Station Line TN:1 STN:3111 TO 3113 CON: OK
GT:OK FCG:OK
TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]: Station Number a: First Station Number b: Last Station Number When only one station number is to be tested, the first station number [a] and the last station number [b] are the same. GT: FCG: CON: Ground Test (OK/NG) False Cross and Ground Test (OK/NG) Continuity Test (OK/NG)
These parameters are automatically displayed after the test has ended.
ND-45687 (E)
TTLC CM0-03 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
TTLC
Test Trunk Line Connection
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03 2. Function This command is used to test the operation of trunk routes (OGT, BWT, etc.), using the LTST. 3. Precautions The following must be assigned before using this command. a. b. Assignment of Individual Trunk Access service. Assignment of Trunk Test data for this command. The ATTD command is used to set the Trunk Test Data.
If the designated trunk is not assigned, its test result is not printed out. This trunk test can only be used for trunks which can receive PB. (The LTST can only send PB signal.) Other commands cannot execute during waiting for start time on TYPE = 2.
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure For Immediate Execution
TYPE:1 RT:1 TK:1
TO:10 TO:2
RESULT: 2-1 CONNECTION OK!
While the test is in progress, the Route and Trunk Number of the trunk which was last tested are displayed.
Test Type (Enter 1.) 1: Immediate Execution RT: [a]TO[b]: Range of Routes a: Start Route Number b: Last Route Number TK: [c]TO[d]: Range of Trunks c: Start Trunk Number d: Last Trunk Number RESULT [e] to [f]: Tested Route & Trunk e: RT at the end of test f: TK at the end of test TYPE: For Schedule Execution
TYPE:2 RT:1 TO:10 TK:1 TO:2 RESULT: 2-1 CONNECTION OK! START TIME: xx:xx PRESENT TIME: xx:xx READY?
While the test is in progress, the Route and Trunk Number of the trunk which was last tested are displayed. START TIME initially displays the same time as PRESENT TIME. Change the START TIME as needed. (WAITING flashes until the clock reaches the specified start time.)
TYPE: RT:
Test Type (Enter 2.) 2: Schedule Execution [a]TO[b]: Range of Routes a: First Route Number b: Last Route Number
ND-45687 (E)
TK:
[c]TO[d]: Range of Trunks c: First Trunk Number d: Last Trunk Number RESULT [e] to [f]: Tested Route & Trunk e: RT at the end of test f: TK at the end of test CONNECTION OK!: Processing completed correctly. CONNECTION NG (XX): Processing is aborted. XX indicates aborted status. Refer to the following table.
CODE (XX) MEANING
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 15 FF
Note
Test function of subscriber is invalid. Designated route number is incorrect. Designated trunk number is incorrect. Designated trunk is busy. SENDER is busy. Charging is impossible Origination is restricted. REGISTER is busy. Designated trunk number is incorrect for Hooking. Designated trunk is busy for Hooking. Inter-digit is time over at sending dial code. Test processing error has occurred. Contents output through printer. (Refer to message following and printed out message.) The test result of the trunk displayed in parameter RESULT is automatically displayed.
TRUNKS IS NOT ASSIGNED: Designated trunk is not assigned. LTST PKG ERROR: LTST Circuit Card is not mounted, MB switch is ON or LTST is not active.
Note:
One of the followings message is printed out when the status code is FFin CONNECTION NG.
PROCESSING ERROR: Test processing has failed. Trunk test was not executed Internal parameter error Last order is being executed.
ND-45687 (E)
LTST NOT ASSIGNED: LTST is not assigned. LTST PKG BUSY: LTST is being used in another test. TRUNK BUSY/MAKE BUSY: Designated trunk has been made busy, and test cannot be executed. LTST MAKE BUSY: STA connected to LTST has been made busy. SENDING HOWLER: Howler is being sent. LIST BUSY: STA connected to LTST is busy. NO RESPONSE: There is no response. Time out with no answer. Time out because test tone response has not been assigned in ATTD. DIAL FORMAT NG: Dialing format is incorrect. RECEIVE RBT: Ring Back Tone is received. (Illegal response) RECEIVE TEST TONE: Test Tone is received. (Illegal response) RECEIVE DIAL TONE: Dial Tone is received. (Illegal response) PB IS SENDING: PB signal is being sent. LTST is busy under illegal condition. TEST DATA NOT ASSIGNED: Trunk test data for the route is not assigned in the ATTD command. ROUTE NOT ASSIGNED: Designated route is not assigned.
ND-45687 (E)
XATM CM0-10 Business, Hotel
XATM
X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function This command is used for readout of the Cell Traffic information on the following circuit cards: PA-SC40 (CLAD) PA-SC41 (CIFP)
3. Precautions This command is used for Business system only. 6100 version software or later must be installed in the system. The ATM module must be connected with the PBX.
4. Related Reference Command AIOC
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure When the CLAD circuit card is mounted on the designated LENS:
X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis 1 :CELL Monitoring LENS :XXXXX Diagnosis Results Indication Area Number of send cell. : XXXXXXXXXX Number of receive cell. : XXXXXXXXXX Number of scrap cell by cell detection of insert mistake. : XXXXX Number of scrap cell by SN missing detection. : XXXXX Number of scrap cell by SNP error. : XXXXX Number of SN correction cell by SNP error. : XXXXX
PKG-TYPE : CLAD Read number of send cell : YES /NO Read number of receive cell : YES /NO Read error counter : YES /NO VPI :XXX VCI :XXXX READY? Y
1: LENS:
CELL Monitoring Assign 1 only. Line Equipment Number XX X XX Group Number (00-23) Unit Number (0-3) Module Group Number (00-07)
PKG - TYPE: CLAD or CIFP is displayed according to LENS information. Read number of send cell: Yes: Reads out the number of send cell. Read number of receive cell: Yes: Reads out the number of received cell. Read error counter: Yes: Reads out the error counter. Designation of VPI and VCI is required. VPI: Virtual Path Identifier VCI: Virtual Circuit Identifier
ND-45687 (E)
When the CIFP circuit card is mounted on the designated LENS:
X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis 1 :CELL Monitoring LENS :XXXXX Diagnosis Results Indication Area Number of send cell. (circuit ATM Module) : XXXXXXXXXX Number of receive cell. (ATM Module circuit) : XXXXXXXXXX Number of undefine cell from communication line. : XXXXX Number of undefine cell from ATM Module. : XXXXX Number of mistaken cell from communication line. ; XXXXX Number of mistaken cell from ATM Module: : XXXXX
PKG-TYPE : CIFP Read number of send cell : YES /NO Read number of receive cell : YES /NO Read error counter : YES /NO
READY? Y
1: LENS:
CELL Monitoring Assign 1 only. Line Equipment Number XX X XX Group Number (00-23) Unit Number (0-3) Module Group Number (00-07)
PKG - TYPE: CLAD or CIFP is displayed according to LENS information. Read number of send cell: Yes: Reads out the number of send cell. Read number of receive cell: Yes: Reads out the number of received cell. Read error counter: Yes: Reads out the error counter.
ND-45687 (E)
XHFC CM0-10 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
XHFC
X-ray HFC [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)]
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function This command is used to execute the following diagnoses: HFC Card Diagnosis By executing a read/write check of the RAM and ROM sum check, etc., this command diagnoses the HFC card for its normality. If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command causes its detailed data to be displayed on the MAT screen and printed out by the printer. Hard Disk Diagnosis By executing a read/write check on the files on the hard disk of the PBX, this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive for its normality. If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command displays and prints the information on the fault logical drive and the number of faulty sectors. Floppy Disk Drive Diagnosis By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX, this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive for its normality. If the cleaning has not finished normally, a diagnosis error is displayed or printed. 3. Precautions While a diagnosis is being executed, a message In Execution is displayed. When the diagnosis finishes, the diagnosis result is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
5. Entry Procedure HFC card diagnosis

X-Ray of HFC Function: 1. Diagnosis of PKG 2. Diagnosis of HD 3. Diagnosis of FDD 0. HFC0 /1. HFC1 Yes /No Execute the following diagnosis: * RAM read/write check * ROM sum check * MINF, IOPP loop-back test
HFC: Ready?:
Diagnosis Process of HFC Package: Executing
FUNCTION: HFC (0/1):
Enter 1: Diagnosis of PKG 0. HFC 0 1. HFC1
Hard disk diagnosis
X-Ray HFC Function:
1. Diagnosis of PKG 2. Diagnosis of HD 3. Diagnosis of FDD 1. All Files 2. Program Files 0. HFC0 /1. HFC1
Execute read test for hard disk file. Execute read test for all files.
Area:
HFC:
Ready?: Yes /No Diagnosis Process of Hard Disk: Executing Diagnosis Process of HFC Package: Executing
FUNCTION: AREA (1-3):
Enter 2: Diagnosis of HD 1. All Files 2. Program File 0 3. Program File 1 0. HFC0 1. HJFC1
HFC:
ND-45687 (E)
Floppy disk drive diagnosis

X-Ray HFC Function: 1. Diagnosis of PKG 2. Diagnosis of HD 3. Diagnosis of FDD 0. HFC0 /1. HFC1 Yes /No
Execute cleaning of floppy disk drive.
HFC: Ready?:
Diagnosis Process of Floppy Disk Drive Please insert cleaning floppy disk. Set OK? Yes/No
FUNCTION: HFC (0/1):
Enter 1: Diagnosis of PKG 0. HFC 0 1. HFC1
ND-45687 (E)
XHFD CM0-10 Business, Hotel

siness, tel
XHFD
X-RAY HD or FDD [for IMGx, IMGxh, and IMGdxh]
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-10 2. Function This command is used to execute the following diagnoses. Hard Disk Diagnosis By executing read/write check on the files in the hard disk of the PBX, this command diagnoses the hard disk for its normality. If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command causes the information of the faulty logical drive and the number of faulty sectors to be displayed on the MAT screen and printed out by the printer. Floppy Disk Drive Diagnosis By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX, this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive for its normality. If the cleaning has not finished normally, a diagnosis error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command causes a diagnosis error message to be displayed on the MAT screen and printed out by the printer. 3. Precautions While a diagnosis is being executed, a message In Execution is displayed. When the diagnosis finishes, the diagnosis result is displayed.
ND-45687 (E)
XHFD CM0-10 Business, Hotel
5. Entry Procedure a. Hard disk diagnosis

X-ray HD or FDD Function: Area: System: Ready?: 1. Diagnosis of HD 2. Diagnosis of FDD 1. All Files 2. Program File zero one Yes /No Execute read test for hard disk file.
Diagnosis Process of Hard Disk: Executing
FUNCTION: AREA:
SYSTEM:
Enter 1: Diagnosis of HD Area Designation (1-2) 1: All Files 2: Program File zero one
b. Floppy disk drive diagnosis

X-ray HD or FDD Diagnosis Function: System: Ready?: 1. Diagnosis of HD 2. Diagnosis of FDD zero one Yes/No Execute cleaning of floppy disk drive.
Diagnosis Process of Floppy Disk Drive: Executing
FUNCTION: SYSTEM:
Enter 2: Diagnosis of FDD zero one
ND-45687 (E)
CHAPTER 3
HOTEL SYSTEM ASSIGNMENT COMMANDS
The following Assignment Commands are used for the Hotel/Motel System only. Commands which are applicable to other systems as well as to the Hotel System are documented in Chapter 2.
ND-45687 (E)
AACL CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AACL
Administration Station Class Change
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to change the data assigned to an Administration Station: Telephone Equipment Class (TEC), Service Feature Class (SFC), Route Restriction Class (RSC), ROOM CLASS and Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX),Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)). 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 1-4, 12-15, 18 and 23 may be assigned via this command. Floor Service Data is displayed only in the case of ASYD, SYS1 INDEX 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: AAST RAST RAST, DLEN, DSTN LHEN, LHST
ND-45687 (E)
AACL CM3-01 Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For general Administration Station: a. Enter data for parameters TN through SFC.
TN:1 TEC:2 NXT?
STN:2000 RSC:1 SFC:1
This is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered.
TN: STN: TEC:
Tenant Number Station Number Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used
Note:
lf stations will be accessing routes designated as PB in the ARTD command, TEC = 3 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign either PB in such case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Entering Y, and change the data of ROOM CLASS [See (b)].
RSC: SFC: NXT:
ND-45687 (E)
AACL CM3-01 Hotel
6. Change the data of ROOM CLASS.
TN:1 STN:2000 ROOM CLASS:1 WRT?
TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed.
ROOM CLASS:
Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8: Not used 9: House Phone-Admin 10-15: Not used
ND-45687 (E)
AACL CM3-01 Hotel
When Floor Service is provided: a. Enter data for parameters TN through SFC.
TN:1 TEC:2 NXT?
This is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered.
TN: STN: TEC:
Tenant Number Station Number Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used
Note:
If stations will be accessing routes designated as PB in the ARTD command, TEC = 3 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign either PB in such case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Entering Y, and change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)].
RSC: SFC: NXT:
ND-45687 (E)
AACL CM3-01 Hotel
b.
Change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR.
TN:1 STN:2000 ROOM CLASS:1 ANX:0 G:0 WRT? FLR:1
The TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed.
ROOM CLASS:
ANX: G:
FLR:
Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8: Not used 9: House Phone-Admin 10-15: Not used Annex (0-3) Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground Floor (1-127)
ND-45687 (E)
AANP CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AANP
Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determine the service which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation) 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. If the Guest and Admin. Numbering are separated, use the AGNP command for assigning the Guest station numbering plan. If the numbering plan data is being used in common by all tenants accommodated in the system, data need only be assigned for TN = 1. This type of assignment will only function correctly is ASYD SYS-1, Index 92 is properly assigned. (0/ 1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for All Tenants)
Note:
When changing any of the numbering plan data, the old data must be deleted before new data is assigned. When a first digit of a particular numbering plan is to be deleted and the first DC (Digit Code) is already in use (i.e. Station Number) the Station Numbering data must first be deleted before the new numbering plan data can be assigned via this command. When entering the Connection Status Index (Cl) information, Normal, Hooking, or Busy Service must be designated by entering of the character N, H, or B.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LAPD
ND-45687 (E)
AANP CM3-01 Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Area Code Numbering Plan Data TN:1 1st DC:5 CI:H NND:2 WRT? BLF:0
TN: 1st DC: CI:
NND: BLF:
Tenant Number 1st Digit Code (0-9, *, #) Connection Status Index N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Number of necessary Digits (1-6) Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT 0: Out of Service 1: Inservice
Note:
BLF is not applicable to Hotel Attendant Console.
ND-45687 (E)
AASN CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AASN
Administration Station Number Change
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to change a currently assigned Administration Station Number. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Input a number which is not currently assigned. If a station number currently being used is to be assigned as a new number, delete the station first via the RAST command. When the PKG CHECK or HP PKG CHECK message is displayed during assignment, confirm the LENS location of the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) accommodating the station, then press the ENTER key.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: 5. Entry Procedure AAST RAST RAST, DLEN, DSTN LHEN, LHST
TN:1 STN:2500 NEW STN:3500 WRT?
TN: STN: NEW STN:
Tenant Number Old Station Number New Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AASP
Assignment of Administration Special Access Code
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when a Special Access code or Trunk Access code has been dialed for the Administration Station.
Note:
If the numbering plan for Admi. and Guest is common, this command is used to assign the guest numbering plan as well. (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 160 b6 = 1).
3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. When changing the data, the old data must be deleted before the new data can be assigned. The numbering plan data must be assigned before assigning the Access Code in this command. Unused levels should not to be assigned. When assigning speed calling (SRV = SSC, SID = 15), the total number of digits of the access code and abbreviated digit code equals the NND. i.e.: ACC for speed calling = 1 digit Abbreviated digit codes = 00-99 (2 digits) Total Number of Necessary Digits (NND) is 3. When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC, SID = 60), the maximum necessary digits (NND) is 5. When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRV = SSC, SID = 17), the maximum necessary digits (NND) is 8. When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC, SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 42), the maximum necessary digits NND is 15. When assigning Call Park Remote Retrieval Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 63), the ACC equals the number of necessary digits (NND). After assigning Floor Service (SRV = SSC, SID = 56), Floor Service data must be assigned in the ASPF command. When Floor Service data is to be deleted, the number must first be deleted in the ASPF. After assigning Split Access (SRV = SSC, SID = 57), Split Access data must be assigned in the ASPS command. When Split Access data is to be deleted, the number must first be deleted in the ASPS.
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
4. Related Reference Command List up: LASP
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter EQPAssignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE 5. Entry Procedure For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36, 56, and 57)
TN:1 ACC:10 CI:N SRV:SSC SID:15 NND:2 WRT?
The NDD parameter is displayed only when required by SID. When displayed, enter the data.
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: NND: SID:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Number of Necessary Digit (1-15) Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36, 56, 57.) 1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call) 3: Call Back; Entry 4: Executive Right of Way 5: Call Waiting-Originating 6: Call Back; Cancel 7: Call Pickup Group 8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Entry 9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Cancel
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22-27: 28: 29: 30-34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57: 58-59: 60: 61: 62: 63:
Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Entry Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Cancel Call Forwarding-Dont Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Entry Call Forwarding-Dont Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Cancel Speed Calling-Station; Entry Speed Calling-System; Access TAS Answer Individual Trunk Access Not used OG Trunk Queuing; Entry OG Trunk Queuing; Cancel Speed Calling-Station, Group; Access Not used Call Forwarding-Im Here; Entry Call Forwarding-Im Here; Cancel Not used Call Pickup Direct Hotel Service Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Account Code Dial Authorization Code/Forced Account Code/Dial Access to Lock Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office) Last Number Call Not used Faulty Trunk Report Not used Automatic Wake Up Call; Entry Automatic Wake Up Call; Cancel Group Announcement; Entry Group Announcement; Cancel Do Not Disturb; Entry (via Guest Station) Do Not Disturb; Cancel (via Guest Station) Not used Not used Floor Service Split Access Not used Attendant Manual Override Call Park Access Code Call Park Local Retrieval Code Call Park Remote Retrieval Code
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSC, SID = 36: (Hotel/Motel Service)

TN:1 ACC:20 CI:N SRV:SSC SID:36 STATE:1 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: 36: STATE:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 36.) Hotel Service Hotel Service Code 1: To be cleaned without ID Code 2: Cleaning Completed without ID Code 3: Ready for Occupancy without ID Code 4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code 5-8: Not used 9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-1 10: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-2 11: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-3 12: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-4 13: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-5 14: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-6 15: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-7 16: Not used 17: To be cleaned with ID Code 18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code 19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code 20: Use Not Allowed with ID 21-24: Not used 25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-1 26: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-2 27: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-3 28: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-4 29: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-5 30: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-6 31: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-7 32: Not used 33: Automatic Wake Up Setting, Cancel; Same Special Code 34: For Guest Station Secretary Telephone; Boss/Secretary Calling 35-37: Not used
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56-62: 63:
Note: Note:
Automatic Wake-Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Automatic Wake-Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT) Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT) Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval Direct Data Entry-Station (via Guest Station) Alert Service Start (Special Admin. Station) Alert Service Stop (Special Admin. Station) Not used 2nd Wake-Up Call (Automatic) Set 2nd Wake-Up Call (Semi-Automatic) Set 2nd Wake-Up Call Cancel Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Not used Dummy Number
STATE = 1-9 are used when Maid ID Code Service is not provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, b3 = 0) STATE = 17-25 are used when Maid ID Code Service is provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, b3 = 1)
For SRV = SSC, SID = 56 (Floor Service)

TN:1 ACC:30 CI:N SRV:SSC SID:56NO:1
TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: NO:

Note:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 56.) 56: Floor Service Kind of Assignment Number (0-15)
This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPF.
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSC, SID = 57 (Split Access): a. Enter the data for parameter TN through SID.
TN:1 ACC: 30 CI:N SRV:SSC SID:57
TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 57.) 57: Split Access
(a) Enter the data for parameters NO and KIND.

NO:1 KIND:0 WRT?
NO:
This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual Access. This parameter serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPS.
Note:
KIND (0-3):
This parameter specifies the Split Access Parameter Classification. The data to be assigned here depends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated. Guest and Administration phones may be assigned to separate tons, rests, and/or sifts, or they may only be differentiated by their respective designations as Administration or Guest. 0: Class: assign this if the access code is to be shared between Guest and Aministration with no correspondence to TN, RSC, or SFC. 1: TN: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified TNs. 2: RSC: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified RSCs. 3: SFC: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified SFCs.
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
For SSCA (Other than SID = 56):

TN:1 CI:N SID:46 WRT? ACC:10 SRV:SSCA
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SIDA:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56.) 1-40: Not used 41: Voice Call 42: Message Reminder (Dterm) 43-45: Not used 46: Line Load Control; Entry 47: Line Load Control; Cancel 48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel 50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel 52: Not used 53: Boss-Secretary Override 54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON; Set (for Admin) 55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON; Cancel (for Admin) 56: Guest/Admin. Service 57-65: Not used 66: Multi Channel Recording (REC) 67: Not used 68: Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY) 69-84: Not used 85: Dial Access to Unlock 86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry 87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry 88: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for Station); Entry 89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for Station); Cancel 92-95: Not used 96: Follow Me Phone 97: Call Hold Conference 98-105: Not used 106: Call Return 107-255: Not used
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin. Service):

TN:1 CI:N SIDA:56 WRT? ACC:15 SRV:SSCA PN0:1
A/G:A
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SIDA: PNO (1-15):

Note:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index A: (Enter 56.) 56: (Guest/Admin. Service) This Parameter specifies the Admin./Guest Numbering Parameter Classification
For this parameter, enter the PNO assigned by command AOSP. Admin./Guest 0: Admin. 1: Guest
A/G:
For SRV = OGC, PAGA, PAGC:

TN:1 CI:N RT:2 ACC:9 SRV:OGC
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV:
RT:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter OGC, PAGA or PAGC.) OGC: Outgoing Call PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel Route Number
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = OGCA:

TN:1 CI:N CNT:3 WRT? ACC:25 SRV:OGCA 3RT:5
Following entry of CNT, enter Route No. of the alternate routes one after another. (If RETURN key is pressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead of RT increases by one and then next RT No. can be entered.)
WRT? appears on the display after specifying all alternative routes in the preceding parameter. TN: ACC: CI: Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA.) OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance) Number of advanced route Route Number
SRV: CNT: RT:
For SRV = LCR, LCRS:

TN:1 CI:N RT:2 ACC:15 SRV:LCR 2nd DT:1 AH:0
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV:
RT: 2nd DT:
AH:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS.) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection (Flag Route) LCRS: Register Sender LCR Route Number Second Dial Tone (0/1) 0: 1: Second Dial Tone Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization code)
ND-45687 (E)
AASP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = UNIF:

TN:1 CI:N SKIP:0 ACC:40 SRV:UNIF
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SKIP:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF.) UNIF: Office Termination Number of Digits to be skipped from Access code
For SRV = ANNC:

TN:1 CI:N EQP:3 ACC:19 SRV:ANNC
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: EQP:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.) ANNC: Announcement Service Announcement Equipment Number (2-15)
ND-45687 (E)
AAST CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AAST
Assignment of Administration Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to assign Administration Station data. The RAST command is used to delete or display this data. The DSTN command can be used to display this data as well. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 1-4, 12-15, 18 and 23 may be assigned via this command. The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Restriction Data Command (ARSC). RSC = 0 cannot be assigned here because it is reserved for an attendant. The Service Feature Class (SFC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Service Feature Class Command (ASFC). If the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) on which the station is assigned is made busy, all other station circuits on that circuit card will also be made busy. When the PKG CHECK or HP PKG CHECK message appears during station assignment, confirm that the circuit card is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number (LEN) assigned for the station. Press the ENTER key after confirming the location. When assigning the stations for Floor Service, the data must have been assigned as ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).
4. Related Reference Command Deletion: Display: Change: (Part) List up: RAST RAST, DLEN, DSTN AACL, AASN LHEN, LHST
ND-45687 (E)
AAST CM3-01 Hotel
-Make BusyAssignment: (Busy/Idle) Display: 5. Entry Procedure
For general Administration station: a. Enter data for parameters TN through SFC. STN:2000
TN:1 LENS:001010 TEC:2 NXT? TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
RSC:1SFC:1 NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Tenant Equipment Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Enter Y and enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS. (See (b)).
RSC: SFC: NXT:
Note:
If stations will be accessing routes designated as PB in the ARTD command, TEC = 3 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign either PB in such case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).
AAST CM3-01 Hotel
b.
Enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS.
TN:1
STN:2000
ROOM CLASS:1 WRT?
ROOM CLASS:
Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used
ND-45687 (E)
AAST CM3-01 Hotel
When Floor Service is provided: a. Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC.
TN:1
STN:3333
LENS:001010 TEC:2 NXT? RSC:1 SFC:1
NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Enter Y, and enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR. [See (b)].
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
RSC: SFC: NXT:
Note:
If stations will be accessing routes designated as PB in the ARTD command, TEC = 3 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign either PB in such case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).
ND-45687 (E)
AAST CM3-01 Hotel
b.
Enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR.
TN:1
STN:3333 FLR:10
ROOM CLASS:0 ANX:0 G:0 WRT?
The TN and the STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed.
ROOM CLASS:
ANX: G:
FLR:
Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used Annex (0-3) Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground Floor (1-127)
ND-45687 (E)
ADLI CM3-02 Hotel
ADLI
Assignment DLINT Package
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the LENS information for Data Link Interface Trunk (DLINT) in the case of Fixed Connection. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Data Link Interface Trunk is a dummy trunk. The Route Number of Data Link Interface Trunk is 919.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LTRK
Assignment DLINT Package RT:919 TK:1 LENS:003080 WRT?
RT: TK: LENS:
Intra-office Route Number (919) Trunk Number (1-32) Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
ADNR CM3-02 Hotel

tel
ADNR
Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function This command is used to assign the specific Start and End times pertaining to Day/Night Restriction or to display the Day/Night Restriction classification of a specific time. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. The ARSC command may be affected, if the day and night tables are used. Restriction is assigned in military time (24 hour cycle) in units of 10 minutes. End time must not be earlier than Start time. If the same time is specified for both Start and End, the restriction period will be 10 minutes. When Data 1 is assigned for bit 6 of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 170, Day/Night Connection Restriction will take place regardless of ATTCON night mode changeover. Because midnight is assigned as hour 00:00, Night assignment should be input twice: once for the period before midnight, and once for the period after midnight. Refer to the example below for clarification:
Example: If the time period from 9:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. is to be assigned as Night, the assignment must be input
as follows: 00:00-07:00 = Night 07:10-20:50 = Day 21:00-23:50 = Night 4. Related Reference Command None 5. Entry Procedure When data are assigned anew: a. Set ASSIGN mode.
ASSIGN/CHECK:A
ASSIGN/ CHECK:
Enter A when entering the data.
ND-45687 (E)
ADNR CM3-02 Hotel
b.
Enter the data for each parameter.

RSC:1
TN:1 D/N:D START TIME:0800 END TIME: 1900 WRT?
TN: D/N:
RSC:
Note:
Tenant Number Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Route Restriction Class (0-15)
Remember that RSC11 through 15 are used in the Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change service.
START TIME: Restriction Start Time END TIME: Restriction End Time For checking (displaying) the data: a. Set CHECK mode.
ASSIGN/CHECK:C
ASSIGN/ CHECK: b.
TN: 1
Enter C when causing the data to be checked (displayed).
Enter the data necessary for displaying the data.

RSC: 1
CHECK TIME: 1200 CLASS: DAY
Day or Night is displayed. Tenant Number Route Restriction Class (0-15) The specific time to be checked when displaying D/N Restriction data. The Restriction Class (Day or Night) of the time specified in the CHECK TIME parameter.
TN: RSC: CHECK TIME: CLASS:
ND-45687 (E)
ADSS CM3-02 Hotel

tel
ADSS
Assignment of Direct Station Select Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the called number data corresponding to the Hotel Attendant Consoles Direct Station Select (DSS) keys. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel System only. The DSS function is only valid for the Hotel/Motel Attendant Console and may not be assigned for Business System Consoles. DSS Function Key Numbers are 1 to 10. These ten numbers correspond to values 1 to 10 for the DSS parameter of this command. This feature must be enabled in ASYD SYS1 INDEX 161 BIT5 in order to operate.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LDSS
Assignment of Direct Station Select Data ATN: 1 DC: 3000 WRT? DSS:1
ATN: DSS: DC:
Attendant Number DSS Key Number (1-10) Called Number (1-14 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
AFXC CM3-02 Hotel

tel
AFXC
Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the data path between the Data Link Interface Trunk (DLINT) and Dterm pertaining to Fixed Connection. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. When assigning data by this command, the data must have already been assigned by command ADLI. When assigning data by this command, the data must be assigned to ASYD SYS1 INDEX 60 b4 = 1 (Fixed Connection Service is provided). The LEVEL of LENS-B must be 4-7. LENS-A should not be smaller than LENS-B. The message of EXECUTING is displayed while a fixed connection processing is being executed.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LFXC
Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System LENS-A:003083 LENS-B:013084 WRT? EAD-A:00 EAD-B:00
LENS-A: LENS-B: EAD-A: EAD-B:
Line Equipment Number of Data Link Interface Trunk Line Equipment Number of Dterm Always assign data 00. Always assign data 00.
ND-45687 (E)
AGCL CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AGCL
Guest Station Class Change
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to change the data assigned to a Guest Station: Telephone Equipment Class (TEC), Service Feature Class (SFC), Route Restriction Class (RSC), ROOM CLASS and Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)). 3. Precautions Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 5-8, and 10 may be assigned via this command. Floor Service Data is displayed only in the case of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165 b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: AGST RGST RGST, DLEN, DSTN LHEN, LHST
-Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC 5. Entry Procedure For general Guest Station: a.
TN:1 TEC:2 NXT?
Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC.

NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Tenant Number Station Number
TN: STN:
ND-45687 (E)
AGCL CM3-01 Hotel
LENS: TEC:
Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used
Note:
When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as PB in the ARTD command, TEC = 7 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign PB in such case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC. Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC. NEXT Enter Y, and change the data of ROOM CLASS. [See (b)].
RSC: SFC: NXT: b.

TN:1
Change the data of ROOM CLASS.

STN:2000
ROOM CLASS: 1 WRT?
ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15)

Example:
1: Single Room 2: Twin Room
ND-45687 (E)
AGCL CM3-01 Hotel
When Floor Service is provided: a. Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC.
TN:1 STN:2000 LENS:O01010 TEC:5 RSC:1 SFC:1 NXT?
NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
Note:
When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as PB in the ARTD command, TEC = 7 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign PB in such case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC. Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC. NEXT Enter Y, and change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)].
RSC: SFC: NXT:
ND-45687 (E)
AGCL CM3-01 Hotel
b.
Change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR. The TN and STN entered in (a) are automatically displayed.
FLR:1
TN:1 STN:2000 ROOM CLASS:1 ANX:O G:O WRT?
ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15)

Example:
1: Single Room 2: Twin Room ANX: G: Annex (0-3) Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground Floor (1-127)
FLR:
ND-45687 (E)
AGNP CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AGNP
Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determine the service which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation). 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. This command is only used to set up the Numbering Plan for Guest Stations, if the Guest and Admi. Numbering Plans are separated. To Assign Admi. Stations or Guest Stations if the Numbering Plans are common, AANP is used. If the numbering plan data is being used in common by all tenants accommodated in the system, data need only be assigned for TN = 1. This type of assignment will only function correctly if ASYD SYS-1, Index 92 is properly assigned. (0/ 1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for all Tenants)
Note:
Previous data should be deleted prior to changing the numbering plan data. When entering the Connection Status Index (CI) information, Normal, Hooking, or Busy Service must be designated by entry of the character N, H, or B. When deleting a 1st Digit Code (lST DC) pertaining to station numbers, access codes, etc. which have already been assigned in the system, delete the data pertaining to the number before deleting the 1st DC by this command. For example, if 7 is the 1st DC of Guest station numbers of Level 7, those station numbers must first be deleted by the RGST command before the 1st DC can be deleted in this command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: LGNP
ND-45687 (E)
AGNP CM3-01 Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
TN:1 CI:N NND:3 WRT?
1ST DC:1 BLF:O
TN: 1ST DC: CI:
NND: BLF:
Tenant Number 1st Digit Code (0-9, *, #) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Number of Necessary Digits (1-6) Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT 0: Out of Service 1: In service
Note:
BLF is not applicable to Hotel/Motel Attendant Console.
ND-45687 (E)
AGSN CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AGSN
Guest Station Number Change
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to change a currently assigned Guest Station Number. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Input a number which is not currently assigned. If a station number currently being used is to be assigned as a new number, delete the station first via the RGST command. When the PKG CHECK or HP PKG CHECK message is displayed during assignment, confirm the LENS location of the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) accommodating the station, then press the ENTER key.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Deletion: Display: List up: 5. Entry Procedure AGST RGST RGST, DLEN, DSTN LHEN, LHST
Guest Station Number Change TN: 1 STN:4000 NEW STN:5000
WRT?
TN: STN: NEW STN:
Tenant Number Old Station Number New Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AGSP
Assignment of Guest Special Access Code
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when a Special Access code or Trunk Access code has been dialed for the Guest Station. This command is only used when the data in ASYD SYS1 INDEX 160 b1 is assigned as 1 for separate numbering plan for Admi. and Guest. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. When changing the data, the old data must be deleted before the new data can be assigned. The numbering plan data must be assigned before assigning the Access Code in this command. Unused levels should not to be assigned. When assigning speed calling (SRV = SSC, SID = 15), the total number of digits of the access code and abbreviated digit code equals the NND. i.e.: ACC for speed calling = 1 digit Abbreviated digit codes = 00-99 (2 digits) Total Number of Necessary Digits (NND) is 3 When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC, SID = 60), the maximum number of necessary digits (NND) is 5. When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRV = SSC, SID = 17), the maximum number of necessary digits (NND) is 8. When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC, SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 42), the maximum number of necessary digits NND is 15. When assigning Call Park Remote Retrieval Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 63), the ACC equals the number of necessary digits (NND). After assigning Floor Service (SRV = SSC, SID = 56), Floor Service data must be assigned in the ASPF command. When Floor Service data is to be deleted, the number must first be deleted in the ASPF. After assigning Split Access (SRV = SSC, SID = 57), Split Access data must be assigned in the ASPS command. When Split Access data is to be deleted the number must first be deleted in the ASPS command.
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
4. Related Reference Command List up: LGSP
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter EQPAssignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE 5. Entry Procedure For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36, 56 and 57):
TN:1 CI:N SID:15 WRT? ACC:10 SRV:SSC NDD:2
This parameter is displayed only when required by SID. When it displays, enter the data.
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: NND: SID:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Number of Necessary Digit (1-15) Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36, 56, 57.) 1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call) 3: Call Back; Entry 4: Executive Right of Way 5: Call Waiting-Originating 6: Call Back; Cancel 7: Call Pickup Group 8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Entry 9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Cancel
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: 17: 18: 19: 20: 21: 22-34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57: 58-59: 60: 61: 62: 63:
Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Entry Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Cancel Call Forwarding-Dont Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Entry Call Forwarding-Dont Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Cancel Speed Calling-Station; Entry Speed Calling-System; Access TAS Answer Individual Trunk Access Not used OG Trunk Queuing; Entry OG Trunk Queuing; Cancel Speed Calling-Station, Group; Access Not used Call Pickup Direct Hotel/Motel Service Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Account Code Dial Authorization Code/Forced Account Code Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office) Last Number Call Not used Faulty Trunk Report Not used Automatic Wake Up Call; Entry Automatic Wake Up Call; Cancel Group Announcement; Entry Group Announcement; Cancel Do Not Disturb; Entry Do Not Disturb; Cancel Not used Not used Floor Service Split Access Not used Attendant Manual Override Call Park Access Code Call Park Local Retrieval Code Call Park Remote Retrieval Code
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSC, SID = 36 (Hotel Service):

TN:1 CI:N SID:36 ACC:20 SRV:SSC STATE:1
WRT?
TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: STATE:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index: (Enter 36.) 36: Hotel Service Hotel Service Code (SID = 36) 1: To be cleaned without ID Code 2: Cleaning Completed without No ID Code 3: Ready for Occupancy without No ID Code 4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code 5-8: Not used 9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-1 10: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-2 11: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-3 12: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-4 13: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-5 14: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-6 15: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-7 16: Not used 17: To be cleaned with ID Code 18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code 19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code 20: Use Not Allowed with ID Code 21-24: Not used 25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-1 26: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-2 27: Maid Dial Answer Back With ID Code-3 28: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-4 29: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-5 30: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-6 31: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-7 32: Not used 33: Automatic Wake Up Setting, Cancel; Same Special Code 34: For Guest Station Secretary Telephone; Boss/Secretary Calling
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
35-37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47-50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56-62: 63:
Note:
Not used Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT) Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT) Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval Direct Data Entry-STA Alert Service Start (Special Admin. Station) Alert Service Stop (Special Admin. Station) Not used Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Not Used Dummy Number
For SRV = SSC, SID = 56 (Floor Service)

TN = 1 CI:N SID:56 ACC = 30 SRV:SSC NO:1
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SID: NO:

Note:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index: (Enter 56.) 56: Floor Service Kind of Assignment Number (0-15)
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSC, SID = 57 (Split Access): a.

TN:1 CI:N SID:57
Enter the data for parameters TN through SID.

ACC:15 SRV:SSC
TN: ACC: CI: SRV: SID: b.

NO:1
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: (Enter N.) N: Normal Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index: (Enter 57.) 57: Split Access
Enter the data for parameters NO and KIND.

KIND:0
WRT?
NO:
This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual Access. This parameter serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPS.
Note:
KIND (0-3):
This parameter specifies the Split Access Parameter Classification. The data to be assigned here depends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated. Guest and Administration phones may be assigned to separate TNs, RSCs, and/or SFCs, or they may only be differentiated by their respective designations as Administration or Guest. 0: Class: assign this if the access code is to be separated between Guest and Administration with no correspondence to TN, RSC, or SFC. 1: TN: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified TNs. 2: RSC: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified RSCs. 3: SFC: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified SFCs.
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSCA (Other than SIDA = 56):

TN:1 CI:N SID:50 WRT? ACC:10 SRV:SSCA
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SIDA:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56.) 1-40: Not used 41: Voice Call (D term) 42: Message Reminder (Dterm) 43-45: Not used 46: Line Load Control; Entry 47: Line Load Control; Cancel 48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel 50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel 52-55: Not used 56: Guest/Admi Service 57-85: Not used 86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry 87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry 88: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for Station); Entry Note 89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for Station); Cancel 92-95: Not used 96: Follow Me Phone 97-255: Not used
Note:
These indexes are used when ASYD, SYS1, Index 79, bit 2 is assigned as 1 (Split Call Forwarding is in service.).
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin. Service):

TN:1 ACC:15 CI:N SRV:SSCA SIDA:56 PN0:1 A/G:0 WRT?
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SIDA: PNO (1-15):

Note:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking B: Busy Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index (1-255): (Enter 56.) 56: (Guest/Admin. Service) This Parameter specifies the Admin/Guest Numbering Parameter Classification
For this parameter, enter the PNO assigned by command AOSP. Admin/Guest 0: Admin 1: Guest
A/G:

TN:1 ACC:9 CI:N SRV:OGC RT:2
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV:
RT:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service Kind of Service: (Enter OGC, PAGA or PAGC.) OGC: Outgoing Call (without Route Advance) PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel Route Number
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = OGCA:

TN:1 CI:N CNT:3 WRT? ACC:25 SRV:OGCA 3 RT:5
Following entry of CNT, enter Route No. of the alternate routes one after another. (If RETURN key is pressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead of RT increases by one and then next RT No. can be entered.) WRT? displays after specifying all alternative routes in the preceding parameter.
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: CNT: RT:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA.) OGCA: Outgoing Call (with Route Advance) Number of Routes to be entered Route Number

TN:1 CI:N RT:2 ACC:15 SRV:LCR 2nd DT:1 AH:0
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV:
RT: 2nd DT: AH:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS.) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection (Flag Route) LCRS: Register Sender LCR Route Number Second Dial Tone (0/1 = -/SDT) Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization code)
ND-45687 (E)
AGSP CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = UNIF:

TN:1 CI:N SKIP:0 ACC:40 SRV:UNIF
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: SKIP:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF) UNIF: Office Termination Number of Digits to be skipped from Access code
For SRV = ANNC:

TN:1 CI:N EQP:3 ACC:19 SRV:ANNC
TN: ACC: CI:
SRV: EQP:
Tenant Number Access Code (1-6 digits) Connection Status Index: N: Normal H: Hooking Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.) ANNC: Announcement Service Announcement Equipment Number (2-15)
ND-45687 (E)
AGST CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AGST
Assignment of Guest Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to assign Guest Station data. The RGST command is used to delete and display this data. The DSTN command can be used to display this data as well. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 5-8, 10, 12 and 18 may be assigned to Guest stations. The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Restriction Data Command (ARSC). RSC = 0 cannot be assigned because it is reserved as an outgoing Restriction Class for the attendant only. The Service Feature Class (SFC) work in conjunction with the Assignment of Service Feature Class Command (ASFC). If the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) to which the station is assigned is made busy, all other station circuits on that circuit card will also be made busy. When the PKG CHECK or HP PKG CHECK message appears during station assignment, confirm that the circuit card is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number (LEN) assigned for the station. Press the ENTER key after confirming the location. When assigning the stations for Floor Service, the data must have been assigned as ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).
ND-45687 (E)
AGST CM3-01 Hotel
4. Related Reference Command Deletion: Display: Change: (Part) List up: RGST RGST, DLEN, DSTN AGCL, AGSN LHEN, LHST
-Parameter SFCAssignment: ASFC Display: ASFC List up: LRTC -Parameter RSCAssignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC -Make BusyAssignment: (Busy/Idle) Display:
ND-45687 (E)
AGST CM3-01 Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For general Guest Station: a.

TN:1

STN:2000
NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11: Not used 12: D term 13-17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi Line) 19-31: Not used
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
Note:
When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as PB in the ARTD command, TEC = 7 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign PB in this case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG). Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC. Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC. NEXT Enter Y, and enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS [See (b)].
RSC: SFC: NXT:
ND-45687 (E)
AGST CM3-01 Hotel
b.
TN:1
Enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS.

STN:2000
ROOM CLASS:1 WRT?
Example:
1: Single Room 2: Twin Room
Note:
When the Dterm is used, ROOM CLASS is fixed to 15. When Floor Service is Provided.

TN:1 STN:2000
NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters up to SFC have been entered. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11: Not used 12: D term 13-17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi Line) 19-31: Not used
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
Note:
When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as PB in the ARTD command, TEC = 7 (DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign PB in this case. The data used for the class must be the same as the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).
ND-45687 (E)
AGST CM3-01 Hotel
RSC: SFC: NXT: c.

TN:1
Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC. Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC. NEXT Enter Y, and enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)].
Enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR.

STN:3333
ROOM CLASS:0 ANX:0 WRT? G:0 FLR:10
ROOM CLASS: (0-15) Note ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground FLR: Floor (1-127)
Note:
When the Dterm is used, ROOM CLASS is fixed to 15.
ND-45687 (E)
AHKP CM3-02 Hotel

tel
AHKP
Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function This command is used to set the functions of the top row of ICI (Incoming Call Identification) keys for answering incoming calls at the Hotel Attendant Console. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. The following shows the location of the keys which can be set by this command, and their Key Numbers.
CCSA
WATS
FX
(NANS) 4
(BUSY) 5 EMG
(TIE) 6 DND
KEY NUMBER (ICPT) 3 TF 1 GST (HP) 2 OT
RCL
ADM
LDN
In the above, the function indicated in each ( ) is the default function, which becomes valid if no other function has been set by this command, or if the function set has been deleted. Therefore when the default function indicated in ( ) is to be used, data entry is not necessary. This command can be executed under one of the following conditions. a. b. c. The 2ATI circuit card is not mounted or is made busy. The ATT has been made busy by means of the MB switch on the 2ATI circuit card. The DAY/NIGHT key on the ATT is set to the NIGHT position.
4. Related Reference Commands List up: LHKP
-Parameter ATNAssignment: ATRK Deletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LHEN
ND-45687 (E)
AHKP CM3-02 Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern ATN:1 KYN:1 FUNC:1
WRT?
ATN: KYN: FUNC:
Attendant Number Key Number (1-6) FUNCTION CODE (1-16) 1: CAS Line 2: Not used 3: Priority Call 1 4: Priority Call 2 5: Priority Call 3 6: GST2 7: Wake-Up Call 8: Interposition Transfer 2 9-16: Not used
ND-45687 (E)
AHSU CM3-02 Hotel

tel
AHSU
Assignment of Suite Room Station
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function When the system provides Suite Room Service, this command is used to assign a specific guest station as a suite room station. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Ensure to confirm beforehand the system data (AHSY, INDEX = 187, 188, 189) pertaining to Suite Room Service inclusive of Suite Room Service Provided/Not Provided, the number of Guest Stations belonging to one Suite Room, etc. The station to be assigned as a suite room station must have already been assigned as a guest station. A phantom number can be assigned to the master guest station of a suite room. Branch stations are not included in the number of suite room stations. The master guest station of a suite room must be assigned without exception.
4. Related Reference Command Delete: List up: 5. Entry Procedure a. Enter the data for parameters TN and TYPE. RHSU LHSU
TN:1 TYPE:S
TN: TYPE:
Tenant Number Suite Room Type S: Single Suite Room D: Double Suite Room
ND-45687 (E)
AHSU CM3-02 Hotel
b. Enter the data for parameters SING PHANTOM through S4.

SING PHANTOM:3000 M1:2000 S3:2003 S2:2001 S4:2003
SING PHANTOM: Phantom Number Note Ml: Master Guest Station Number S2-S4: Slave Guest Station Number
Note:
When a Phantom Number is not necessary, enter ****.
ND-45687 (E)
AHSY CM3-01 Hotel

tel
AHSY
Assignment of Hotel System Parameter
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to assign and display the Hotel System parameters. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Data of Hotel System parameters must to be entered using hexadecimal numbers. For the contents of the Hotel System parameters, refer to the Office Data Specification.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LHSY
Assignment of Hotel System Parameter INDEX:5 WRT? DATA:00
INDEX: DATA:
Hotel System Parameter Index (0-2047) System Parameter (Hexadecimal)
ND-45687 (E)
ASCR CM3-02 Hotel

tel
ASCR
Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function This command is used to assign and display station to station connection restriction data based on the Route Restriction Class (RSC) of respect tenants. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Inter-tenant station to station connection will allowed for each RSC until it is restricted via this command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure a. Enter the data for parameters CALLING TN, RSC and CALLED TN, RSC.
ASSIGN/CHECK:A CALLING TN:1 CALLED TN:2 RSC:1 RSC:2
LSCR
ASSIGN/ CHECK: CALLING TN:
When entering the data, enter A, and when causing the data to be checked (displayed), enter C. RSC: Calling Tenant Number respective Route Restriction Class (0-15). Called Tenant Number respective Route Restriction Class (0-15).
CALLED TN: RSC:
ND-45687 (E)
ASCR CM3-02 Hotel
b. Enter the data for parameters D/N, DIAL/ATT, RES

D/N:D RES:1 WRT? DIAL/ATT:A
D/N:
DIAL/ATT:
RES:
Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Designates whether restriction applies to stations or attendant D: Stations A: Attendant Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed
ND-45687 (E)
ASPF CM3-01 Hotel

el
ASPF
Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display Floor Data for the Access Code of the Floor Service. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. When assigning data by this command, ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165; bit 7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided) must have been assigned. When assigning data by this command, the Access Code for Floor Service must have been assigned by the AASP or AGSP command. When deleting data by this command, the Access Code for Floor Service must be deleted in advance by the AASP or AGSP command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure LSPF
D/N:D TN:1 ANX:0 G:0 NO:0 FLR:1
A/G:G DC:0905 WRT?
D/N:
TN: ANX: G:
NO: FLR: DC:
Day/Night D: Day Mode N: Night Mode Tenant Number Annex (0-3) Ground/Under Ground 0: Ground 1: Under Ground Kind of Assignment Number (0-15) Floor (1-127) Called Number (Max. 6 digits)
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel

tel
ASPS
Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to assign, delete and display Split Access Data when an Access Code is Assigned for this feature in either the AASP or AGSP command (SRV = SSC, SID = 57). This command is programmed when access codes for trunks and features and/or station numbers are to be shared between Guest and Administration stations. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Split Access must be specified in either the AASP or AGSP command (SRV = SSC, SID = 57) before an access code can be assigned via this command. When data is to be deleted in this command, the data assigned for the access code in either the AASP or AGSP command (SRV = SSC, SID = 57) must be deleted as well, but be sure to delete the this command first. For parameter NO, enter the data assigned by command AASP or AGSP. Parameters KIND and F specify the Split Access Parameter Classification. The data to be assigned here depends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated. Guest and Administration phones may be assigned to separate TNs, RSCs, and/or SFCs, or they may only be differentiated by their respective designations as Administration or Guest. The relationship between KIND and F is shown below: a. For KIND = 0 (Administration/Guest) F = 0: Administration 1: Guest 2-15: Not used For KIND = 1 (TN (Tenant)) F = 0: TN = 0 | | 15: TN = 15 For KIND = 2 (RSC) F = 0: RSC = 0 | | 15: RSC = 15 For KIND = 3 (SFC) F = 0: SFC = 0 | | 15: SFC = 15
b.
c.
d.
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
4. Related Reference Command List up: LSPS
-Parameter RTAssignment: ARTD Display: ARTD List up: LRTD -Parameter EQPAssignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE 5. Entry Procedure For Station Number:
D/N: D NO:0 KIND:0 F:0 SRV:STN STN:2 WRT?
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV: STN:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the station number being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the station numbers being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3): 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter STN.) STN: Station Number Level Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36, 56):

D/N: D NO:0 KIND:0 SRV:SSC SID:15 NND: WRT?
F:0
The NDD parameter is displayed only when required by SID. When displayed, enter the data.
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV: SID:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TEC 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36, 56.) 1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call) 3: Call Back; Entry 4: Executive Right of Way 5: Call Waiting-Originating 6: Call Back; Cancel 7: Call Pickup Group 8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Entry 9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Cancel 10: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Entry 11: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie); Cancel 12: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Entry 13: Call Forwarding-Dont Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for C.O./ Tie); Cancel 14: Speed Calling-Station; Entry 15: Speed Calling-System; Access 16: TAS Answer 17: Individual Trunk Access 18: Not used 19: OG Trunk Queuing; Entry 20: OG Trunk Queuing; Cancel
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
21: 22-27: 28: 29: 30-34: 35: 36: 37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47: 48: 49: 50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56: 57-59: 60: 61: 62: 63:
Speed Calling-Station, Group; Access Not used Call Forwarding-Im Here; Entry Call Forwarding-Im Here; Cancel Not used Call Pickup Direct Hotel/Motel Service Priority Call 1 Priority Call 2 Priority Call 3 Priority Paging Account Code Dial Authorization Code/Forced Account Code Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office) Last Number Call Not used Faulty Trunk Report Not used Automatic Wake Up Call; Entry Automatic Wake Up Call; Cancel Group Announcement; Entry Group Announcement; Cancel Do Not Disturb; Entry (via Guest Station) Do Not Disturb; Cancel (via Guest Station) Not used Not used Floor Service Not used Attendant Manual Override Call Park Access Code Call Park Local Retrieval Code Call Park Remote Retrieval Code
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSC, SID = 36 (Hotel Service):

D/N: D NO:3 KIND:0 F:0 SRV:SSC SID:36 STATE:1 WRT?
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV: SID: STATE:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-5) Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index: (Enter 36.) 36: Hotel/Motel Service Hotel/Motel Service Code 1: To be cleaned without ID Code 2: Cleaning Completed without ID Code 3: Ready for Occupancy without ID Code 4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code 5-8: Not used 9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-1 10: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-2 11: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-3 12: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-4 13: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-5 14: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-6 15: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-7 16: Not used 17: To be cleaned with ID Code 18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code 19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code 20: Use Not Allowed with ID Code 21-24: Not used 22: Use Not Allowed, Under Repair; Clear with ID Code 23: Not Used 24: Repair Needed with ID Code 25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-1 26: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-2
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
27: 28: 29: 30: 31: 32: 33: 34: 35-37: 38: 39: 40: 41: 42: 43: 44: 45: 46: 47-50: 51: 52: 53: 54: 55: 56-62: 63:
Note:
Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-3 Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-4 Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-5 Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-6 Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-7 Not used Automatic Wake Up Setting, Cancel; Same Special Code For Guest Station Secretary Telephone; Boss/Secretary Calling Not used Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT) Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT) Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval Direct Data Entry-STA Alert Service Start (Special Administration Station) Alert Service Stop (Special Administration Station) Not used Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change Not used Dummy Number
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSC, SID = 56 (Floor Service):

D/N: D NO:1 CI:N SID:56 WRT?
KIND:0 SRV:SSC NO:1
F:0
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV: SID: NO:

Note:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.) SSC: Service Code Service Feature Index (Enter 56.) 56: Floor Service Kind of Assignment Number (0-15) Note
For SRV = SSCA (Other than SID = 56):

D/N: D NO:1 SRV:SSC SID:50 WRT?
KIND:0
F:0
D/N: NO: KIND:
F:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15)
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
SRV: SIDA:
Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56.) 1-40: Not used 41: Voice Call 42: Message Reminder (Dterm) 43-45: Not used 46: Line Load Control; Entry 47: Line Load Control; Cancel 48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel 50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel 52: Not used 53: Boss/Secretary override tone 54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON; Set (for Admin) 55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON; Cancel (for Admin) 56: Guest/Admin Service 57-65: Not used 66: Multi Channel Recording-DAT (Record) 67: Not used 68: Multi Channel Recording-DAT (Replay) 69-85: Not used 86: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry 87: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry 88: Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for Station); Entry 89: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel 91: Split Call Forwarding-Dont Answer (for Station); Cancel 92-95: Not used 96: Follow Me Phone 97: Call Hold Conference 98-105: Not used 106: Return Call 107-255: Not used
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin Service):

D/N: D NO:1 CI:N SIDA:56 WRT?
KIND:0 SRV:SSCA PNO:1 A/G:0
F:0
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV: SIDA: PNO (1-15):

Note:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) Service Feature Index A: (Enter 56.) 56: (Guest/Admi Service) This Parameter specifies the Admi/Guest Numbering Parameter classification Note
For this parameter, enter the PNO assigned by command AOSP.
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel

D/N: D NO:4 SRV:OGC RT:3 WRT?
KIND:0
F:0
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV:
RT:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter OGC, PAGA, PAGC.) OGC: Outgoing Call PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel Route Number
For SRV = OGCA:

D/N: D NO:5 SRV:OGCA CNT:3 WRT? 3 RT:5
KIND:0
F:0
After entering CNT, enter Route No. of the alternate routes one after another. (If ENTER is pressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead of RT increases by one and the next RT No. can be entered.) When as many RT Numbers as designated by CNT are entered, WRT? displays.
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV: CNT: RT:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value: (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA.) OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance) Number of advanced route Route Number
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel

D/N: D NO:6 KIND:0 F:0 SRV:LCRS RT:10 2nd DT:0AH:0 WRT?
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV:
RT: 2nd DT: AH:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value: (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS.) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection LCRS: Register Sender LCR Route Number Second Dial Tone (0/1 = -/SDT) Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization Code)
For SRV = UNIF:

D/N: D NO:7 SRV:UNIF SKIP:0 WRT?
KIND:0
F:0
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV: SKIP:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF.) UNIF: Office Termination Number of Digit to be skipped from Access Code.
ND-45687 (E)
ASPS CM3-01 Hotel
For SRV = ANNC:

D/N: D NO:6 KIND:0 SRV:ANNC EQP:3 WRT?
F:0
D/N: NO: KIND:
F: SRV: EQP:
Day/Night This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the access code being assigned. Kind of Class (0-3) 0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC 3: SFC Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.) ANNC: Announcement Service Announcement Equipment number (2-15)
ND-45687 (E)
ATCR CM3-02 Hotel

tel
ATCR
Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function This command is used to assign or display restriction data for connections between Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs). 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Connections between TECs will be allowed until they are restricted via this command.
4. Related Reference Command List up: 5. Entry Procedure When assigning new data: a. Set ASSIGN mode. LTCR
ASSIGN/CHECK:A
CHECK: b.
Enter A when entering data.
Enter data for each parameter.
CALLING TEC:1 CALLED TEC:1 D/N:D RES:O WRT?
CALLING TEC: Calling Telephone Equipment Class Note CALLED TEC: Called Telephone Equipment Class Note D/N: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode RES: Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed
Note:
The attendant must be entered as TEC: 31
ND-45687 (E)
ATCR CM3-02 Hotel
For checking (displaying) the data: a. Set CHECK mode.
ASSIGN/CHECK:C
ASSIGN/CHECK: Enter C when causing the data to be checked (displayed). b. Enter the data necessary for data display.
CALLING TEC:1 CALLED TEC:1 D/N:D RES:RES
Restriction Data. Allow or Restrict will be displayed.
CALLING TEC: Calling Telephone Equipment Class CALLED TEC: Called Telephone Equipment Class D/N: Day/Night Mode D: Day Mode N: Night Mode RES: Restriction Data RES: Restricted ALL: Allowed
ND-45687 (E)
HISS CM3-02 Hotel

tel
HISS
Display of Hotel Program Issue
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function This command is used to display the program issue of the HP/MRC in the Hotel System. 3. Precautions This command cannot be used in the Business System. In the case of the HP, the program issue of the ACT-side HP is read out.
4. Related Reference Command: None 5. Entry Procedure Enter the type of the processor.
Display of Hotel Program Issue Processor:
PROCESSOR: HP/MR
Display of Hotel Program Issue Processor: VERSION ISSUE DATE
The system type is displayed here.
VERSION: ISSUE: DATE:
Program Version Program Issue Number Program Issue Date
ND-45687 (E)
HMBU CM3-02 Hotel

tel
HMBU
Hotel Main Memory Backup
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function Main Memory Save This command is necessary for saving the data in main memory of HP onto a floppy disk. Main Memory Verify This command is used to verify that the data in Main Memory of HP is identical to that stored on the floppy disk. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. Before saving the Main Memory of HP, the initialization (formatting) of the Floppy Disk is necessary. Error Indications FILE NOT FOUND?: There is no MM file on the floppy disk. (Incorrect floppy disk was inserted into the unit.) DISK I/O ERROR!?: There is a scratch, flaw, etc. on the floppy disk.
ND-45687 (E)
HMBU CM3-02 Hotel
5. Entry Procedure
[INPUT PARAMETERS] FUNCTION:S (S:Save V:Verify P:Verify with Error List) EXEC COUNT:1 (Max. 11) PROCESSOR:HP-O (HP Only) SEGMENT:0000 (Hexadecimal) [FILE INFORMATION IN FD] OFFICE:NEC TOKYO DATE:93/06/25 [FRI] IS A FLOPPY DISK SET IN DRIVE-B AND READY FOR OPERATION (Y/N)? Y
FILE Information is displayed
This line memory area Kbytes and the progress processing. FUNCTION: Operation Mode A: Save V: Verify P: Verify with Error List EXEC COUNT: Number of Processor to be Specified (Max. 11) SEGMENT: Main Memory SEGMENT Address of Processor OFFICE: Office Name DATE: File Date ERRORS: Number of Unmatched Data This data is displayed for Function = V (Verify).
means of 256 shows of the
When this command is being processed or has been completed, the following messages are displayed: FLOPPY DISK IS FULL!: This message means that the floppy disk is full. When the ENTER key is pressed, the next message is displayed. NEXT FLOPPY DISK SETTING ON DRIVE-II (Y/N)?: This message is displayed when the ENTER key is pressed following the FLOPPY DISK IS FULL! message. If Y + ENTER is entered after changing the Floppy Disk, processing is resumed. COMPLETED: Save, Verify have been completed. RETURN TO MENU (Y/N): Indication of next job Y: Return to MENU N: Start operation again.
ND-45687 (E)
RAST CM3-01 Hotel

tel
RAST
Remove Administration Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to delete Administration Station data. The data is assigned in the AAST command and displayed via the DLEN or DSTN command. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. If the pilot station of a station hunting group is deleted, the station hunting data for that group will also be deleted. Similarly, if the master station of a speed calling group is deleted, the speed calling data for that group will be deleted. If an attempt is made to delete a station which is busy, an error message will be displayed. When the PKG CHECK or HP PKG CHECK message is displayed, confirm that the circuit card (PA16LC, etc.) is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number (LEN) of the station. Depress Enter key after confirming the location. If NIGHT EXIST, SECRETARY EXIST, or PHANTOM EXIST is displayed after a station is deleted, the corresponding Night, Secretary, or Phantom station must also be deleted. Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)) are displayed only in the case of ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: AAST DLEN, DSTN LHEN, LHST
ND-45687 (E)
RAST CM3-01 Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For general Administration station: a. Enter the data for parameters TN, STN, LENS. (With these parameters entered, the data subsequent to TEC are displayed.)
STN:2000
TN:1 LENS:001010 TEC:2 RSC:1 NXT?
SFC:1
NXT? displays when the data for up to SFC have been displayed.
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
RSC: SFC: NXT:
Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS. [See (b)].
ND-45687 (E)
RAST CM3-01 Hotel
b.
TN:1
Display the data of ROOM CLASS.

STN:2000
The TN and STN entered in (a) display.
ROOM CLASS:1 DEL?
ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used
ND-45687 (E)
RAST CM3-01 Hotel
When Floor Service is provided: a. Enter the data for parameters TN, STN, LENS. (With these parameters entered, the data subsequent to TEC are displayed)
STN:2000
TN:1 LENS:001010
TEC:2 RSC:1SFC:1 NXT?
NXT? displays when the data for up to SFC have been displayed.
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
RSC: SFC: NXT:
Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB 3: DP/PB 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used 9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: D term 13: Data Terminal (via D term) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS through FLR. [See (b)].
ND-45687 (E)
RAST CM3-01 Hotel
b.
TN:1
Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR.

STN:2000 G:0 FLR:1
TN and STN entered in (a) display.
ROOM CLASS:1 ANX:0 DEL?
ROOM CLASS:
ANX: G:
FLR:
Room Class (0-15) 0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm V and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (D term and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used Annex (0-3) Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground Floor (1-127)
ND-45687 (E)
RGST CM3-01 Hotel

tel
RGST
Remove Guest Station Data
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-01 2. Function This command is used to delete Guest Station data. This data is assigned in the AGST command and displayed via the DLEN or DSTN command. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. If the pilot station of a station hunting group is deleted, the station hunting data for that group will also be deleted. Similarly, if the master station of a speed calling group is deleted, the speed calling data for that group will be deleted. If an attempt is made to delete a station which is busy, an error message will be displayed. When the or PKG CHECK or HP PKG CHECK message is displayed, confirm that the circuit card (PA16LC, etc.) is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number (LEN) of the station. Depress RETURN key after confirming the location. If NIGHT EXIST, SECRETARY EXIST, or PHANTOM EXIST is displayed after a station is deleted, the corresponding Night, Secretary, or Phantom station must also be deleted. Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FR)) are displayed only in the case of ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: AGST DLEN, DSTN LHEN, LHST
ND-45687 (E)
RGST CM3-01 Hotel
5. Entry Procedure For general guest Station: a. Enter the data for parameters TN, STN, LENS. (With these parameters entered, the data subsequent to TEC are displayed.)
STN:2000
SFC:1
NXT? displays when the data up to SFC have been displayed.
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
RSC: SFC: NXT?: b.

TN:1
Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS data. [See (b).]
Display of the data of ROOM CLASS

STN:2000
ROOM CLASS:1 DEL?
ROOM CLASS:
Room Class (0-15)
ND-45687 (E)
RGST CM3-01 Hotel
When Floor Service is provided: a. Enter the data for parameters TN, STN, LENS. (With these parameters entered, the data subsequent to TEC are displayed.)
STN:2000
SFC:1
NXT? displays when the data up to SFC have been displayed. Tenant Number Station Number Line Equipment Number (6 digits) Telephone Equipment Class 1-4: Not used 5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB 7: DP/PB 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NEXT Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS through FLR. [See (b).]
TN: STN: LENS: TEC:
RSC: SFC: NXT?:
ND-45687 (E)
RGST CM3-01 Hotel
b.
TN:1
Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR.

STN:2000
ROOM CLASS:1 ANX:0 DEL? G:0 FLR:1
ROOM CLASS:Room Class (0-15) ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground 0: Ground 1: Underground FLR: Floor (1-127)
ND-45687 (E)
RHSU CM3-02 Hotel

tel
RHSU
Remove Suite Room Station
1. Floppy Disk Name: CM3-02 2. Function When the system provides Suite Room Service, this command is used to delete a specific guest station assigned as a suite room station. 3. Precautions This command is used for Hotel system only. The station to be deleted must already be assigned as a suite room station. The suite room station must be deleted by designating the phantom number when a phantom number has been assigned at the time of the suite room station assignment or by designating the master guest station number when a phantom number has not been assigned.
4. Related Reference Command Assignment: Display: List up: 5. Entry Procedure When Phantom Number has been assigned: a.
TN:1
AHSU AHSU LHSU
Enter the data for parameters TN through P-STN.

TYPE:S
PHANTOM/MASTER:P P-STN:3000
TN: TYPE: PHANTOM/ MASTER: P-STN:
Tenant Number Suite Room type (Enter S.) S: Single Suite Room Phantom Number/Master Guest Station Number (P/M) (Enter P.) P: Phantom Number Phantom Number
ND-45687 (E)
RHSU CM3-02 Hotel
b.
Display the data of SING PHANTOM through S4.
SING PHANTOM:3000 MI:2000 S2:2001 S3:2002 S4:2003 DEL?
SING PHANTOM: Phantom Number M l: Master Guest Station S2- S4: Slave Guest Station When Phantom Number has not been assigned: a.
TN:1
Enter the data for parameters TN through M-STN.

TYPE:S
PHANTOM/MASTER:M M-STN:2000
TN: TYPE: PHANTOM/ MASTER: M-STN:
Tenant Number Suite Room type (Enter S.) S: Single Suite Room Phantom Number/Master Guest Station Number (P/M) (Enter M.) M: Master Guest Station Number Master Guest Station Number
(a) Display the data of SING PHANTOM through S4.

SING PHANTOM: **** M1:2000 S3:2002 DEL? S2:2001 S4:2003
Asterisks (****) display when no phantom number has been assigned.
SING PHANTOM: Ml: S2-S4:
Phantom Number Master Guest Station Slave Guest Station
ND-45687 (E)
ND-45687 (E)
CHAPTER 4
LIST UP COMMANDS
List Up commands print out data that has already been assigned. This section covers all List Up commands, in alphabetical order, including the Output Item and the meaning. The illustration below shows the relationship between List Up commands and Data assignment commands. The List Up commands and their associated assignment commands are included in Table 4-1, Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment, on Page 610.
Command Name
Floppy Disk Name
COMMAND LABD < Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME CM0-06
ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code
Output Item
Meaning
ND-45687 (E)
Table 4-1 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment LIST UP COMMAND ASSIGNMENT COMMAND
LABD LAKP LAND LANI LANP LARP LASP LATC LCBC LCDN LCEG LCEL LCFC LCFS LCIC LCID LCMO LCND LCNP LCOC LCPG LCPL LCSA LCSC LDA1 LDA2 LDID LDIM LDNR LDPC
AABD AAKP AAND AANI AANP AARP AASP AATC ACBC ACDN ACPE ACPE ACSI, ACFO, ANCD ACFS ACIC ACID ACMO ACND ACNP ACOC ACPG ACPG ACSA ACSC ADA1 ADA2 ACDD ADIM ADNR ADPC
ND-45687 (E)
LDSS LEFR LEKD LEVT LFCD LFCP LFRS LFXC LGNP LGSP LHEN LHKP LHLS LHMS LHMS2 LHST LHSU LHSY LICD LIZP LKYD LLEN LLMG LLPE LMAT LMDD LNDD LNND LNPD LNPT
ADSS AEFR AEKD AEVT AFCD AFCP AFRS AFXC AGNP AGSP AAST, AGST, ATRK AHKP AHLS AHMS AHMS2 AAST, AGST AHSU AHSY AICD AIZP AKYD ASDT, ATRK ALMG ALPE AMAT AMDD ANDD, AMND ANND ANPD, ASPA ANPT
ND-45687 (E)
LOPR LOSD LPAE LPAT LPCR LRAC LRCF LRDN LREF LRNP LRPC LRTC LRTD LRTE LRTI LSAT LSCR LSDA LSDC LSGD LSHG LSHL LSID LSLP LSLU LSMD LSPF LSPS LSTN LSYD
AOPR BOSD APHN, AAED APAT, ATGL APCR ARAC ACFR, ARRC ARDN AREF ARNP ARPC ARSC, ASFC, ATNR ARTD ARTE ARTI ASAT ASCR AISA, ASPD ASDC ASGD ASHC, ASHP, ASHU ASHC, ASHP, ASHU ASlD ASTP, AISP, AOSP ASLU ASMD ASPF ASPS ASDT, ASTN ASYD, AUNT, ASTD
ND-45687 (E)
LTAS LTCP LTCR LTDP LTRK LUAD LUCD LUNE LVTC LVTL
ATAS ATCP ATCR ATDP ATRK AUAD AUCD AUNE AVTC AVTL
ND-45687 (E)
LABD CM0-06
NAME LABD
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
ACC Restriction Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number ADC: Abbreviated

LAKP
Attendant Key Information Data List (for Business System)
CM0-05
< Output Item > ATTENDANT: Attendant Console Number FUNCTION CODE:Function Code KEY NUMBER: Key Number
LAND
Automatic Number Identification Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > ROUTE: Route number AT: STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing CC: Main Central/Satellite Central STNL: STA Number Lengths COC: Central Office Code SKIP: Call Originator Digit to be Skipped ADD: Office Code to be Added DC: Office Code
LANI
ANI Data List
CM0-06
<Output Item> TN: Tenant Range (a to b) a - Start Tenant Number b - End Tenant Number
LARP
Area Code Restriction Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > OGRT: Outgoing Route number DC: Destination Code RSC: Route Restriction Class RES: Restriction Data
LATC
Authorization Code Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number AUTHORIZATION CODE: Authorization Code ACR: Authorization Code Restriction Pattern Number SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class RSC: Route Restriction Class
ND-45687 (E)
LCBC CM0-09
NAME LCBC
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Call By Call Service Data List
CM0-09
< Output Item > TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern Number OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern RA: Order of Route Advance MN: Service Mode INT: National/International NET: Kind of Network SERV: Feature/Service CODE: Facility Coding Value BAND: WATS Band Number SCC: SCC Distinguish No.
LCCD
Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List
CM0-06
FUNC: Kind of Function A/C: Amp/Compulsion cut TN [a]TO [b]: Tenant Range
LCDN
Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number DC: Destination Code CDN: Number of Digits of Consecutive Dialing
LCEG
List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data
CM0-11
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Group 1ST-STN: 1st Station Number STN: Station Number
LCEL
List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data
CM0-11
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Group 1ST-STN: 1st Station Number STN: Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
LCFC CM0-05
NAME LCFC
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Call Forwarding /Connection Service Index Data List
CM0-05
1. For Connection Service Index Data ROUTE: Route Number NSI: Night Connection Service Index TENANT: Tenant Number ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code TRUNK: Trunk Number STN: Station Number 2. For Night Connection Data MG: Module Group Number NCU PKG: PFT Circuit Card Number PORT: Port Number ROUTE: Route Number TRUNK: Trunk Number 3. For Call Forwarding Data TENANT: Tenant Number ATTENDANT/STATION: Call Forwarding Destination CALL FORWARDING: Call Forwarding Service STATION NUMBER: Station Number
LCFS
Call Forwarding Station Data List
CM0-04
< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number TRK/STN: Receive Call Kind CF-V: Transfer Destination of C.F.-All Calls CF-B: Transfer Destination of C.F.-Busy Line CF-D: Transfer Destination of C.F.-Dont Answer
LCIC
CIC Data List
CM0-08
< Output Item > DETERMINATE POINT CODE:Determinate Point Code CSC GROUP NUMBER: CSC Group Number CIC NUMBER: CIC Number LENS: Line Equipment Number
LCID
Caller ID Data List
CM0-08
< Output Item > TYPE: 1 (Fixed) TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number CID: Calling ID Number (Max. 28 digits) SRV: Service Kind (5/6)
ND-45687 (E)
LCMO CM0-06
NAME LCMO
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Clock Manual Override Data List Block Number Start Time Pattern Number End Time
CM0-06
< Output Item > BLOCK NUMBER: START TIME: PATTERN NUMBER: END TIME:
LCND
Calling Number Data List
CM0-09
< Output Item > CNP: Calling Number Pattern ADD: Number of Digits of the Additional Number SKIP: Skip Digit DC: Digit Code of the Additional Number
LCNP
Calling Number Pattern Data List
CM0-09
< Output Item > OG/IC: Kind of Connection CNP: Calling Pattern Number RT: Route Number
LCOC
Central Office Code Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number DIGIT CODE: C.O. Number TRUNK: Trunk Number
LCPG
Call Pickup Group Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the Group CNT: Number of Stations in the Group
LCPL
Call Pickup Group Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the Group CNT: Number of Stations in the Group
LCSA
Connection Service Index A List
CM0-05
< Output Item > ROUTE NUMBER:Route Number CSIA: Connection Service Index A TENANT: Tenant Number TRUNK NUMBER:Trunk Number ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code STATION NUMBER:Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
LCSC CM0-08
NAME LCSC
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
CSC Data List
CM0-08
< Output Item > CSC GROUP NUMBER: CSC Group Number CIC GROUP NUMBER: CIC Group Number CCH LENS: CCH Accommodate Location
LDA1
DTE Attribute Data 1 List
CM0-06
< Output Item > CDN: Counter Display Number STN: Station Number CNTP: Connection Protocol FCY: Facility RST: Restriction CI: Calling Indicator TN: Tenant Number MEDIA: Media TCP: Transmission Control Protocol PRI: Priority SRP: Send Receive Priority
LDA2
DTE Attribute Data2 List
CM0-06
L< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number CDN: Counter Display Number AUTO: Auto Answer MDM2: Incoming MODEM Number PRTY: Parity Addition HDX: Half/Full Duplex CODE: Kind of Data HL: Hot Line RA: Kind of RA STN: Station Number DTR: DTR (ER) Control MDM1: Originating MODEM Number SPD: Bit Speed Rate ASYC: Asynchronous STOP: Stop Bit PRFN: Profile Number HTL: Hot Line Originate Condition
ND-45687 (E)
LDID CM0-06
NAME LDID
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Dial In Service Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode ROUTE NUMBER: Route Number RECEIVE DIGIT CODE: Receive Digit Code CHANGE DIGIT CODE: Change Digit Code ADD DIAL SERVICE: Additional Dialing TRANSFER SERVICE: Transfer Service
LDIM
Dial Intercom Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > MGNO: Module Group Number G-ID: Group ID Number Per MG N: Dial Intercom Digit Number BCR: Bridge Call Restriction ICMCT: Number of Intercom STN TN: Tenant Number ICM STN: lntercom Station Number
LDNI
Day/Night Information List
CM0-04
<Output Item> TN [a] TO [b]: Tenant Range

LDPC
Determinate Point Code Data List
CM0-08
< Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number DETERMINATE POINT CODE: Determinate Point Code
LEFR
EPN Facility Restriction Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > DAY/NIGHT/URGENT: Day, Night, Urgent Mode TENANT: Tenant Number RSC1: Calling Route Restriction Class RES: Restriction Data FRI: Facility Restriction Index RSC2: Called Route Restriction Class
ND-45687 (E)
LEKD CM0-05
NAME LEKD
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
External Key Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > MG: Module Group Number NCU PKG: RFT Circuit Card Number CP: Change Control Pattern ROUTE: Route Number CNT: Count of Input Tenants CTN: External Key Number TENANT: Tenant Number TRUNK: Trunk Number
LEVT
List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS
CM0-09
< Output Item > RT: Route Number TK: Trunk Number DESTINATION: Destination Number (Max. 6 digits) CALLING: Calling Number (Max. 24 digits) CALLED: Called Number (Max. 24 digits) C_RT: CCIS Signal Route Number C_TK: CCIS Signal Trunk Number VRY: Verification of Connection OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number of CBC Service RA: Order of Route Advance of CBC Service
LFCD
Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data List Line Equipment Number (Side-A) Line Equipment Number (Side-B) Equipment Additional Data Equipment Additional Data Call Forwarding by Calling Service List
CM0-06
< Output Item> LENS-A: LENS-B: EAD-A: EAD-B:

LFCP
CM0-09
< Output Item > D/N: Day/Night Mode CFSI: Call Forwarding Service Feature Index TN: Tenant Number CALLING PARTY: Calling Party Number and Called Party Number ITC: Information Transfer Capacity CFD: Call Forwarding Destination STN: Station Number
ND-45687 (E)
LFRS CM0-06
NAME LFRS
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Flexible Route Selection Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number NUMBER PATTERN CODE: Number Pattern Code OPR: Outgoing Pattern Routing ROUTE: Route Number OTHER OPR: Other Outgoing Pattern Routing
LHLS
Hot Line Data List Hot Line Tenant Number Hot Line Station Number Call partys Tenant Number Called partys Abbreviated Digit Code Called partys Trunk Number Called partys Station Number Called partys Route Number
CM0-05
<Output Item> HOT LINE TENANT: HOT LINE STATION: CON: CON ADC: CON TRUNK: CON: CON ROUTE:
LHMS
Hold Music Data List
CM0-06
<Output Item> RT: Route Number HMSC: Hold Music Data

LHMS2
Hold Music Data List
CM0-06
<Output Item> TN: Tenant Number RT: Route Number HMSC: Hold Music Data
LICD
Intercom Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > MGNO: Module Group Number A/M: Automatic/Manual Signaling ICMCT: Number of Intercom STN ICM STN: lntercom Station Number G-ID: Group ID Number per MG BCR: Bridge Call Restriction TN: Tenant Number SIG STN: Signaling Station Number
LIZP
Internal Zone Paging Data List Tenant number of calling party Internal Zone Paging group number (01-99) Tenant number of IZPSTN Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group
CM0-11
TN: IZPG: IZPTN: IZPSTN:
ND-45687 (E)
LKYD CM0-05
NAME LKYD
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Key Data for Dterm List
CM0-05
< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number TP: Type of Dterm RING: Ringing Data for Multilines PRI: Priority of Answering a Call ICM: Kind of Intercom G-ID: Group ID Number SPK: Speaker ANS: Answer ORG: Originating MWD: Message Waiting Data Display Selection S: OG from Prime Line KEY NO.: Key Number KEY INDEX: Kind of Service FUNC: Function Key Number PRIME/MULTI LINE TENANT, STN: Tenant Number and Station Number of Prime Line KD: Kind of Line RG: Ringing Data for each individual line of the Multilines ICM: Kind of Intercom G-ID: Group ID Number
LLEN
LENS Data List (for Business System)
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For Station LENS: Line Equipment Number STATION NUMBER: Station Number RSC: Route Restriction Class TENANT: Tenant Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class 2. For Trunk ROUTE: TRUNK:
LLMG
Route Number Trunk Number Alarm Grade Data List FK-FI: ALM: GR: System Message Alarm Kind Grade CM0-11
<Output Item> 1. ALL DATA 2. CHANGE DATA 3. DEFAULT DATA
ND-45687 (E)
LLPE CM0-06
NAME LLPE
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Line Privacy Expansion Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number
LMAT
Master Attendant Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number MASTER ATTENDANT: Master Attendant Number NIGHT MASTER ATTENDANT: Night Master Attendant OTHER ATTENDANT: Attendant Number
LMDD
MODEM Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > MODNO: MODEM Number DR: Data Ready HDX: Half/Full Duplex 2W/4W: 2W MODEM / 4W MODEM ASYNC: Asynchronous RSGT: RS-CS Guard Timer CDN: Counter Display Number R: Modem Ringing M/D: MODEM/DST SPEED: Bit Speed FCY: Facility
LNDD
Name Display Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number NAME: Users Office Name
ND-45687 (E)
LNND CM0-05
NAME LNND
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Necessary Digit Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For Number of Necessary Digits Data ROUTE: Route Number IN COMING: Incoming Call NECESSARY DIGITS: Number of Necessary Digits OUT GOING: Outgoing Call 2. For Maximum Number of Digits Data TENANT: Tenant Number MND: Maximum Necessary Digits AN: Account Number A/D: Analog/Digital Line Data DIAL CODE: Dial Code TOLL: Toll Code Identification RATE: Option Service Data
LNPD
Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List (for Business System)
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For Numbering Plan Data TENANT: Tenant Number CI: Connection Status Index BLF: Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON 1ST DC: 1st Digit Code NND: Number of Necessary Digits 2. For Special Access Code Data TENANT: Tenant Number CI: Connection Status Index NND: Number of Necessary Digits CNT: Number of Input of Alternative Routes SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone AH: Authorization Code Dialing SID: Service Feature Index SIDA: Service Feature Index A ACCESS CODE: Access Code SRV: Kind of Service RT: Route Number SUB: SUB Address
LNPT
Numbering Data List for PTT Network Digit Code (starting and ending)
CM0-06
DC:
ND-45687 (E)
LOPR CM0-06
NAME LOPR
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Outgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List Time of Day Change Pattern Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number Order of Route Advance Route Advance End Indication Outgoing Route Number Number of Digits to be Skipped Pattern Number Location Overflow tone Priority Restriction Class List Up of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Date
CM0-06
<Output Item> TDPTN: OPR: RA: E: RT: SKIP: PNL: OVFT: PRSC:
LOSD
CM0-04
< Output Item > Circuit Card TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number and Speed Calling Data LENA: Line Equipment Number < Output Item > FD TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number and Speed Calling Data
LPAE
Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For Phantom Number Data TENANT: Tenant Number PHANTOM NUMBER: Phantom Number STATION NUMBER: Station Number PHANTOM KIND: Kind of Phantom 2. For Announcement Equipment Data TENANT: Tenant Number ROUTE: Route Number CONNECT TIME: Duration of Connection MULTI SIGNAL: Multiple Connection EQUIPMENT NUMBER: Equipment Number TRUNK: Trunk Number REMOTE ANSWER: Answer Signal Sending SENDING RBT: Sending RBT
ND-45687 (E)
LPAT CM0-05
NAME LPAT
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
PAD Data /Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For PAD Data TDM/ST: Tandem Connection/Station Connection INCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route Number SERVICE CLASS: Service Feature Restriction Class INCOMING PAD: Incoming Pad Data OUTGOING PAD: Outgoing Pad Data ROUTE: Route Number 2. For Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data ATTENDANT NUMBER: Attendant Number TRUNK GROUP NUMBER: Trunk Group Number ROUTE: Route Number
LPCR
Primary Call Restriction Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number BLOCK NUMBER: Block Number PRIMARY CALL DIGIT CODE: Primary Call Digit Code RSC: Route Restriction Class RES: Restriction Data
LRAC
Remote PBX Access Code Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > INCOMING TRUNK TENANT: Incoming Trunk Tenant Number ACCESS CODE: Access Code TENANT: Tenant Number
LRCF
List Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For Alternative Route Restriction Data INCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route Number ALTERNATIVE ROUTE INDEX: Alternative Route Index (ATT/DIAL) RESTRICTION DATA: Restriction Data 2. For Call Forwarding Restriction Data TENANT: Tenant Number TRANSFER SERVICE FEATURE INDEX: Transfer Service Feature Index CALL CATEGORY INDEX (CCI): Call Category RES: Restriction Data
ND-45687 (E)
LRDN CM0-08
NAME LRDN
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Remote Control Day/Night List
CM0-08
< Output Item > INDEX: Point Code for Satellite Day/Night Mode POINT CODE: Point Code
LREF
Reference Number Information Data List
CM0-09
<Output Item> REF: Reference Number (Start, End)

LRNP
Reverse Numbering Plan Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number ACCESS CODE: Access Code
LRPC
Remote Point Code for Centralized Service
CM0-08
< Output Item > CSN: Centralized Service Number RPC: Remote Point Code
LRTC
Route/Service Feature Class Data and Tenant Restriction Class/Tenant Restriction Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For Route Restriction Class Data TENANT: Tenant Number RSC CODE: Route Restriction Class RRI: Route Restriction Index DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode ROUTE: Route Number RES: Restriction Data 2. For Service Feature Restriction Data TENANT: Tenant Number SERVICE INDEX: Service Feature Index RES: Restriction Data DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode SERVICE RESTRICTION CLASS:Service Feature Restriction Class 3. For Tenant Restriction Class Data DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode ORIGINATING: Originating Tenant TERMINATING TENANT: Terminating Tenant TENANT RESTRICTION INDEX: Tenant Restriction Index RES: Restriction Data
ND-45687 (E)
LRTD CM0-05
NAME LRTD
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Route Class Data List Route Number Signal Interface for Outgoing Signal Selection for Outgoing Signal Interface for Incoming Signal Selection for Incoming Type of Trunk Function Trunk Class Line/Trunk Identification Trunk Release Pattern Outgoing Trunk Queuing Detailed Billing Information Toll Denial Battery Reversal Distinctive Ringing Pattern Flexible Routing Pattern Designation Tenant Number Check Line Signal Detailed Billing Information Always output 0 Always output 0 E911-ANI Service Always output 0 Always output 0 Busy Service Line Trunk Privacy Analog/Digital Line Data Call Waiting Service OG Trunk Queuing-Deluxe Detection of Blocking Signal Trunk Selection Sequence Number Display of Dterm between offices ACD Service 2 Wires/4 Wires Authorization Code of ATTCON Dialed Number CoMSW:Always output 0 Split Cal Forwarding Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Attendant-Identification of Incoming Trunk Display Trunk Reversal Identification Tone Level Answer Signal from Trunk Side
CM0-05
<Output Item> ROUTE: OSGS: ONSG: ISGS: INSG: TF: TCL: L/T: RLP: TQ: SMDR: TD: DR: AC: TNT: LSG: SMDR2: H/M: MC: EANI: D: MSB: BT: PRV: A/D: CW: TPQ: BL: TRKS: DPLY: ACD: 2W/4W: FAAT: DC: SCF: MSW: TR: OC: R/L: RVSD: TL: ANS:
ND-45687 (E)
LRTD CM0-05
NAME LRTD, continued
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
TELP: PAD: OGRL: ICRL: HD: GUARD: WINK: VAD: CLD: FA: BC: TCM: TDMQ: TRSC: GW: TCMA: SMDR3: HDT: CD: CCH: TC/EC: IRE: SCR: LYER1: NET: INT: HKS: SCF: SMDR4:
Time Elapse Identification Service PAD Control Data Release Timing for Outgoing Trunk Connections Release Timing for Incoming Trunk Connections Trunk Hold Timing Outgoing Inhibit Timing after Trunk Release Width of Wink Signal Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Terminal Class Mark Tandem Off Hook OG Queuing Trunk Restriction Class Gate Way Always output 0 Always output 0 Heterogeneous Data Trunk Consecutive Dialing Common Channel Handler Always output 0 Always output 0 Step Call Restriction for Tie Line Call Layer 1 USER/NET Identification Interface Specification Trunk Hooking Signal Split Call Forwarding Always output 0
ND-45687 (E)
LRTE CM0-06
NAME LRTE
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data
CM0-06
<Output Item> RT: TCMN: TCMC: MFSP: KPST: KPPT: STC: MC: MT: TONE: PPTM: MPTM: LPTM: RSAX: CST: CSEG: CSEU: CSEL: CMP: TALK: FOT: RST: TOCI: TOCD: ODGD: RLS: GWD: H1: DT: CI: OID: TKS: PAD2: TRM: TRPX: LDR: TSC: SATS: RVPX: DQ: SLOV: SDTO: ADVPRA:
Route Number Number of Digit of TCM (S Code) TCM and Sending Sequence Sending Speed Duration of KP Sending Pause after KP Sending Stop Code MP Start Cause MF Frequency TONE Designation for TRK Call Termination Sender Prepause Sender Minimum Pause Sender Inter-Digit Pause Index Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Trunk Override Calling Trunk Override Called Always output 0 Always output 0 Gate Way Data Service Always output 0 Always output 0 ISDN Sending Information Always output 0 Always output 0 Pad Control Data 2 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Slumber Time Override System Message automatic output when Connection Acknowledge Signal not received ISDN PRI Fail safe Routing Service
ND-45687 (E)
LRTE CM0-06
NAME LRTE, continued
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
IND: UU2: DCH: CMRT: PREF: DFS: BOB: HO1CH: IFR: CONV: CNI:
Inter-office Name Display Always output 0 Always output 0 Common use of Route Numbers of ISDN trunks Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Indonesia Compulsion Cut Service SMDR Called Partys Number Conversion Calling Number Identification Format
ND-45687 (E)
LRTI CM0-09
NAME LRTI
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Trunk Application Data List
CM0-09
<Output Item> RETMSG: RST: HMT: TRCRST: TRSRST: T309LNK: T309CON: LLCRST: VCM: OVRT: POOL: DTRT: TMPRT: CODEC: PASS: IRL: MTC: TC: TS: CDCSPD: DVRST: RSCT: ROCG: RICG: STSENQ: ANI: SRV: TON: NPI: SPMET: ECCIS: ECCISTM: ECCISOB: ECCISIB: L/T: ECCISTD: MFCG2: CLBK:
Return Message for Connect ISDN LINE WITH Analog Trunk Assignment of Restart Always output 0 Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information Element Assignment of Timer T309 for Data Link Failure Assignment of Timer T309 for Layer 1 Failure Call Restriction by user rate in Low Layer Capability Information Element Always output 0 Always output 0 Always output 0 Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal (DTI Layer 1 alarm) Temporary Route Information over CCIS Always output 0 Always output 0 Clear call when DTI alarm is detected Assignment of Timer T309 Value. Restoration timer (TC MTC) sec. Timer T309 Counter Value Always output 0 Always output 0 Call Restriction while Tie Line is backed up on ISDN Call Restriction by Temporary Route Information Outgoing Call Account by Temporary Route Information Incoming Call Account by Temporary Route Information Status Inquiry Message Send Timing to demand ANI Information Additional Service Selection Type of Number Numbering Plan Identification Meter Pulse Observation Control Event Based CCIS (E-CCIS) Release Timer for E-CCIS Line OG Billing for E-CCIS Line IC Billing for E-CCIS Line Local/Toll (for Russia) Addressing Information used in E-CCIS Calling Party Category Kind of Collect Call Blocking Signal
ND-45687 (E)
LSAT CM0-05
NAME LSAT
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Specific Attendant Number Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > ATTENDANT NUMBER: Attendant Number ACCESS CODE: Access Code of Specific Attendant Number TENANT: Tenant Number
LSDA
Speed Calling Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For Speed Calling Data TENANT: CD: ADC:
Tenant Number Telephone Number Abbreviated Digit Code
2. For Individual Speed Calling Entry Area Data TENANT: Tenant Number MASTER/SLAVE: Station Type (Master Station/Slave Station) BLOCK: Number of Blocks STN: Station Number REMARK: Remarks
LSDC
Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > KIND: Kind of Selection OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number OFFICE: Office Code TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern Number RA: Route Advancing Order EFFECT: Designing Data
LSGD
Special Group List Tenant Number Function Number Station Number Specific Terminating Device Group Number
CM0-06
< Output Item > TENANT: FUNCTION NUMBER: STATION NUMBER: GROUP NUMBER:
ND-45687 (E)
LSHG CM0-05
NAME LSHG
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Station Hunting/UCD Data List
CM0-05
<Output Item> 1. For Station Hunting-Terminal Group TN: Tenant Number PILOT STN: Pilot Station Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group SCRET: Secretary Number 2. For Station-Hunting Circular Group Data TN: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group SECRET: Secretary Number 3. For Station Hunting-UCD Group Data TN: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group ADD: Number of Stations to be Added TN-B: Tenant Number of the UCD Overflow Group STN-B: Station Number of the UCD Overflow Group TNA, STNA: Tenant Number and Station Number of the UCD Group TNB, STNB: Tenant Number and Station Number of the UCD Group (To be Hunted)
LSHL
Station Hunting/UCD Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For Station Hunting - Terminal Group Data TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group SECRET: Secretary Number PILOT STN: Pilot Station Number STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group PHANTOM: Phantom Number 2. For Station Hunting - Circular Group Data TENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group SECRET: Secretary Number 3. For Station Hunting - UCD Group Data TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group
ND-45687 (E)
LSID CM0-06
NAME LSID
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Special Incoming List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number GROUP NUMBER: Specific Terminal Device Group Number FUNCTION NUMBER: Function Type STATION/ATT: Type of Specific Terminating Device (Station/ATT)
LSLP
Selection Translation Pattern Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > 1. For Selection Translation Pattern Data IC/OG: Incoming/Outgoing ROUTE: Route Number TENANT: Tenant Number PATTERN NUMBER: Selection Translation Pattern Number 2. For Incoming Selection Pattern Number Data INCOMING PATTERN NUMBER: Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number DIGIT INFORMATION: Additional Digit Information 3. For Outgoing Selection Pattern Number Data OUTGOING PATTERN NUMBER: Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number SKIP: Number of Skipped Digits ADD: Number of Added Digits DIGIT INFORMATION:Additional Digit Information
LSLU
Slumber Time Data List
CM0-04
< Output Item > FUNC: Kind of Function TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number G: Slumber Time Group Number CNT: Slumber Time Counter TFR: Transfer kind (ATT/Announcement) FROM: Slumber Time Start Time TO: Slumber Time End Time
LSMD
Service Module Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > KOSM: Kind of SM NOSM: Logical Number of each SM SMPN: SM Port Number SMI: Mounting Position of SMINT
ND-45687 (E)
LSTN CM0-05
NAME LSTN
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Station Data (Number Group) List (for Business System)
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. Station Number TENANT: Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction Class STATION NUMBER: Station Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class The following data is printed out when it belongs to Station Hunting-Terminal or Circular Group SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group The following data is printed out when it belongs to Call Pick Up Group. CNT: Number of Station in the Call Pick up Group When Phantom Number is assigned, the following data appears PILOT: Pilot Number PHANTOM: Phantom Number SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group < Output Item > 1. Station Number TENANT: Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction Class STATION NUMBER: Station Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class The following data is printed out when it belongs to Station Hunting-Terminal or Circular Group SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group The following data is printed out when it belongs to Call Pick Up Group. CNT: Number of Station in the Call Pick up Group When Phantom Number is assigned, the following data appears PILOT: Pilot Number PHANTOM: Phantom Number SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group
ND-45687 (E)
LSYD CM0-05
NAME LSTN (Continued)
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
In case of Hot Line the following appears. CON TN: Called Partys Tenant Number ADC: Called Partys Abbreviated Digit Code STN: Called Partys Station Number In case of Dterm the following data appears Dterm Key Position: Dterm Key Data The following data is printed out when it belongs to UCD Group CNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the UCD Group 2. Specific Attendant Number RT: Route Number CNT: Number of Trunks (Attendant) TN (ATN): Trunk (Attendant) Number TN: Tenant Number 3. For Listed Directory Number TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number
LSYD
System/Unit/Status Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > 1. For System Data SYS: System Data Type HEXA: Data (00-FF) in Hexadecimal Format TN: Tenant Number (Only SYS = 2) INDEX: System Data Index BINARY: Data in Binary Format 2. For Unit Data MODULE GROUP: Module Group Number UNIT TYPE: Unit Type Indication UNIT/PKG NUMBER: Unit/Circuit Card Number 3. For State Translation Data STATE TRANSLATION MAIN CATEGORY NO.: State Translation Main Category No. STATE TRANSLATION CATEGORY NO.: State Translation Category No. STATE TRANSLATION INFORMATION: State Translation Information
ND-45687 (E)
LTAS CM0-05
NAME LTAS
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
TAS Service Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number MODULE GROUP NUMBER:Module Group Number UNIT NUMBER: Unit Number CIRCUIT NUMBER: Circuit Number
LTCP
Time/Pattern Information Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > START TIME: Start Time END TIME: End Time PATTERN: Pattern Number
LTDP
Toll Code Restriction Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode TDM/OG: Tandem/Outgoing Connection RSC: Route Restriction Class OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route Number INCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number DIGIT CODE: Destination Code TDI: Restriction Data
LTRK
Trunk Data List
CM0-05
< Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number TRUNK: Trunk Number LENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class CNT: Number of Tenants TENANT: Tenant Number
LUAD
UCD Delayed Announcement Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > GROUP COMMON:Announcement Data is Common to all Group TN: Tenant Number of UCD Group Control Station STN: Station Number of UCD Group Control Station DLYT: Delay Timer MSGT: Message Timer RP: Designation of Number of Times Announcement is heard. lNT: Repeating Interval CNT: Number of Announcement Trunks RT: Route Number of Announcement Trunk TK: Trunk Number of Announcement Trunk
ND-45687 (E)
LUCD CM0-06
NAME LUCD
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
UCD Control Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number of UCD Group Control Station STN: Station Number of UCD Group Control Station QTH ACT: UCD Queing Peg Count QTH: UCD Queing Peg Count Value CWT: Threshold Value of Call Waiting MCI: Message Center Interface Data Transfer
LUNE
Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List
CM0-06
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number NUMBER PATTERN CODE:Number Pattern Code SKIP: Number of Possible Skipped Digits ROUTE: Route Number
LVTC
Virtual Tie Line Call Data List
CM0-09
< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number use Virtual Tie Line Call
LVTL
Virtual Tie Line Data List
CM0-09
< Output Item > DATE: Date Range PTN: Pattern Number IC/OG: Kind of Assign RT: Route Number TK: Trunk Number D-LENS: LENS of Dch CH: Bch Number CALLING: Calling Number CALLED: Called Number KEYPAD: Keypad Information SUB: Kind of Sub Address SUB No.: Sub Address WEEK: Week Range TIME: Time Range RESULT: Result
ND-45687 (E)
ND-45687 (E)
LANP CM3-03
CHAPTER 5
HOTEL SYSTEM LIST UP COMMANDS
The following List Up commands are used for hotel/motel applications only.
NAME LANP
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List Tenant Number Connection Status Index Number of Necessary Digits 1st Digit Code Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON
CM3-03
< Output Item > TENANT: CI: NND: 1 ST DC: BLF:

LASP
Administration Special Access Code Data List
CM3-03
< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number CI: Connection Status Index NND: Number of Necessary Digits CNT: Number of Input of Alternative Routes SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone AH: Authorization Code Dialing SID: Service Feature Index SIDA: Service Feature Index A ACCESS CODE: Access Code SRV: Kind of Service RT: Route Number SUB: SUB Address
LDNR
Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List Tenant Number Day Hour Route Restriction Class Night Minute
CM3-03
< Output Item > TN: DAY: HOUR: RSC: NIGHT: MINUTE:
LDSS
Direct Station Select Data List Attendant Number Called Number DSS key Number
CM3-03
< Output Item > ATN: DC: DSS:
ND-45687 (E)
LFXC CM3-03
NAME LFXC
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
List Up of Fixed Connection (Nail Down Connection Data) Line Equipment Number of Data Link Interface Trunk Line Equipment Number of Dterm
CM3-03
< Output Item > LENS-A: LENS-B:

LGNP
Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List Tenant Number Connection Status Index Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON 1st Digit Code Number of Necessary Digits Guest Special Access Code List Tenant Number Connection Status Index Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON 1st Digit Code Number of Necessary Digits LENS Data List Function Unit Number Module Group Number Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List
CM3-03
<Output Item> TENANT: CI: BLF: 1 ST DC: NND:

LGSP
CM3-03
<Output Item> TENANT: CI: BLF: 1 ST DC: NND:

LHEN
CM3-03
<Output Item> FUNC: UNIT: MG:

LHKP
CM3-03
<Output Item> ATTENDANT: Attendant Console Number FUNCTION CODE:Function Code KEY NUMBER:Key Number
LHST
Station Data (Numbering Group) List Tenant Number Line Equipment Number Route Restriction Class Room Class Station Number Telephone Class Service Feature Restriction Class
CM3-03
< Output Item > TN: LENS: RSC: CLASS: STN: TEC: SFC:
ND-45687 (E)
LHSU CM3-03
NAME LHSU
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Suite Room Data List
CM3-03
< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number TYPE: Suite Room Type LENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class MSTN: Master Guest Station Number STN: Slave Guest Station Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class PHANTOM: Phantom Number
LHSY
Hotel System Parameter List Hotel System Data Index Data in Binary Format Data (00-FF) in Hexadecimal Format
CM3-03
< Output Item > INDEX: BINARY: HEXA:

LSCR
Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List
CM3-03
< Output Item > CALLING TN: Calling Tenant Number CALLING RSC: Route Restriction Class of Calling Side CALLED RSC: Route Restriction Class of Called Side CALLED TN: Called Tenant Number
LSPF
Special Access Code Floor Data List Day/Night Kind of Assignment Number Ground/Underground Called Number Tenant Number Annex Floor Range
CM3-03
< Output Item > D/N: NO.: G: DC: TENANT: ANX: FLR:
ND-45687 (E)
LSPS CM3-03
NAME LSPS
COMMAND FULL NAME
FD NAME
Same Number Special Access Code Data List
CM3-03
< Output Item > NO.:
This Parameter Specifies the number (0-63) of the station number being assigned for mutual access and serves as a counter for the station numbers being assigned. F: Development Parameter Value (0-15) KIND OF SERVICE: Kind of Service NND: Number of Necessary Digits CNT: Number of Input of Alternative Routes SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone AH: Authorization Code Dialing SID: Service Feature Index SIDA: Service Feature Index A ACCESS CODE: Access Code SRV: Kind of Service RT: Route Number SUB: SUB Address TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List Day/Night Telephone Class of Calling Side Telephone Class of Called Side CM3-03
LTCR
< Output Item > D/N: CALLING TEC: CALLED TEC:
ND-45687 (E)

NEC Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NEC Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 STOCK # 200705

NEC America, Inc.

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 1/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 2/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 3/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 4/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 5/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 6/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 7/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 8/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 9/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 10/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 11/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

MARCH, 1994 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

Revision Sheet Page 12/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 JULY, 1998

NEAX2400 ICS Command Manual

3. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 16 28 29 30 35 39 42 44 45 46 48 50 55 56 57 59 61 63 65 66 67 68 69

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Revision 4.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iii Revision 4.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iv Revision 4.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page v Revision 4.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page vi Revision 4.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)